2015

INTRODUCTION TO
ECONOMICS AND FINANCE
STUDY TEXT

CAF-02

ICAP

Introduction to
economics and finance

Second edition published by

Emile Woolf International
Bracknell Enterprise & Innovation Hub
Ocean House, 12th Floor, The Ring
Bracknell, Berkshire, RG12 1AX United Kingdom
Email: [email protected]
www.emilewoolf.com

Emile Woolf International, January 2015

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording, scanning or otherwise, without the prior permission in writing of Emile Woolf
International, or as expressly permitted by law, or under the terms agreed with the
appropriate reprographics rights organisation.
You must not circulate this book in any other binding or cover and you must impose the
same condition on any acquirer.

Notice
Emile Woolf International has made every effort to ensure that at the time of writing the
contents of this study text are accurate, but neither Emile Woolf International nor its directors
or employees shall be under any liability whatsoever for any inaccurate or misleading
information this work could contain.

Emile Woolf International

ii

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

C
Contents
Page

Syllabus objective and learning outcomes

Chapter
1

Economic concepts

Microeconomics

25

Demand and supply: elasticities

51

Utility analysis

83

Costs, revenues and firms

109

Macroeconomics: An introduction

151

Consumption, savings and investment

181

Multiplier and accelerator

197

Money

217

10

Growth and taxes

245

11

Monetary policy

259

12

Credit

273

13

Balance of payments and trade

285

14

Financial markets

303

Index

Emile Woolf International

311

iii

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

iv

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Syllabus objectives
and learning outcomes
ASSESSMENT OF FUNDAMENTAL COMPETENCIES
INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS AND FINANCE
Objective
To enable candidates to equip themselves with the fundamental concepts of economics
and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of finance.

Learning Outcome
The candidate will be able to:
1

understand the nature of micro-economics and its basic concepts

understand the nature of macro-economics and its relation with the measurement
of economic growth

understand how the balance of payments of a country is worked out

understand the nature of banking systems

understand the basic function of financial markets.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Grid

Weighting

Concepts of economics

5-10

Microeconomics

25-35

Macroeconomics

25-35

Introduction to banking system, financial markets and

international trade

25-35
Total

Syllabus
Ref

Contents

Level

100

Learning Outcome

Concepts of economics
1

The economic problem wants, resources, scarcity

LO1.1.1: Understand the fundamental

nature of economics
LO1.1.2: Describe the scope and
objectives of economics.
LO1.1.3: Describe, with examples, the
concept of economic problem and its
implications for an economy.
LO1.1.4: Explain with examples the
four factors of production.
LO1.1.5: Discuss the production
possibility curve and its relevance to the
concept of opportunity cost

Economic systems planned, market and mixed

economies

Islamic economic system

LO1.2.1: Describe the major functions

of an economic system
LO1.2.2: Explain the salient features of
planned, mixed and market economies
LO1.2.3: Provide examples of mixed,
planned and market economies
LO1.2.4: Describe the shortfalls of a
market economy
LO1.3.1: Describe the main features of
the Islamic economic system
LO1.3.2: Compare the Islamic
economic system with other economic
systems.

Emile Woolf International

vi

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Syllabus and study guide

Microeconomics
1

Microeconomics nature

LO2.1.1: Define micro economics and

discuss its scope and limitations.

Demand and supply

LO2.2.1: Define law of demand and

explain its assumptions, limitations and
exceptions
LO2.2.2: Define law of supply and
explain its assumptions.

Equilibrium of demand and

supply

LO2.3.1: Explain the determination of

price by equilibrium of demand and
supply
LO2.3.2: Explain the effect of changes
in demand and supply
LO2.3.3: Discuss the determination of
price of perishable and durable goods.

Elasticity of demand and

supply

LO2.4.1: Describe the concept of

elasticity of demand and its practical
application
LO2.4.2: Explain the determinants of
the elasticity of demand
LO2.4.3: Demonstrate the
measurement of price, income, point,
arc and cross elasticity of demand
LO2.4.4: Describe the concept of
elasticity of supply and explain the
percentage and graphical methods of
measurement of elasticity of supply
LO2.4.5: Describe the determinants of
supply elasticity.

Utility analysis and

indifference curve

LO2.5.1: Explain the law of diminishing

marginal utility and discuss its
assumptions and limitations
LO2.5.2: Explain the law of equimarginal utility
LO2.5.3: Discuss the meaning and
characteristics of indifference curves
LO2.5.4: Explain consumers
equilibrium through indifference curve
analysis.

Emile Woolf International

vii

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Microeconomics (continued)
6

Cost and revenue curves

LO2.6.1: Discuss short run curves of

total cost, total fixed cost, total variable
cost, average cost and marginal cost
LO2.6.2: Derive a long run average
cost curve from a short run average
cost curve
LO2.6.3: Derive a long run marginal
cost curve
LO2.6.4: Discuss revenue curves under
perfect and imperfect competition
LO2.6.5: Discuss the concept of
economies and diseconomies of scale.

Equilibrium of firm in the

short and long term under
perfect competition,
monopoly, oligopoly and
monopolistic conditions

Laws of increasing and

diminishing returns

LO2.7.1: State the features of perfect

and imperfect competition
LO2.7.2: Discuss the short and long
run equilibrium of firms under perfect
and imperfect competition.
LO2.8.1: Explain the law of increasing
returns and its application and
assumptions
LO2.8.2: Explain the law of diminishing
returns and its application and
assumptions

Macroeconomics
1

Measurement of national
income including knowledge
of basic concepts like GDP,
GNP, NNP

LO3.1.1: Define macro- economics and

discuss its scope and limitations
LO3.1.2: Define gross national product,
gross domestic product and net
national product
LO3.1.3: Explain the product approach,
income approach and expenditure
approach to the measurement of
national income
LO3.1.4: Explain circular flow of
Income
LO3.1.5: State the difficulties usually
faced in measuring National Income.

Emile Woolf International

viii

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Syllabus and study guide

Macroeconomics (continued)
2

Consumption, saving and

investment functions;

LO3.2.1: Understand the meaning of

consumption and saving and its
relationship with the income
LO3.2.2: Identify how Keynes
Psychological law of consumption
explains the relationship between
consumption and income with the help
of average propensity to consume and
marginal propensity to consume curves
LO3.2.3: Understand the determinants
of the consumption function
LO3.2.4: Understand the stability of
consumption and saving functions in
the short run and discuss the reasons
thereof
LO3.2.5: Understand the meaning of
investment, induced investment and
autonomous investment
LO3.2.6: Explain the relationship of
investment with marginal efficiency of
capital and interest rate.

Marginal propensity to
consume and save

LO3.3.1: Discuss the marginal

propensity to consume and save

Multiplier and accelerator;

LO3.4.1: Comprehend the effect of the

multiplier on the level of national
income
LO3.4.2: Understand the assumptions
and limitations of the multiplier
concepts
LO3.4.3: Comprehend the principle of
acceleration of derived demand
LO3.4.4: Understand how the multiplier
and accelerator interact

Emile Woolf International

ix

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Macroeconomics (continued)
5

LO3.5.1: Understand the main

functions of money
LO3.5.2: Understand credit money and
its advantages and disadvantages

Money and its value

LO3.5.3: Understand sources of the

money supply
LO3.5.4: Understand the quantity
theory of money
LO3.5.5: Understand the measurement
of the value of money
LO3.5.6: Understand inflation and its
kinds and impacts
LO3.5.7: Understand the causes of
inflation and measures for overcoming
inflation
LO3.5.8: Understand the
unemployment and its types and
Phillips Curve
6

Growth and recession

LO3.6.1: Understand different phases

of the business cycle
LO3.6.2: Understand the indicators of
growth and recession

Fiscal budget

LO3.7.1: Explain the fiscal policy and

its objectives and how they are
achieved through fiscal budgets
LO3.7.2: Discuss the limitations of
fiscal policy

Direct and indirect taxation

LO3.8.1: Define direct and indirect

taxation,
LO3.8.2: Understand functions of
taxation, types of taxes and
characteristics of good tax policy
LO3.8.3: Explain the advantages and
disadvantages of direct taxation
LO3.8.4: Explain the advantages and
disadvantages of indirect taxation

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Syllabus and study guide

Introduction to banking system, financial markets and international trade

a

Banking system

Credit formation by banks

LO4.1.1: Explain the process of

creation of credit money by the banks
LO4.1.2: Discuss the limitations on the
creation of credit

Role of Central Bank;

LO4.2.1: Describe the functions of a

central bank

Monetary policy

LO4.3.1: Understand the meaning of

monetary policy
LO4.3.2: Understand the objectives of
monetary policy and the mutual conflict
of the objectives

LO4.4.1: Define a bank and describe its

kinds.

Money market

LO5.1.1: Describe the main features

and objectives of money markets

Capital markets.

LO5.2.1: Describe the main features

and objectives of capital markets

Derivative market

International trade

Balance of trade and

payment

Types of banks and financial

institution

Financial markets-Meaning

Emile Woolf International

LO5.3.1: Describe the main features

and objectives of derivatives and
derivative markets

xi

LO6.1.1: Discuss the concept of

exchange rate, its determination and
governments policy to influence it.
LO6.1.2: Understand the nature of
items that are accounted for in the
concept of balance of trade and
payment
LO6.1.3: Understand the different parts
of balance of payment

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

xii

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Economic concepts
Contents
1 The economic problem
2 Economic systems
3 Economic systems: Islamic

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO

Understand the basic concepts of economics.

LO1.1.1:

The economic problem - wants, resources, scarcity: Understand the

fundamental nature of economics

LO1.1.2:

The economic problem - wants, resources, scarcity: Describe the scope and
objectives of economics

LO1.1.3:

The economic problem - wants, resources, scarcity: Describe, with examples,

the concept of economic problem and its implications for an economy

LO1.1.4:

The economic problem - wants, resources, scarcity: Explain with examples the
four factors of production

LO1.1.5:

The economic problem - wants, resources, scarcity: Discuss the production

possibility curve and its relevance to the concept of opportunity cost

LO1.2.1:

Economic systems - planned, market and mixed economies: Describe the

major functions of an economic system

LO1.2.2:

Economic systems - planned, market and mixed economies: Explain the

salient features of planned, mixed and market economies

LO1.2.3:

Economic systems - planned, market and mixed economies: Provide

examples of mixed, planned and market economies

LO1.2.4:

Economic systems - planned, market and mixed economies: Describe the

shortfalls of a market economy

LO1.3.1:

Islamic economic system: Describe the main features of the Islamic economic
system

LO1.3.2:

Islamic economic system: Compare the Islamic economic system with other
economic systems.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

THE ECONOMIC PROBLEM

Section overview

Definition

How economics is studied

Microeconomics and macroeconomics

Participants in an economy

Circular flow of income

Scarcity and Choice

Factors of Production

Opportunity Cost

1.1 Definition
Economics is important! It is arguably one of the more important disciplines in the
world as it aims to provide guidance on how the scarce economic resources of
the world can be allocated to the greater good.
The importance of economics is emphasised by the fact that all governments
have economic advisers and that there are articles about the economy on an
almost daily basis in all television news programmes and newspapers etc.
Definition: The economic problem
The allocation of scarce resources to satisfy potentially unlimited needs.
In a utopian world everybody would have everything they ever needed.
Everything (food, water, shelter, consumables, holidays, computers) would be
plentiful and available to all. Everyones needs would be met. If resources were
unlimited, then there would be no problem for economists to solve and there
would be no need for economic study.
However, we do not live in Utopia. It is not possible to have everything that we
desire. In response, society must make decisions to make the best of what it can,
with what scarce resources it has.
This is a very complex and subjective issue and requires answers to complex
questions:

How do we distribute resources in such a way that is fair and equitable?

How do we ensure that incentives promote desirable behaviour?

How do we manage our scarce resources in a sustainable way?

The aim of this text is to provide fundamental toolkit needed to undertake

economic analysis.
There is a plethora of different opinions on how to solve the economic problem in
the innumerate ways that it presents itself. There is joke that says if you put 10
economists in a room, you will get 11 different opinions. This does not mean that
economists are stupid or that the study of economics is worthless. Rather it
indicates that economists are trying to provide guidance on complex issues that
exist in a complex and dynamic environment.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

That says, there are many things that economists agree on. There is often just
one way of correctly reaching a conclusion based on the evidence presented
before you. Nevertheless, disagreements are numerous and in cases where
there are conflicting opinions, both will be presented.

1.2 How economics is studied?

Economics seeks to solve problems that exist in the world. However, the world is
a complex place, meaning it is rarely possible to conduct scientifically fair
experiments.
A scientist can investigate a problem experimentally. For example, a food
biologist might be interested in how a new fertiliser might improve crop yield. She
could set up an experiment where two plants were grown in identical conditions
except that one was given the new fertilizer. Any difference in yield might then be
inferred to be due to the fertilizer.
Economists cannot work in this way (an economist could hardly increase the
interest rates in Pakistan just to see what would happen). As an alternative
approach, economists construct models to try to gain insight into the workings of
an economy. These models are often based on simplifying assumptions.
For example, if an economist is interested in the market for corn, he will be
looking to test only a certain aspect of that market. Just as a scientist tries to
eliminate other influences (by keeping them constant) the economist does this by
assuming certain parts of the model will remain constant.
Whilst this is evidently not necessarily a fully accurate representation of the corn
market, it allows the economist to test what might happen if the conditions
change.
So, conceptually, it may help to think of process in the following way:

The topography of the world is immensely complex.

Economists look to draw simplified maps of the world to test various

theories about it.

These maps will be different for each economist, and most of the debate
between them is down to the accuracy of the maps, and what should and
shouldnt be included.

Always try to think of an economic theory in terms of how it is a representation of

the real world, and consider where debate might come in terms of its applicability.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

1.3 Microeconomics and macroeconomics

The subject of economics is split into two broad topics:

Microeconomics; and

Macroeconomics

The following table provides a flavour of the different emphasis of these topics.
Microeconomics

Macroeconomics

Derivation of the term

Micros is the Greek

word for small

Macros is the Greek

word for large

Deals with

Markets

The economy in
aggregate (as a whole)

Focus

The behaviour (how they

make choices) of
individual consumers,
households and firms

Government policy

Typical questions

What determines the

price of rice?

What will happen to

inflation if interest rates
rise?

What will happen to

demand if price falls?

How can unemployment

be reduced?

What will happen to the

supply if price
increases?

How can the standard of

living be improved?

What will happen to

demand if incomes rise?

1.4 Participants in an economy

The economic problem affects different agents within an economy in different
ways. In the simplest form of an economy, the three main types of agent are as
follows:
Households (consumption units): Allocating its scarce income between
different goods and services to satisfy its needs.
Firms (production units): Allocating scarce factors of production (labour,
equipment, raw materials) between different potential products to increase its
profits.
Governments: Allocating its resources (tax revenue, staff etc.) between different
social needs.
Before we go into this further, first lets clarify the terms we have used.
Definition: Agent
An actor or decision-maker within an economic model.
Agent will be used a lot throughout this text to signify a piece of the economic
model that is presented. It is a generic terminology that can be applied to many of
the people that exist within an economy. Agent is a more precise form of
explanation.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Definition: Households
The collective group of individuals not only consuming goods and services, but
also providing labour for firms.
We dont restrict this to people who only live in particular houses, or for families.
Instead this is used to collectively summarise the segment of society which acts
as consumers.
Definition: Firms
The collective group of organisations producing goods and services in an
economy
Again, despite the infinitesimal variety between firms, they are categorised as the
same, in order to analyse a segment within the economy.
Definition: Government
Also known as the state, the organisation that governs over society through a
combination of customs, exercises and laws.
The government is assumed to have a different set of incentives to the other
agents, and they are looked upon to provide basic needs and provisions to
society.
With our three sets of agents, we have a representation of an economy that is
totally independent from the rest of the world. Of course, barring a few
exceptions, each country in the world has some element of international
engagement. This therefore means that we must include a fourth agent to the
model:
Foreign traders: Exchanging resources between the circular flows of different
economies.
Definition: Foreign traders
The collective group who exchange goods and services between different
economies
The inclusion of foreign traders to the economic model brings with it a higher
degree of complexity, as it is more difficult to track the interactions that are made.
Nevertheless, their inclusion gives a more accurate description of how the world
works.
Examples from this group in the economy include firms that buy from other
countries and sell in their own and to domestic firms that are placed in another
country.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

1.5 Circular flow of income

One of the most important models used by economists to describe an economy
is the circular flow of income. Circular flow of income diagrams are used to
illustrate the different sectors and markets with in an economy.
Money flows between households and firms through the purchase of goods and
services. There are two sides to every transaction. The business sector uses
labour provided by the household sector to produce goods and services and pays
for this labour. These are then sold to other firms within the business sector and
to households.
Illustration: Circular flow of income (2 sectors)

Further sectors can be included to provide a more complete picture of an

economy.
Illustration: Circular flow of income

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.6 Scarcity and choice

This then leads us into a few more concepts regarding the use of the economic
problem.
Definitions
Scarcity: Where resources are insufficient to satisfy all of ones competing
demands
Choice: The process of allocating resources between competing alternative uses.
We have been introduced to scarcity earlier on in the text. It is effectively a
means of explaining how something is finite, and there is not enough of it for
everyone to be satisfied.
Therefore, as stated before, agents in the economy must make choices over how
they act, seeing as it is not possible for everyone to be totally satisfied.
This leads us to choice. In which way does an agent decide to do something? An
example here would be a farmer deciding whether to plant corn or trees in his 4
fields. Each would have their merits (providing food, or material for shelter);
however due to the scarcity that exists in utopia he could have a million fields
a choice must be made.
In the economic world how this decision is arrived at is noteworthy. Of course,
each individual in the world will be different, and probably have different
preferences. However, these are impossible to model; and hence conduct proper
analysis. Therefore assumptions are made with regard to how agents will come
to a decision, based upon the conditions they are set in.
Definition: Rational behaviour (rationality)
Decisions made that result in the optimal level of benefit for the agent
undertaking them.
Rationality is a particularly contentious issue within economics, and many recent
economists have begun attempting to disprove this assumption. Nevertheless, it
is still applicable in many economic models.
Example:
If someone was asked to choose between two envelopes: one with $10 and one
with $20, we would assume he would choose the latter.
Slightly more complicatedly, if John says he prefers Apples to Bananas, and
Bananas to Carrots does he prefer Apples or Carrots?
Assuming rationality, an economist would not need to ask that question. If John
has stated that if faced with a Banana and a Carrot, he would choose Banana, and
yet if asked to choose between Banana and Apple, it would be Apple, then the
chain of logic would imply that under no circumstances would he prefer a Carrot.
This is just a very rudimentary introduction to the concept of rationality. In short,
you can think of it as if someone is going to yield more benefit from taking one
action, compared to another, we can safely assume that they will take it.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

1.7 Factors of production

The factors of production are the resources used in producing any goods and
services. These are classified as:

Land: this categorises the natural resources on the planet

Labour: this is the human input into the process

Capital: Man-made resources used to produce other goods and services

Enterprise: An entrepreneur organises the 3 other factors, and also takes

on the risk in the venture.

Different goods and services use different combinations of the factors of

production.
Example:
To understand this further, lets look at the factors of production in making a
textbook:
Land: raw materials to make paper, string, and other parts
Labour: author writing the words
Capital: machine to compile the book
Enterprise: owner of the company that energised the factors of production to
make a textbook
This exercise can be done with almost every other good and service in an economy.
For example, a house cleaner:
Land: raw materials to make cleaning products
Labour: cleaner using his skill to clean a house
Capital: the products that he uses to clean
Enterprise: combining the 3 factors to create an enterprise

It is important that economic resources are used efficiently because they are
scarce. The demand for factors of production is a derived demand. This means
that they are required to help meet the demand for other goods. For example, the
value of agricultural land derives from demand for what can be grown on it.
Land
This refers to all of Earths natural resources including:

Non-renewable resources (natural gas, oil, coal, minerals, precious metals

etc.)

Renewable resources (wind power, tidal power, hydro-electric power,

geothermal power, as well as wood and agricultural produce)

Water

Animals

Almost every factor that falls into this category is scarce. In other words, there are
not enough natural resources to meet demand.
Note that many renewable resources must be managed carefully if they are to be
sustainable. For example, in commercial forestry, trees must be replanted and
allowed to mature to replace those that are harvested.

Emile Woolf International

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Labour
This refers to the work done by those who contribute to the production
processes.
Many people not in paid employment also provide things that are needed by
people. For example, a woman might not hold a job in order to raise her children
and look after the home.
Some people are more productive in the work place than others because they
have different levels of education, training and experience. They are said to
possess a greater amount of human capital.
This implies that this factor can be enhanced in an economy through educational
initiatives and investment in training.
Capital
This refers to man-made resources. It includes machinery, equipment, factories,
commercial buildings, hospitals, schools, roads, railways, docks etc.
A great deal of the capital in an economy is paid for by government. For example,
transport networks (roads, railways and airports) hospitals schools and
universities.
Enterprise
This refers to the people who take the risk of production using the other three
factors. These people are known as entrepreneurs.
Entrepreneurs set up businesses. If the business fails they can lose a lot of
money. However, if the business is successful they can achieve great wealth.
They are rewarded for their risk taking by the profits of the company.
Entrepreneurs are very important in an economy. They create businesses
provide a return to the other factors of production.

1.8 Opportunity cost

The opportunity cost is another important concept in economics.
It is used as a measure for how economic agents make decisions, and form the
backbone of economic theory.
In every decision that an economic agent makes, there will be some alternate
use for his scarce resources. What these scarce resources could have been
utilised for, is a way of measuring the cost of making that decision.
This will become clearer with some examples:
Example:
The opportunity cost of buying a car, is what else that money could have bought.
The opportunity cost of a firm buying a new machine, is a wage increase for all of
the workers.
The opportunity cost of the government investing in a social benefits scheme is an
infrastructure project.
The opportunity cost of deciding not to work, is the forgone wages that could have
been earned.
The opportunity cost of being bought lunch by a friend (which lasts 2 hours), is the
value of that time (it could have been used to earn $50 in wages).

Emile Woolf International

10

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

There will often be several alternatives to making a certain choice. When

calculating the opportunity cost, it is important that only the highest-value
alternative that has been sacrificed is considered.
Definition: Opportunity cost
The cost of one economic decision expressed in terms of the next best alternative
foregone.
It is helpful to look at some alternatives that someone may be faced with to
assess what is the true opportunity cost that they would face.
Example:
The opportunity cost of buying a car, is what else that money could have bought
Richard may be faced with a number of options with what to do on a Sunday
evening. He could:

Go out for a meal with his friends

Decorate the spare room in his house

Spend time watching a film with his girlfriend

Go to the gym and exercise

He thinks about it and believes hell get the following benefit from each action:

Go out for a meal with his friends (10)

Decorate the spare room in his house (4)

Spend time watching a film with his girlfriend (7)

Go to the gym and exercise (8)

Richard therefore talks to his friends and organises to go out for dinner.
What is the opportunity cost of this decision to him?
Is it the combination of all the other activities he could have done? No. It is the
value of the next best alternative.
Had the option of going for a meal with his friends not been taken, the benefit he
would have got from the next best alternative would have been 8.
The opportunity cost of going for a meal with his friends was not going to the gym
and exercising.
Applications
Opportunity costs can be applied to all of the agents that we have discussed so
far in a number of different ways.
Households: The satisfaction foregone by consuming Good A rather than
spending the money on Good B.
Firms: The revenue foregone by using productive resources to supply Good A
rather than using them to supply Good B.
Governments: The social needs forgone by using resources to provide Service
A (e.g. education) rather than Service B (e.g. health).
Nations: Choosing what types of industry to focus on.

Emile Woolf International

11

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

ECONOMIC SYSTEMS
Section overview

Introduction
The Production Possibility Frontier

Three types of economic system

Planned economies

Market economies

Mixed economies

Conclusion

2.1 Introduction
The graphic shows the simple way that an economy is set up for allocating
scarce resources. How the economic system operates however, requires further
discussion.
Illustration:
Society's
resources

Economic
system

Consumer
satisfaction

There are economics questions that need to be considered in the functioning of

any economic system. These come about due to the inherent problem that
society has unlimited wants, but limited resources.
Three central economic questions
What will be produced and in what quantities?
Scarce resources within a society can produce an almost infinite amount of
outputs. There needs to be some system that prioritises certain outputs over
others: goods that are produced versus individuals wants not being met.
How will it be produced and using what combination of resources?
Each good produced will have the opportunity to be made using a different
combination of resources. Whether this is weighted more towards capital versus
labour, or more units of low-skilled labour versus a few units of high-skilled labour
is decided via the economic system
Who will enjoy the goods and services produced?
Once a good is produced, a mechanism is necessary to decide upon how it will
be distributed throughout society. Only some individuals will be able to enjoy the
benefits of a good, and it is the economic system that settles this.

Emile Woolf International

12

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

2.2 The Production Possibility Frontier

The Production Possibility Frontier (PPF; also known as the Production
Possibility Curve, PPC) represents the maximum combinations of two alternative
goods an economy can produce with the resources available to it within the given
state of technology.
In the simple form of the diagram below, it shows what can be produced using
varying amounts of two inputs. Because it is the maximum that can be produced,
it is referred to as a Frontier. It offers the best selection of goods that society
can pick from and occurs when the economy is fully efficient.
Illustration: production possibility frontier

The PPF has two characteristics that should be noted:

1.

It is downward sloping

2.

It is concave to the origin

The reason for being downward sloping is that in order to increase the production
of one good, resources must be diverted from the other, hence decreasing the
production of that good.
The reason for being concave to the origin is because some of the economys
resources are better at producing Good A, and some are better at producing
Good B.
If an economy only produces one type of good, then a lot of these resources
arent being used efficiently.
By producing different goods, resources can be utilised more effectively, and
therefore the overall combination of both goods increases.

Emile Woolf International

13

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
For the purposes of this exercise, Good A is apples, and Good B is books.
At Point X, all the resources are devoted to growing apples, even though some of
them may not be suited to apple production.
At Point A, it produces a combination of the two, because now these resources that
arent suitable for growing apples, can now be used for making books. Doing so
reduces the amount of apples by 2, and increases the amount of books by 18.
At Point B, society makes an extra 11 books, and even though this is less than the
previous increase, the opportunity cost of doing so is greater, this time 3 apples.
At Point Y, society uses all of its resources (some of which would more efficiently
be used to grow apples) to make books.
In numbers, this is what has happened:
Point

Good A

Good B

10

18

29

30

You can see how to get from X to A, a reduction of 2A lead to an increase of 18B.
To get from A to B, 3A is needed, and the increase is only 11B.
This change in the opportunity cost of producing each good, at various levels of
production, is what causes the curve to be concave.
It will be straight if all resources contribute towards production equally. For
example if all the resources in an economy could be used to make either red
paint or white paint, and if the costs and resources were equal, then the PPF
would be a straight line.
This measurement of the choice between two goods is termed the marginal rate
of product transformation (MRPT).
Definition: Marginal rate of product transformation
The amount of one good which must be foregone to gain one unit of the
alternative.
This is another name for opportunity cost.
The opportunity cost concept is particularly important for the countries making
these decisions. If they wanted to increase the amount of apples they produced,
they will assess this through the amount of books that they must forgo.
There are some other points to note about the diagram:

Each point on the frontier represents resources being utilised in the most
efficient manner. Every point within the frontier is attainable with the current
resources.

At Point G on the diagram the economy is making 5A and 18B. This point is
inefficient in production because the economy can make more of one or
both goods without sacrifice of the alternative 8A & 18B or 5A & 29B
perhaps. Point H is not attainable because of lack of resources.

Emile Woolf International

14

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

For Point H to be attainable would require an increase in the production capacity

of the economy: more output could be achieved. This is evidenced by the second
frontier, outside of the first, on the diagram. At all points, there is potential for
society to increase its output.
This expansion (reaching point H) would represent economic growth caused by

increased resources;

increased efficiency; or

technological progress

Economic growth is one of the primary economic objectives of government. It is

usually measured as the GDP (Gross Domestic Product) of a country. The GDP
figure can be expressed as the GDP per capita (i.e. the GDP per head of
population) in order to compare different economies. GDP is discussed further in
chapter 6 and growth is discussed further in chapter 10.

2.3 Three types of economic system

Moving now from the types of goods that a country can produce, we turn our
attention to the different ways in which countries choose to run their economic
system.
Real world economies all differ according to the extent to which they rely on the
free-market to allocate resources, and the extent to which they rely on the state
to take these decisions.
Economists employ ideal type analysis to evaluate the likely impacts of relying on
a market as opposed to relying on the state.
System

Comment

Command (or centrally

planned) economy

All economic decisions taken by a central planning

body

Free market (or laissezfaire) economy

All economic decisions taken by the free interplay

of market forces

Mixed economy

Combination of market forces and central planning

2.4 Planned economies

In a planned economy allocation of resources is decided by the government
rather than markets.
This type of economic system is completely dependent on the state. The
motivations for this are not certain; however this style of economic system was
prevalent throughout the Soviet Union, with some countries only fully abandoning
it at the turn of the 2000s. North Korea, remains staunch to this method of
conducting the economy, whereas all others have abandoned such a rigid form of
planning.
Features

A central planning body decides questions of what, how and whom.

Productive resources are state owned and the state decides how they
should be used for the common good (and indeed, decides what the
common good is to be).

Resources are allocated by decree through an administrative system.

Factor prices are set by central planning body.

Emile Woolf International

15

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Benefits

Drawbacks

Production is carried out for the needs

of society and not for the benefit of the
few.

Lack of profit motive and competition

makes the economy inefficient.

The social costs of production and

consumption are fully accounted for in
economic decisions.

Bureaucratic and slow to respond to

changing needs or technology.

Full employment of the workforce is

possible.

Loss of consumer sovereignty to

planners reduces welfare.

Less duplication and waste of

resources.

Likelihood of corruption.

Permits long term industrial and social

planning fostering economic stability.

Lack of economic and political

freedom

Considered a more equal, classless

system with equality of opportunity.

2.5 Market economies

The key concept within market economies is Laissez Faire.
Definition: Laissez faire
A term that describes a hands-off approach to government. A belief that there
should be only minimum intervention with what the state does within the
economy.
This style of thinking was conjured in the 18th Century as an argument for
government to not intervene with market forces. For example, this could mean no
influence on what the price of fuel should be, and no minimum wage for workers.
It comes from the French language, and translates to leave alone.
Features

Reliance on the market and price mechanism to allocate resources

Private ownership and control of factors of production

Self interest and profit motive motivate economic decisions

Wages and other factor payments set by market.

Benefits

Drawbacks

Retains consumer sovereignty

Inequalities of income will lead to

socially undesirable resource
allocation

No costly planning bureaucracy

Ignores social costs of production and

consumption decisions

Dynamic and responsive to changes

in the technological environment

Danger of emphasis on luxuries rather

than necessities

Freedom of choice

Failure to plan long-term

Freedom of enterprise

Danger of the growth of monopolies

Auto-adjusted price mechanism

Exploitation of weak economic agents

Emile Woolf International

16

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

2.6 Mixed economies

This is the main, and arguably only, form of economic system in todays global
economy.
For example, most countries adhere that the childrens education sector shouldnt
be left solely to market forces; however there is a difference in, say, what role the
state should play in higher education. Some countries offer a university education
for free, in some the state subsidises, and in others it must be purely privately
funded.
Features
The market mechanism plays an important role throughout society but economic
decisions are taken by a mixture of the public and private sectors.
The state plays a key role in the operation of the economy.
Role of the state
The state acts to maintain a framework of law within which commerce can
operate and hopefully thrive for the benefit of society.
The government regulates and controls commercial activity to prevent possible
excesses that might occur in completely free market without any form of
government influence. For example, a government might introduce legislation
setting out:

minimum legal standards for treatment of employees (minimum wage,

entitlement to holidays, maternity leave, health and safety etc.)

rules on minimum acceptable standards for quality of goods sold

rules to protect investors.

Governments reallocate income through the tax system. Often this involves
raising taxes to pay for services that might be deemed too important to be left in
the hands of the private sector. For example, defence, education and health care.
Governments sometimes act to control prices for certain essential goods and
services, either by becoming the supplier for such commodities or imposing strict
regulation on suppliers. For example, water supply and public transport.
Governments might act to ensure a minimum level of supply of goods and
services by introducing subsidies into a market that was not providing incentive
for suppliers to produce the desired quantity. For example, the US government
pays subsidies to farmers who grow crops that can be converted into biofuels.
Governments introduce economic policies to control inflation, unemployment and
encourage economic growth. The policy tools used can have a profound effect.
For example, a government might increase interest rates to try to combat
inflation.
Benefits

Drawbacks

Retains dynamism of private sector.

State may regulate economy for

political ends.

Public interest guarded by legislation

and state provision.

Responsibility for economic

performance blurred.
Government intervention creates
costs and uncertainty.

Emile Woolf International

17

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Almost all countries in the world come under this category with differences in the
extent to which the state imposes itself on the markets.
Example:
In many countries healthcare is a universal entitlement to all citizens and is
provided by the government free of charge.
This was not the case in the USA (until the introduction of President Obamas
healthcare legislation which may yet be repealed by the next government).
Traditionally in the USA it was up to citizens to buy health insurance or take
employment that provided it.
The benefits and drawbacks of a mixed economy lie between the two extremes
of a planned and free market system.
As is often the case, there is rarely an opportunity to absolutely define one
countrys outlook. However it is possible compare countries against each other in
terms of their approach to the economic system.

2.7 Conclusion
Almost all countries in the global economy, in the true sense of the definition, are
mixed economies. However, countries fit into a spectrum, with the theoretical
economic systems at each end. Every country will occupy a place on this
spectrum depending on the degree of control the state exerts over the economy.
Illustration: Mixed economy spectrum

Emile Woolf International

18

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

ECONOMIC SYSTEMS: ISLAMIC

Section overview

Introduction

Features of economic system

Islamic vs. capitalist economic systems

Sharia law and Islamic financing

3.1 Introduction
Relevance
With over 1.5 billion Muslims worldwide (around 25% of the worlds population)
the relevance of Islamic influence on global economic systems is material.
Despite geographic concentration in Asia-Pacific and Middle-East-North Africa
the globalisation of economic systems, booming international trade and
increasing ease of performing business across the world supported by truly
global capital markets mean that Islamic economic systems and Islamic finance
are now common concepts and highly relevant to modern business.
Other factors that enhance the relevance and importance of Islamic economic
systems include:

Increasing integration between Muslim and non-Muslim nations;

Muslim nations control a substantial share of the worlds oil resources

which are as critically important to Western, Eastern, developing and
developed economies alike;

The booming oil price in the mid-1970s led many Muslim nations to
experience a significant surge in national income. This resulted in
significant cash becoming available for investment throughout the world by
Muslim nations.

Economic science and the economic system

The Islamic economic system differs from traditional economic theory in that its
religious principles are deeply intertwined. With capitalist economies there is
conversely a separation between the church and state, or between the Creator
and lifes affairs.
Freedom is fundamental in a capitalist state (within the boundaries of law) but
this freedom leads society to pursue apparent unlimited needs through limitless
freedom without significant accountability beyond the law. Consider that the
alcohol and drug industry is one of the most profitable in a capitalist system.
Islamic economics differentiates through analysing the production and distribution
of resources and considers the following points as separate:

Economic science: improving manufacturing efficiency, productivity and

the properties of inflation

The economic system: how to distribute resources

It views the principles of economic science as constant, regardless which

economic system/ nation it operates within.
However, there are certain standards by which its economic system is run, and
these are fundamentally based on a fair distribution of resources.

Emile Woolf International

19

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.2 Features of economic system

A number of features in the Islamic economic system will be shared with those of
a mixed economy. Though there might be idiosyncrasies between different
Islamic nations, in aggregate there are a number of features that are consistent
throughout Islamic economies.
The core features are as follows:

Allah is the sustainer: This describes the belief that God created all the
resources available to man and is responsible for feeding and nourishing all
the creatures and human beings. Islamic economics encourages people to
do their best to earn a livelihood using all lawful (Halal) and fair means
whilst dissuading idleness.

God is the true owner of everything: Man is merely a trustee of

resources but has authority for using them in fair support of his existence
on earth. This compares to the capitalist belief that humans are owners of
resources they possess.

State ownership: There is no ban on the state owning an enterprise.

However, a free market still exists where entrepreneurs can profit so long
as they abide by the other rules of the Islamic economic system.

Practising moderation: Islam aims for a fair distribution of resources and

so the population is taught to share wealth where they can. They are also
taught to abstain from extremes aiming for the middle way.

Prohibition of charging interest (Riba): It is forbidden for a lending party

to earn interest from a transaction without taking on as much risk. Instead
there is a system whereby both parties must gain or lose from the
transaction.

Earnings: Earnings must only be made from goods which are allowed in
Islamic teachings.

Hoarding of wealth is discouraged: as resources should be utilised for a

good cause rather than remaining in private possession. This is linked to
the Islamic view that distinction in wealth should not exist beyond
reasonable limits which could threaten the stability of community. Capitalist
economics requires no such limitation and allows citizens to continuously
increase their wealth and differentiation in society to exist.

Zakat: This is a financial tax on the wealthy in order to aid the poorer in
society. It reinforces the above points.

3.3 Comparing Islamic and capitalist economic systems

The following table helps distinguish Islamic and capitalist economic systems:
Feature

Capitalist

Islamic

Distribution of
wealth

Full economic liberty

and private ownership
resulting in significant
disparities and
concentrated wealth
accumulation.

Fair and equal distribution aimed at

balancing the distribution of
economic resources.
Uses mechanisms such as Zakat,
Sadaqat and bequest to help redistribute wealth.
Other principles such as prohibition
of interest and hoarding help
stabilise the system.

Emile Woolf International

20

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

Feature

Capitalist

Islamic

Exploitation

Common exploitation of
the weak through
relatively unlimited
authority for economic
freedom and
derestricted private
ownership.

Attempts to minimise human

exploitation through prohibition of
activities such as usury, gambling,
speculation and taking interest
from perceived weaker classes
such as labourers, consumers and
orphans.

Institutions of
interest

Large banking
institutions facilitate
access to capital
through intermediation.
The bridging of
borrowers and lenders
allows banks to make a
healthy return on the
difference between
lending and borrowing
interest rates (i.e. the
spread).

Concept of interest is effectively

abolished. Incentivisation for
saving and investment exists
through profit-share and
partnership.

Monopoly

Whilst commonly
prohibited there is a
tendency of businesses
to grow and merge and
behave in monopolistic
and cartel-like activity.
This can lead to price
inflation and ultimately
unemployment. Many
former public services
and public-interest
organisations have
been privatised.

Public-interest businesses are

generally maintained under joint
ownership of the community with
direct government intervention to
help balance supply and demand.

Right to
ownership

Unrestricted right for

private ownership of
property. This leads to
wealth accumulation
and imbalanced
distribution of wealth in
society.

Moral obligation that all parts of

society have a share in all wealth.
This often means that production is
often not placed under private
ownership.
Islamic states normally have the
authority to nationalize privately
owned organisations to prevent
wealth concentration and promote
equality.

Emile Woolf International

21

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Feature

Capitalist

Islamic

Economic
freedom

Unrestricted economic
freedom and reluctance
of governments to
overly legislate in the
free markets.
Entrepreneurs are free
to establish and grow
business and spend the
proceeds as they wish.

Concepts of halal (permitted being

lawful) and haram (forbidden being
unlawful) are generally more
restrictive than the total freedom
found in capitalist economics.
Whilst the profit motive and private
ownership are still acceptable to a
certain extent by Islam they are
governed by the unchanging
principles of a divine higher power,
rather than man itself (whom is
susceptible to frequently changing
the legal boundaries that are in
place in a free capitalist economy).

Relative scarcity
It may also be argued that capitalism is driven by the theory of relative scarcity.
The general belief is that there is a real or perceived insufficiency of commodities
to meet societies needs. This then leads to a minority group hoarding almost all
the wealth meaning there are many people left unfulfilled in their basic needs of
clothing, food and shelter.
In contrast, Islamic economics does not support the premise of relative scarcity
but rather believes that there are more than enough goods and commodities to
satisfy the needs of all. The objective is that everyone should be both producing
and consuming to ensure total access to food, clothing, shelter, medicine,
education and security.
Happiness vs. money
The basic needs of citizens are satisfied in an Islamic economy through a
mechanism that measures the distribution of goods by considering how they
benefit all in society. It may be argued that people can live a generally happier life
as they are able to search for a livelihood that suits them best and makes them
the happiest. This becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy as a happier community
drives greater success and productivity.
That is not to say that there is sin in high earnings. The Islamic economic system
still acknowledges that people have different skills, motivational levels and
entrepreneurial desires. However, the key is in the fundamental principles
discussed above that underpin the whole system.
Cycles and depression
Capitalist systems are exposed to periodic crises which typically result from a
depression. This is normally driven by low wages and the failure of consumption
to keep pace with increasing production.
Consider the routes of capitalism which were boosted through the period of
mechanisation and automation in the Western world. As the working classs
wages did not keep up with the pace of accumulation of wealth of the business
owners and the availability of products increased exponentially beyond local
demand, capitalists sought to exploit new markets through colonialism.
Underpinning this development was the creation of large banks which facilitated
interest-bearing loans to allow businesses to consolidate, grow and arguably

Emile Woolf International

22

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 1: Economic concepts

exploit their way towards monopoly. With Islamic economies such banking
operations based on usury would be prohibited and there would arguably be
greater levers of state intervention to prevent the formation of monopolies and
minimise the potential for economic cycles of boom and depression.

3.4 Sharia law and Islamic financing

Sharia law
Sharia law is the branch of statute that formalises the previously discussed
principles of Islamic economics into law. For example, under Sharia Islamic law:

Making money from money e.g. charging interest is usury and therefore
not permitted

Wealth should only be generated through legitimate investment in assets

and legitimate trade

Investment in companies involved with gambling, tobacco, pornography

and alcohol is prohibited

Short selling and non-asset backed derivatives are not permitted

There are now a range of products freely available on the global financial
markets that comply with Sharia Islamic law. These include bank current
accounts, mortgages and even personal loans.
Islamic financing
The Islamic financial model works on the basis of sharing risk. The bank and
customer agree terms on how to share risk of an investment then divide profits
between them. Whilst customers risk losing their money if the investment is
unsuccessful, the bank will not charge a handling fee unless it secures the
customer a profit.
Whilst the range of available financial product types continues to grow, some of
the key categories of Islamic finance are:

Mudaraba This is where a financial expert offers specialist investment in

which the customer and bank share profits.

Musharaka This is an investment partnership with profit sharing terms

agreed in advance and losses limited to the initial capital invested.

Murabaha This is a form of credit that enables customers following

Islamic principles to make a purchase without the need to take out an
interest bearing loan. The substance of the transaction is that the bank
buys an item then sells it to the customer on a deferred basis.

Ijara This is a leasing agreement whereby the bank buys an item for a
customer then leases it back to them over an agreed time period. The bank
makes a fair profit by charging rent on the property.

Ijara-wa-Iqtina Similar to Ijara but the customer is able to buy the item at
the end of the contract.

Growth
Historically Islamic financial institutions have been concentrated in the Middle
East in countries such as Iran, Saudi Arabia and Egypt.
That said, studies performed by the Financial Times (UK) in 2010 estimated that
there were over 500 financial institutions offering Islamic Finance in over 80
countries ranging from investment banks to retail banks and asset managers

Emile Woolf International

23

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

covering over $1 trillion worth of assets and a growth rate of 10-15 percent per
annum.
International growth in Islamic finance has been limited due to:

Relatively higher costs associated with limiting activity to Sharia-compliant

activities (which is normally subsidised by states committed to Islamic
banking); and

The absence of robust regulatory regimes in new markets that would be

capable of understanding and monitoring Islamic transactions.

That said, with Islamic finances ever expanding generally accepted product
range, rapid growth and increased maturity the market has been attracting
greater interest from the worlds leading financial markets. These markets along
with their established global banks appear eager to access the massive capital
base available from Islamic financing. The next few years could see further rapid
expansion in Islamic financing and greater market penetration across the world.

Emile Woolf International

24

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Microeconomics
Contents
1 Introduction
2 Theory of demand
3 Theory of supply
4 The price mechanism

Emile Woolf International

25

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO1

Understand the nature of micro-economics and its basic concepts.

LO2.1.1

Microeconomics nature: Define micro economics and discuss its scope and
limitations

LO2.2.1

Demand and supply: Define law of demand and explain its assumptions,
limitations and exceptions

LO2.2.2

Demand and supply: Define law of supply and explain its assumptions

LO2.3.1

Equilibrium of demand and supply: Explain the determination of price by

equilibrium of demand and supply

LO2.3.2

Equilibrium of demand and supply: Explain the effect of changes in demand

and supply

LO2.3.3

Equilibrium of demand and supply: Discuss the determination of price of

perishable and durable goods.

Emile Woolf International

26

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

INTRODUCTION
Section overview

Definition

Wants and needs

Stock and supply

What microeconomics covers

What microeconomics doesnt cover

1.1 Definition
Definition: Microeconomics
Microeconomics is the branch of economics that studies the decisions of
individual house-holds and firms. Microeconomics also studies the way in which
individual markets work and the detailed way in which regulation and taxes affect
the allocation of labour and of goods and services.
Within microeconomics, the main method of analysis is through demand and
supply. These fundamental theories of firm and household behaviour form the
basis for all further study within the area.

1.2 Wants and needs

The first perspective from which to view micro economics is the consumer. Each
person has wants and needs which products and services can provide for them.
Definition: Wants
The desires of society. These are often described as perceived needs, and
encapsulate the broader sense of what the people in a society wish to have

Definition: Needs
These are the basic requirements for the citizens of society, such as water, food
and shelter.
This shows how each person within an economy has certain innate desires which
he or she wishes to satisfy. How are these satisfied? This is achieved through the
consumption of goods and services.
Definition: Goods
Goods are materials that satisfy human wants.
Again, because it is such a broad concept, the terminology has to be just as
unspecific. Dont think that it has to be constrained to simply something one can
buy from a shop, or a length of cloth. A good is something that provides value to
someone, and satisfies them.
A service is very similar, however a distinction is made in that it is intangible.

Emile Woolf International

27

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

A good is something one can touch and feel (a physical product) whereas a
service is not.
Example:

From knowing that people have wants and needs, and that there are goods and
services that can meet these, we can build up an idea of how this might manifest
itself into an economic theory.
Demand
If there is a good that can solve a want or need for someone, then we say that
there is demand for that good.
Definition: Demand
The quantity which buyers are willing and able to purchase of a product at the
prevailing market price.
This brings into play a few other concepts. As we have learnt already, in society
there are unlimited wants, but limited resources. It is natural to think that people
may want all kinds of goods, however there needs to be a constraint to what they
can have.
The constraints are the quantity of goods that is available to be had, and the
price at which it costs to purchase.
These are concepts that we shall explore further in the Theory of Demand
section.

1.3 Stock and supply

From a firms perspective, there are also considerations that should be
addressed.
Within the workings of a mixed economy (where market forces can interact) a
firm will consider what it should produce, and then sell to consumers who are
looking to buy. We say that this is firms supplying to the market.
At this stage it is appropriate to revise our initial introduction to the Factors of
production.
Once a firm has decided to produce a good, it must utilise the factors of
production. Owing to the scarcity of these resources, a cost is necessarily
incurred. The combination of these costs will determine the price for which it will
want to sell the good.
Supply
There is an important distinction though between supply and stock.
Definition: Supply
The quantity which firms are willing and able to supply at the prevailing market
price.

Emile Woolf International

28

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

Definition: Stock
The quantity of goods available to a firm.
This is an important difference to clarify: just because a firm has a stock of goods,
does not mean that it will supply it to the market. This is something we will cover
in greater depth in Part 3.

1.4 What microeconomics covers?

Microeconomics looks in detail upon the market balance between consumer
tastes and preferences, and the scarcity of total resources.
Illustration:

It is the study of the economy in its component parts and means it analyses in
detail specific markets, wages, and consumer choices.
It also covers the behaviour of firms; what drives them to make certain choices,
and how slight changes in what they are faced with, can impact upon their
conduct in the market place.

1.5 What microeconomics doesnt cover?

Microeconomics is not the study of broader, governmental policies (unless
specifically impacting on a particular market such as price controls) that look at
the economy in aggregate. This is the role of macroeconomics.
The main method of analysis in microeconomics is through demand and supply,
and this is why it is known also as Price Theory.

Emile Woolf International

29

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

THEORY OF DEMAND
Section overview

Introduction

Law of demand: definition

Key determinant: price of the good

Change in the conditions of demand

Determinants: price of substitutes

Determinants: price of complements

Determinants: level of consumer income

Determinants: tastes and preferences

Determinants: expectations of future price changes or shortages

Exceptions to the Law of Demand

2.1 Introduction
After looking into the background of wants and needs and how, through the
market mechanism, this translates into demand for a good, it is necessary to
explore the implications for this.
This will start with intuitively considering the idea behind the demand for a good.
It can be widely observed that the quantity of good that people will buy is
dependent on the price they are willing to pay it. With all things remaining equal,
if the price of the good falls, then we would see an increase in the quantity
demanded.
Therefore a relationship can be established.

2.2 Law of Demand: Definition

Definition: Law of Demand
As the price of a product falls, ceteris paribus, the demand for the product
extends and conversely
As the price of a product rises, ceteris paribus, the demand for the good
contracts.
It is useful to note some of the new terminology introduced here:

Ceteris paribus: a Latin expression which means other things remaining

equal

The use of the terms extend and contract to denote changes in the
amount demanded of a good as a consequence of the price change.
Sometimes called a rise (or fall) in quantity demanded.

Emile Woolf International

30

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

Assumptions underlying the law of demand include:

There is no change in the income of consumers.

There is no substitute for the good.

The prices of related goods are stable.

There is no change in custom, taste or preference of consumers.

The size of population is stable.

The climate and weather conditions are as expected (when considering the
demand for goods affected by these).

The tax rates are stable.

The law can be represented graphically as a downward sloping curve

Illustration: Demand curve

In the above diagram when price is Rs. 10 the quantity demanded is 20.
If price falls to Rs. 5 the quantity demanded extends to 50.
All points that lay on the demand curve will be the combination of what quantity is
demanded at a particular point.
Often, as is the case here, the demand curve will be drawn as a straight line,
purely for ease of presentation in an example. In other cases, the curve may be
slightly curved, which is equally correct.
One of the important things to note is that the demand curve is downward
sloping. Again, this is a very important concept in economics, and arises for a
number of reasons.

Emile Woolf International

31

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Why is the demand curve downward sloping?

When the price of a good is very high, then only the very rich in society can afford
to purchase it. As the price of a good is lowered, this increases the pool of
potential buyers.
The second, and potentially less obvious reason, is that if the price falls, and the
consumer continues to purchase the good, he then has more disposable income,
because he is paying less per unit. This might lead to him buying more of the
good.
This explains why the quantity demanded falls when the price of a good
increases and vice versa.
Example:
Aleem is considering purchasing some lamb to eat. If the price of lamb increases,
then the quantity demanded will decrease.
This is because, at a higher price, Aleem now substitutes some of his purchases
to cheaper meat, such as mutton.
Also, the lamb that he does continue purchasing is now much more expensive,
meaning he has less income to buy all his goods (including lamb) with.
This illustrates the two effects, causing a demand curve to be downward sloping:

Income effect

Substitution effect

Definition: Income effect

As price falls, the consumer can maintain the same level of consumption for less
expenditure. Some of the increase in real income might be used to buy more of
the product.

Definition: Substitution effect

As price of Good A falls, the product is now relatively cheaper than alternative
items which might cause consumers to switch, hence increasing demand for
Good A.

2.3 Key determinant: price of the good

As touched on in the introduction, the main determinant that affects the quantity
demanded of a good, is its own price. We will explore other factors that also
impact upon demand afterwards.
Consumers seek to maximise the value for money they derive from the
expenditure of their scarce income. This concept can be presented in the
following equation:
Equation: consumer value
ts

Emile Woolf International

t on de ed o
ons
n t e ood
e e n t o t e ood

32

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

This is obviously a subjective decision for each consumer. For example, Aleem
may gain lots of satisfaction from eating a chocolate bar, whereas Karim might
receive minimal. In both cases though, a rise in the price of chocolate bars will
decrease the overall value that they both receive.
Conversely, if the price of the goods falls, the value for money available from
consuming it will increase. This is for reasons explained by the Income and
Substitution Effects, and forms the basis of the Law of demand

2.4 Changes in the conditions of demand

Any change in demand brought about by a change other than the goods own
price is called a change in the conditions of demand.
Changes in the conditions of demand are represented by a shift in the demand
curve and are referred to as an increase or decrease in demand. This is
diagrammatically shown below:
Illustration:

Changes in the conditions of demand increases demand for the good at price
Rs. 10 leading to a rise from 50 to 90 units. This is shown by a shift of the
demand schedule from D to D1
There is a distinction however between this analysis of a shift in demand and
simply a change in the quantity demanded. If it is merely a change in the quantity
demanded (as highlighted when demand extends or contracts), then the
movement on the graph will be along the curve.
The points below are a number of determinants that could cause a shift in
demand.

Emile Woolf International

33

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

2.5 Determinants: Price of substitutes

It is often the case that movements in the demand for another good will impact
upon the demand for the good that is being studied. When these goods are in
competition with each other when it comes to the consumers decision, these are
known as substitute goods.
Definition: Substitute goods
Two or more goods which satisfy the same need or compete for the same portion
of income.
A rise in the price of a substitute will lead to a rise in demand for the good
under examination.
Example:
Cons de t e
ket o ot d nks. Lets s
ose t t n t lly, bot tea and
coffee are priced at Rs.200 a cup. If the price of coffee increases to Rs.400, then
ceteris paribus, the demand for tea will increase, as consumers switch their
preferences.

2.6 Determinants: Price of complements

Just as two products being in competition can have an effect on the demand for a
good, it is also the case that two goods can be harmonious. If the performance of
one is particularly strong, then the other can have similar knock-on effects, which
are important to understand.
Definition: Complement good
Two or more goods which are consumed together.
A rise in the price of a complement will lead to a decrease in demand for
the good under examination.
Example:
Consider the market for hockey sticks and hockey balls. These products
complement each other: If people buy hockey sticks, then they are likely to buy
o key b lls too, n o de to l y
e. Lets s
ose t t t e
e o hockey
sticks increases from Rs.2000 to Rs.5000. As a result, fewer hockey sticks are
purchased, and consequently the demand for hockey balls decreases.
Both substitute goods and complementary goods can be contrasted with
independent goods where the price change for one has no effect on demand for
the other.

Emile Woolf International

34

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

2.7 Determinants: Level of consumer income

How much income consumers have is an important factor in what the likely
demand for a product will be. Any change in this level of income will impact upon
the level of demand.
Definition: consumer income
The amount of income consumers can allocate to the purchasing of goods.
There are a number of factors then can lead to a change in the level of consumer
income, and hence a change in demand for goods. The following would
contribute to an increase in consumer income:

Fall in taxation (i.e. a tax on earnings)

Higher national income due to economic growth

Fall in interest rates making the costs of mortgages lower, and hence
increasing discretionary income.

Not all goods are affected the same by a change in the level of consumer income
though.
Example:
Consider the market for cloth. If consumer income rises, then demand for clothes
made with silk is likely to increase, as consumers can afford to increase their
overall satisfaction by wearing nicer clothes. Conversely the demand for rougher
materials, like wool, will fall.
These goods are referred to as following:

Normal good: such as silk: When consumer income rises, so too does the
demand for this good

Inferior good: such as wool: When consumer income rises, consumers no

longer desire to purchase this good, and so demand falls.

2.8 Determinants: Tastes and preferences

These are often important factors that impact on the demand for a product, and
can be affected by:

Advertising

Fashions

Seasonal and climatic factors

Health scares or fads

In each instance the impact of the effect can be heightened by feedback loops
between consumers

2.9 Determinants: Expectations of price changes or shortages

If prices are expected to rise, or shortages of a good are anticipated, this will lead
to an increase in demand in the current time period (pre-emptive purchasing).
Consumers will look to increase their consumption (i.e. demand will increase) due
to predictions of future market conditions.

Emile Woolf International

35

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

2.10 Exceptions to the Law of Demand

Despite being considered a law, there is however one exception in particular
that should be noted.
This is the Giffen good, named after Scottish economist Robert Giffen, who
observed the purchasing habits of poor people.
Definition: Giffen good
A good where quantity demanded increases when price rises.
The example Giffen gave in his study was the demand for bread. In a very poor
community, people spend their income on cheap sustenance, like bread, and
more expensive types of food, like meat.
If the price of bread increases dramatically, then they can no longer afford bread
and meat in the same proportions. Because they require a certain level of
sustenance, they will reduce their consumption of meat, and instead increase
their consumption of bread.
Due to a price increase in bread, their demand for bread has consequently
increased.
Explaining Giffen goods with Income and Substitution Effects
From what we have learnt already about how there are two factors at work when
a price changes, we can apply the effect of income and substitution to a change
in price.
Lets assess what happens when the price of bread rises:
Substitution effect: Consumer reduces consumption of bread, and seeks
cheaper alternatives.
Income effect: Consumers have less disposable income, therefore must reduce
consumption of expensive goods such as meat. As they still need sustenance,
they spend their income on bread instead.
The fact that a rise in bread prices causes an increase in demand is only possible
for a number of reasons:

Expenditure on food takes up the majority of income.

There arent many cheaper alternatives of sustenance than bread.

There are few examples of Giffen goods that have been empirically found. It
should be noted that it is an exception to the otherwise stable Law of demand.
Price rises in the housing market
There is also some debate as to whether the housing market sometimes displays
characteristics that contradict the Law of Demand.
In a housing bubble, where the price of houses continues to rise, there is some
thought that demand is higher for houses when the prices rise.
Whilst this may be observed, the reasoning is different to that of a Giffen good.

Houses are not homogenous products, so it is impossible to fairly and

accurately compare prices.

Factors other than price determine demand. For example, availability of

borrowing.

Emile Woolf International

36

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

THEORY OF SUPPLY
Section overview

Introduction

Law of supply: definition

Key determinant: price of the good

Changes in the conditions of supply

Conditions: costs of resources used

Conditions: imposition of indirect taxes or subsidies

Conditions: price of substitutes in production

Conditions: price of complements in production

Conditions: state of technology

3.1 Introduction
With demand being the representation of consumer choices in an economy, the
choices made by firms come under the category of supply.
Just as in demand, where there were a number of factors that affected what
quantity was demanded, the same is true also of supply.
Stock and supply
As was described earlier, there is a distinction between the stock levels that a
firm has, and what it supplies to the market.
A firm will generate a stock of goods through a combination of the factors of
production. Once that stock has been made, the firm then decides whether to
enter the market at the prevailing price.
Definition: Reservation price
The minimum price a firm is willing to receive for its good.
If each firm is looking to receive the best price possible for its stock of goods, so if
it is offered more than the reservation price, the firm will, of course, take it.
A firm will not sell at a price lower than reservation price. Knowing the reservation
price for firms is useful as a way of evaluating firm behaviour.
Reservation price and profitability
A firm does not supply goods to the market out of goodwill or entertainment, it is
done as a means of making profit.
In economics, it is assumed that firms, acting rationally, will produce goods up
until the point where it is no longer profitable. In almost all firms, there comes a
point where producing or selling an additional unit will incur a loss. Firms will
produce up until that point.
This is the significance of the reservation price it indicates the price level below
which it is not profitable for a firm to supply to the market.

Emile Woolf International

37

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.2 Law of Supply: Definition

It is helpful to consider the reasons behind why firms will decide to supply to a
market, and establish the relationship between the market price, and the quantity
of good that producers are willing to supply.
Example:
Ahmed is a farmer deciding which crops to plant in his fields. As discussed above,
he will keep producing up until the point where it no longer becomes profitable.
If the price of corn increases, then he is able to earn more profit on each unit sold
than before. This means he can earn more to invest in goods such as fertilizer,
and new machinery which in turn allows him to produce even more.
If there was more profit to be made by planting corn than it was to plant wheat,
then Ahmed may decide to reduce the number of wheat fields, and increase
those of corn.
All of this increases output further, when the price is high.
Leading on from this explanation, we come to a definition that explains the Law of
Supply:
Definition: Law of Supply
As the price of a good rises, ceteris paribus, supply of the good extends and
conversely
As the price of a good falls, ceteris paribus, supply of the good contracts.
Again, it is useful to note some of the terminology used here:

Ceteris paribus: a Latin expression which means other things remaining

equal

The use of the terms extend and contract to denote changes in the
amount supplied of a good as a consequence of the price change.
Sometimes called a rise (or fall) in quantity supplied.

Assumptions underlying the law of supply include:

No change in the cost of production

No change in technology (as this would affect the cost of production)

No change in the climate (for the supply of goods affected by the climate)

No change in the prices of substitutes

No change in the availability and cost of natural resources

No change in the price of capital goods

Tax rates are stable

Emile Woolf International

38

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

When this is represented graphically, the result is an upward sloping supply

curve.
Illustration:

As prices rises from Rs. 10 to Rs. 20 the quantity supplied extends from 50 to
120 units.
As previously discussed with the demand curve, the fact that it is a straight line is
merely for presentation convenience.

3.3 Key determinant: Price of the good

Firms seek to maximise their profits from the allocation of the scarce productive
resources at their disposal. They will allocate resources to goods where the
profitability is the greatest.
As the price of a good rises it follows that it will become more profitable to
produce and so firms will extend supply by transferring resources towards it and
away from substitutes in production.
In graphical terms, we see a change in the price of a good affecting the supply
curve in such a way that there is a movement along the curve. The supply curve
remains the same; it is just that the point where the market is at is on that same
line.

Emile Woolf International

39

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

Above, we see how when the price rises from 5 to 9, and then 9 to 14, the
quantity produced in the market increases by 7 to 11, and 11 to 16. This is in
keeping with an upwards sloping supply curve.

3.4 Changes in the conditions of supply

There are also other factors which will impact upon the supply of a good, besides
the price.
These changes in supply from other factors are known as changes in the
conditions of supply.
Changes in the conditions of supply are represented by a shift in the supply
curve. They affect how the market operates in a different way to a change in the
price.
Illustration:

The increase in supply of the good from 25 units to 35 units at price Rs. 10 is
shown by a shift of the supply curve from S to S1.
Alternatively
The firm cuts the price of the food from Rs. 10 to Rs. 8 whilst maintaining supply
of 25 units.

Emile Woolf International

40

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

There is a distinction however between this analysis of a shift in supply and

simply a change in the quantity supplied. If it is merely a change in the quantity
supplied (as highlighted when supply extends or contracts), then the movement
on the graph will be along the curve.
There are a number of factors which can cause a change in the conditions of
supply, and hence a shift in supply. The logic behind the movement is as follows,
for example:

There is a favourable change in the conditions of supply

The price at which firms can supply to the market falls

Firms can make profit on a greater quantity of goods

The supply curve shifts outwards

Illustration:

The shift can be both ways.

S1 to S2 is a decrease in supply.
S1 to S3 is an increase in supply.
There are a number of explanations as to what causes a shift in the supply, and
these are considered here.

3.5 Condition: Costs of resources used

If the prices of the factors used in production rise, then this means that in order to
produce the same quantity of output, the price at which it charges must increase.
The price at which they can supply the market will increase at each quantity of
output, and therefore the supply curve will shift backwards, when represented
on a diagram.

Emile Woolf International

41

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.6 Condition: Imposition of indirect taxes or subsidies

It is not solely market factors that make firms decide to supply their product. The
price and quantity at which they supply can be affected by incentives offered by
the government in the form of indirect taxes or subsidies.
Definition: Indirect tax
A tax levied on the production or consumption of a product e.g. VAT, excise duty,
petroleum revenue tax.
An indirect tax is therefore an additional cost for supplying to the market. Firms
will attempt to pass the indirect tax on to consumers as a price rise. It can be
calculated how much the government will earn from the imposition of indirect
taxes fairly simply:
Formula: Revenue from indirect taxes
Total tax revenue indirect tax per unit uantity sold

This can be shown in a diagram as follows:

Illustration:

This calculation is much simpler when looking at supply in isolation. As we shall

see in the following chapter, when supply interacts with demand, the equation
becomes slightly more complex.
As well as imposing indirect taxes, the government can attempt to stimulate
supply in a certain industry, by granting a subsidy. These areas are usually those
considered as beneficial to society but, however, are not receiving adequate
investment via the standard market mechanism.
Definition: Subsidy
A contribution to help defray the costs of production and to encourage continued
production and consumption. e.g. prescription subsidies, hill farming subsidies.
Most subsidies work whereby once a certain output of production is reached,
additional relief will be given. Firms will generally try to increase supply of the
product in order to qualify for a greater amount of subsidy.

Emile Woolf International

42

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

This is better understood through an illustration:

Illustration:

We will suppose that it is the market for hydrogen cars, something that the
government is keen to increase the supply of.
Here we can see that at the initial point of equilibrium, the price is 20, and the
quantity is 50. Past 50 units, there is a subsidy to encourage supply.
This subsidy decreases the costs for firms, thereby causing them to increase
their production.
With the price at 25, the quantity supplied in the market with a subsidy is 90. Had
a subsidy not been installed, then the quantity would only have been 70.
This shows the government policy of encouraging the quantity of hydrogen cars
would be successful.

3.7 Condition: Price of substitutes in production

It is rare that firms can only ever produce one good or type of good. Given their
resources, they will often have a number of options regarding what to output.
Definition: Substitutes in production (or goods in competitive supply)
Two or more goods which can be produced as alternatives using the same factors
of production.
A rise in the price of a substitute in production will cause a decrease in supply for
the good under examination.

Emile Woolf International

43

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
For example, a firm is producing both monochrome black printers, and colour
printers. If the price of colour printers increases then, with finite resources, the firm
will produce more colour printers, and less black printers. From the perspective of
black printers, the price of its substitute (colour printers) increased, which caused a
decrease in supply.

3.8 Condition: Price of complements in production

Just as there can be substitutes in production, there can also be complements.
Should a firm choose to increase production of a good, there may be additional
benefits to other goods that use a similar process.
Definition: Cmplements in production (or goods in joint supply)
Two or more goods which are produced together as part of the same production
process.
A rise in the price of a complement in production will lead to an increase in supply
of the good under examination.
Example:
Consider a farmer deciding how many cows to rear. Two of the products that can
be made from keeping cows are: beef and leather. If the price of leather rises, then
the farmer may decide to increase the amount of cows he keeps, thereby
increasing the supply of beef also.

3.9 Condition: State of technology

This is arguably the factor which can drive the most change in the choice of firms
to supply the market. There is a broad scope for what can be considered as
technology and it can come in many forms.
Definition: State of technology
An improvement in technology increases efficiency and will cause an increase in
supply.

Example:
A demonstration of technology increasing efficiency in production, and therefore
supply, can be seen in the wheat market. If using a horse plough when working the
fields, a farmer could only yield a small amount of produce when working, say, 60
hours. With the combine-harvester and other machines, it is possible for the
amount of wheat to be supplied to increase substantially using the same 60 hours.
This thereby shifts the supply curve outward.

Emile Woolf International

44

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

THE PRICE MECHANISM

Section overview

The market price

Equilibrium diagram

Reaching equilibrium

Shifts in supply and demand

Market for perishable, and durable goods

4.1 The market price

There are two types of price that exist in markets:
1. Equilibrium market price: which is determined by market forces, i.e. demand
and supply
2. Regulated market price: which is determined by the government,
The equilibrium market price is one where both suppliers and consumers are
willing and able to exchange a quantity of goods for money. This is at the
intersection of the downward sloping demand curve and the upward sloping
supply curve.
This price will remain constant, until factors such as those mentioned above,
impact on either the supply or demand curves.
Definition: Equilibrium market price
The price at which quantity demanded equals quantity supplied and which will be
established and restored by market forces.
There will be times where the market is not in equilibrium. At these moments, the
price or quantity will be divorced from the demand and supply being at rest, and
market forces will act to take this price to its equilibrium level.
The regulated market price is somewhat different in that it is determined by the
government. In this instance, the government will suspend market forces, and set
the price according to its judgement. This is often done to promote social equality
- low prices on essential goods like heating and water.

Emile Woolf International

45

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

4.2 Equilibrium diagram

This can be better illustrated through a diagram
Illustration:

It can be seen that Pe and Qe are the price and quantity, respectively, which will
prevail in this market.

4.3 Reaching equilibrium

Prices do not always remain constant. There are often fluctuations in the supply
of a good which will impact the market price.
So long as no fundamental change occurs to market conditions, if there is a short
term change in supply (e.g. a bad harvest) then the price will eventually revert to
the long run equilibrium again. This most commonly occurs through shortages or
surpluses in production.
Definition: Shortage
Where quantity demanded exceeds quantity supplied at prevailing market price.
Definition: Surplus
Where quantity supplied exceeds quantity demanded at prevailing market price.
These short run movements that eventually settle on the long run equilibrium
price follow a logical flow, as described below for both instances in reference to
the diagram above

Emile Woolf International

46

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

Example: Shortage

In the above diagram demand is initially at Qd1 and supply at Qs1.

This causes a shortage of Qd1-Qs1 at price Pse.

Consumers will bid up the price of the product in order to secure supplies
for themselves.

As the price rises above Pse the firms will extend supply above Qs1 by
transferring resources from substitutes in production and towards the more
profitable good.

At the same time demand will contract below Qd1 as consumers switch
expenditure away from the good whose price is rising and towards
substitutes which represent better value for money.

The price will stop rising once quantity demanded equals quantity supplied at Qe
and the equilibrium price will be established at Pe.
A similar process happens in the case of surpluses.
Example: Surplus
In the diagram above demand is initially at Qd with supply at Qs when price is Pss.
This causes the surplus Qs-Qd at price Pss.
Firms will allow their prices to fall to clear backstocks.
As the market price falls below Pss consumers will extend their demand above Qd
by switching expenditure from substitutes because it represents better value for
money.
At the same time firms will contract supply of the less profitable good below Qs by
transferring resources to more profitable substitutes in production.
The price will continue to fall until quantity demanded equals quantity supplied at
Qe where the equilibrium market price will be established at Pe.
These movements describe how a market will move from a short run imbalance
(i.e. shortage or surplus), and settle on the equilibrium price where supply equals
demand.

4.4 Shifts in supply and demand

There are instances though where a change in the condition of supply or demand
will lead to a new equilibrium being formed.
Example: Shift in demand
A shift in demand occurs when more or less of a quantity of good is demanded at
each price level.
The diagram shows the effect of a rise in the price of butter on the market for
margarine.

Emile Woolf International

47

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration: market for margarine

Here is how the new equilibrium is established:

Equilibrium initially at P0Q0.

Rise in price of butter causes a contraction in the demand for butter (not
shown: this is a model of the margarine market) as consumers switch
expenditure towards margarine, a substitute.

Rise in demand for margarine, shown by shift from D to D1, causes a

shortage of Qd-Q0 at price P0.

Price rises. Demand contracts and supply extends.

New equilibrium at Q1P1

A similar story can be explained with a shift in supply.

Example: shift in supply
The diagram shows the effect of a rise in the price of leather on the market for
beef.

Emile Woolf International

48

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 2: Microeconomics

Illustration: market for beef

Here is how the new equilibrium is established:

Equilibrium initially at P0Q0.

Rise in price of leather causes an extension in the supply for leather (not
shown: this is a model of the beef market) as suppliers increase production
in the more profitable product.

Doing so also increases the supply of beef, as more cows are reared.

Rise in supply of beef, shown by shift from S to S1, causes a surplus of

Q0-Qs at price P0.

Price falls. Demand extends and supply contracts.

New equilibrium at Q1P1

4.5 Market for perishable and durable goods

There is an important consideration in the goods that are being analysed;
whether they are perishable or durable (i.e. will retain value regardless of which
time period they are sold in).
All goods up to this point are considered durable (non-perishable), because if the
consumer does not consume in the current period, it possible to do so in the next:
it is possible to postpone demand.
However this is not the case with all the goods:
Perishable goods: Many products, such as foodstuffs, will go rotten if not sold
within a certain time frame, and therefore their value will diminish significantly,
and hence they are considered perishable. Would you want to buy some eggs
that were several months old?
The demand for these goods is considered relatively inelastic, because if the
consumer does not choose to purchase in the current time period, its value is
going to diminish in the next. Eventually the curve will become perfectly inelastic;
at this stage the whole price mechanism is dependent on movements in the
demand curve.

Emile Woolf International

49

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration: market for perishable goods

The graph depicts the market for a perishable good such as tomatoes.
Initially, supply (S) equals demand (D), the price is 15, and the quantity sold is
18.
The fact that the tomatoes are perishable means that the supply curve becomes
inelastic. Even if the producer wanted to supply more to the market, it isnt
possible, because the goods arent of a decent uality.
When D increases to D1, the price increases to 20, and quantity is at 20 also
the maximum that can be sold.
When D1 increases to D2, the supply remains fixed, meaning that the only
difference is in the price.
At this stage, the price mechanism becomes wholly determined by demand.

Emile Woolf International

50

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Demand and supply: elasticities

Contents
1 Elasticity of demand
2 Elasticity of supply
3 Dynamic supply and demand

Emile Woolf International

51

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO1

Understand the nature of micro-economics and its basic concepts.

LO2.4.1:

Elasticity of demand and supply: Describe the concept of elasticity of demand

and its practical application

LO2.4.2:

Elasticity of demand and supply: Explain the determinants of the elasticity of

demand

LO2.4.3:

Elasticity of demand and supply: Demonstrate the measurement of price,

income, point, arc and cross elasticity of demand

LO2.4.4:

Elasticity of demand and supply: Describe the concept of elasticity of supply

and explain the percentage and graphical methods of measurement of
elasticity of supply

LO2.4.5:

Elasticity of demand and supply: Describe the determinants of supply

elasticity

Emile Woolf International

52

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

ELASTICITY OF DEMAND
Section overview

Introduction

Price elasticity of demand: The basics

Measurement of price elasticity of demand

Price elasticity of demand: more detail

Income elasticity of demand

Cross price elasticity of demand

1.1 Introduction
We have seen in the previous chapter that as supply of a good increases, the
price falls. Therefore in the context of corn farmers, an abundant harvest will lead
to a decrease in the price they receive in the market.
It is sometimes the case that if the quantity of corn is great, the price falls so
much, that the farmer actually earns less total revenue (i.e. price (P) x quantity
(Q)), than had the quantity been less.
Poor harvests can be more beneficial to farmers than good ones!
The reason for this is that there is a high elasticity of demand for agricultural
goods.
What this chapter will explore will build upon the equilibrium analysis of supply
and demand, and investigate how changes in the price of a good can affect the
total revenue earned by the firm.
It will answer questions as to in what situation/ type of firm should be looking to
increase their price to increase total revenue, and which should be looking at
decreasing the price?
First, we shall consider the price elasticity of demand.

1.2 Price elasticity of demand: The basics

Measuring the price elasticity of demand is dependent on discovering what
decisions a firm will make with regard to their pricing. It is done by measuring
how demand changes in relation to a price change.
Definition: Price elasticity of demand
A measure of the extent of changes in the market demand for a good in
response to a change in price.
In words, the question we are attempting to answer is shown in the following
example:
Example:
The elasticity of demand for wheat would be found by calculating by how much the
quantity bought changed as a result of a 1% increase in its price.

Emile Woolf International

53

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Factors determining price elasticity of demand

There are several factors which determine the price elasticity of demand
Nature of the commodity:
The elasticity of demand for necessities of life is generally inelastic because due
to increase in price, the demand for necessary commodities does not contract
generally proportionately. However, for comforts and luxuries the elasticity of
demand is elastic because even a smaller change in price brings bigger changes
in quantity demanded. For example demand for wheat, sugar, rice, vegetables
etc. is inelastic being necessities and for motor cars, air conditions demand is
elastic being comforts and luxuries.
Number of substitutes:
If more substitutes are available for a product it would be more easy for
consumers to shift from one product to another and consequently more elastic
their demand would be. For example bathing soaps, tooth pastes, edible oils, soft
drinks etc. have many substitutes that can be used for one another. On the other
hand, electricity has no close substitute. Therefore, demand for electricity would
be inelastic.
Goods having several uses:
Certain goods have different uses e.g. electricity is a necessity for certain uses,
while for other uses it is a comfort or luxury. Use of electricity in the industry, for
commercial purposes and for households also is a necessity and electricity used
for decorative lighting is a luxury. Elasticity will be measured depending upon the
use. More important the use is more inelastic the demand would be and less
important the use is, more elastic the demand would be.
Durable Goods and perishable goods:
Demand elasticity is determined on the basis whether a good is durable or
perishable. Generally demand for durable goods can be postponed. For example
if there is a very high rise in prices, demand for motor cars, deep freezers, air
conditioners can be postponed while perishable goods like fresh milk, vegetables
and fruit etc. have inelastic demand as their use cannot be postponed.
Price Level:
Elasticity of demand for those goods which are either high priced or low priced is
inelastic. An increase or decrease in price of high priced goods does not have
greater impact on rich class. For example a change in price of Mercedes motor
car will not yield significant effect on high rich class while lower middle class
cannot purchase very high priced commodities already. However, if the
commodity is low priced then it is already purchased in sufficient quantity so
further fall in price does not cause an increase in demand. For example if the
price of potatoes is Rs.10 per kg every consumer will be purchasing sufficient
quantity. One rupee rise or fall in price would not cause any significant impact on
demand.

Emile Woolf International

54

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Income Level:
For rich, elasticity of demand for different commodities is inelastic as an increase
in price does not affect their consumption expenditure. For poor, elasticity of
demand is elastic because even a smaller change in price brings greater change
in demand. For example if price of petrol goes up by Rs. 50 per litre or falls by
Rs. 50 per litre it will not cause significant change in the demand for rich class but
would cause significant changes in the demand pattern of the less privileged and
middle class people.
Consumers Loyalty:
Some goods and services are addictive in nature for example alcohol, drugs,
cigarettes etc. Any rise in price will be unable to stop the use of these goods by
addicted consumers. So their demand will be inelastic. Similarly some firms try to
make their customers more and more brand loyal by excessive and persuasive
advertisement. Their advertisement activities help them to develop habits of their
brand. For example branded cellular phones and tablets.
Time:
Some goods are demanded in emergency for example lifesaving medicines.
Their demand cannot be postponed. Therefore, demand elasticity is inelastic.
However, goods like houses, motor cars have elastic demand because
consumers can take enough time to adjust their demand.
Proportion of Income spent on the good:
Goods like match box are those goods on which consumers spend a very small
proportion of income. Therefore, consumers remain indifferent to any change in
price. But goods like LED TV, Houses, motor cars etc. are those goods on which
a large proportion of consumers income is spent and therefore, these become
elastic towards the price changes.

1.3 Measurements of price elasticity of demand

There are several methods that can be used to measure the price elasticity of
demand. Each can be useful in different scenarios, depending on the data that is
available.
In general, they are all used to calculate how a change in the price of the good
affects the quantity demanded. The symbol is used to represent elasticity.
Regardless of the method, at the end of the calculation, will always be a
number that needs interpretation.

Emile Woolf International

55

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Interpreting
Elasticity refers to the sensitivity of demand to price change.

Elastic demand = sensitive to price changes

Inelastic demand = insensitive to price changes

In order to better analyse the numbers that are generated, we will discuss the
various terminology in which elasticity of demand can be categorised.
Category

Characteristics

Perfectly elastic

Value of infinity
Smallest price rise will extinguish demand

Elastic

Value between 1 and infinity

Demand responds strongly to price
Cut price to raise revenue

Unit elasticity

Value of 1
Demand responds in exact proportion to price
Price changes do not affect revenue

Inelastic

Value between 0 and 1

Demand responds weakly to price
Raise price to raise revenue

Perfectly inelastic

Emile Woolf International

Value of 0
Demand totally unaffected by price changes

56

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Perfect elasticity and perfect inelasticity represent two ends of a scale of possible
elasticities. They are represented graphically below.
Illustration: Perfectly inelastic and perfectly elastic demands
Perfect elasticity

Perfect inelasticity

At prices above P0 no quantity is

demanded but at P0 demand is
infinite

Zero Response to price change of

any level

These are best considered as theoretical limits mathematical limits that

would not usually occur in reality.
The graphs indicate that if a demand curve has a low gradient that
indicates that demand is elastic.
Similarly, if a demand curve has a steep gradient that indicates that
demand is inelastic.

There are number of different methodologies of measuring price elasticity of

demand.
Total expenditure method
This way of determining elasticity is to inspect the total expenditure of the
consumer, or total revenue to the firm, after a change in price. This method was
first proposed by Alfred Marshall. The method simply compares the total revenue
(price quantity) at one price level to the total revenue at another.
The following are true:
Elastic demand:

A decrease in price will increase revenue due to the increase in quantity

demanded more than offsetting the decrease in price.

An increase in price will decrease revenue due to the decrease in quantity

demanded more than offsetting the increase in price.

Price and revenue move in opposite directions.

Inelastic demand:

A decrease in price will decrease revenue as the increase in quantity

demanded fails to compensate the fall in price.

Emile Woolf International

57

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

An increase in price will increase revenue due to the decrease in quantity

being more than compensated by the increase in price.

Price and revenue move in the same direction.

Unitary demand: Revenue remains unchanged by price change because the

change in price is offset by the change in quantity.
This can be understood better through an example:
Example: Expenditure method
a)

Elastic demand
Price (P)

Quantity (Q)

TR (P*Q)

15

8*15 = 120

25

7*25 = 175

The decline in price is matched with a sharp increase in quantity demanded

resulting in the total revenue increasing from 120 to 175.
This highlights how the demand is elastic.

Emile Woolf International

58

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Example (continued): Expenditure method

b)

Inelastic demand
Price (P)

Quantity (Q)

TR (P*Q)

10

10*8 = 80

11

6*11 = 66

The large decline in price is accompanied by only a slight increase in quantity

demanded resulting in total revenue decreasing from 80 to 66.
c)

Unitary demand
Price (P)

Quantity (Q)

TR (P*Q)

12

12*4 = 48

8*6 = 48

The decline in price is accompanied by an increase in quantity demanded such

that the total revenue is unchanged.

The total expenditure method offers a simple solution to ascertaining whether or

not a good has elastic, inelastic or unitary demand. However, it is unable to give

Emile Woolf International

59

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

more detail as to whether a certain good is more elastic than another, or by how
much.
For this, we move onto the other methods.
Percentage method
This builds upon the method above, and looks to exactly prescribe the
percentage changes that occur, therefore being able to offer greater comparison
between different demand curves.
Formula: Percentage method

Percentage change in quantity demanded

Percentage change in price

Where:
Percentage change in quantity
demanded

Percentage change in price

New demand old demand

Average demand
New price old price
Average price

The average price and demand are used to ensure the elasticity is the same
regardless of whether we go from Point 1 to Point 2, or vice versa.
Note the following
Elastic demand:

If > 1; the percentage rise in quantity demanded is more than the

percentage fall in price.

A decrease in price will increase revenue due to the increase in quantity

demanded more than offsetting the decrease in price.

An increase in price will decrease revenue due to the decrease in quantity

demanded more than offsetting the increase in price.

Price and revenue move in opposite directions.

Inelastic demand:

Price and revenue move in opposite directions.

If <1; the percentage rise in quantity demanded is less than the

percentage fall in price.

Revenue will decrease owing to the decline in price not being offset by the
relatively small increase in quantity demanded.

Price and revenue move in the same direction.

Unitary demand: If =1; the percentage rise in quantity demanded equals the
percentage fall in price. Revenue remains unchanged because the decline in the
price is offset by the increase in quantity.
This is illustrated using the same data as in the previous example.

Emile Woolf International

60

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Note that the sign is not important in this calculation, only the absolute number
(compared to 1).
Example: Percentage method
a) Elastic demand
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

3.75 > 1, therefore demand is elastic

b) Inelastic demand
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

0.63 < 1, therefore demand is inelastic.

c)

Unitary demand
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

1 = 1, therefore demand is unitary.

The percentage method produces the same results as the expenditure method
however, but provides a better understanding of to what degree the demand is
elastic or inelastic.

Emile Woolf International

61

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Arc elasticity method

The elasticity at two different points on the demand curve is Arc Elasticity of
demand, or arc elasticity is the measure of the average responsiveness to price
changes exhibited by a demand curve over some finite stretch of the curve".
The formula to measure Arc Elasticity of demand is
E=
or

Q 2 Q1
Q2 Q1

P2 P1
P2 P 1

Q P Average
x
P Q Average

Where Q1 is the original quantity and Q2 is the new quantity. P1 is the original
price and P2 is the new price.

Point elasticity method

The elasticity of demand on a single point on a demand curve is called point
elasticity of demand. Point elasticity of demand measure is used for very small
changes in price and quality whereas Arc elasticity measure is used for higher
changes in demand and price. Point elasticity of demand can be measured in
two ways:
Point elasticity of demand

or

Q P
x
P Q

P.E.D =

It is also written as
P.E.D =

Percentage changein demand

Percentage changeinprice

dQ P
x
dP Q

P.E.D =

Q P
x
P Q

Geometrically, point elasticity of demand

with the help of a formula is given below:
Lower Pointof the demandcurve

= of an example will make this clearer.

TheEuse
Upper pointof the demandcurve

Emile Woolf International

62

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Example:

This shows the demand for a good at 3 pairs of points along the curve.
We will be measuring the point elasticity at the three sections on the curve.
The coordinates of the points are as follows:
Point

Price

Quantity

18

16

11

18

22

32

36

At each stage there is a drop in price of 2, and an increase in quantity of 4. Note

that because the average price and the average quantity are being used as
denominators, the result is the same whether A B or B A is taken.
Price elasticity of demand is calculated below for each point.

Emile Woolf International

63

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
AB
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

B A (to show the direction is irrelevant)

Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

CD
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

EF
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in price

Price elasticity ()

Emile Woolf International

64

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

The elasticity of demand (Ed) at various points on the curve is as follows:

Point

Price

Quantity

18

5.67

16

5.67

11

18

22

32

0.18

36

0.18

This shows how the elasticity of demand changes at different points on the curve.
Further, by taking the midpoint as the reference in each case, the elasticity is the
same, regardless of starting point.
Interpreting this
Example:

The demand curve is a straight line. However, we can see that despite a drop in
price of 2, and increase in quantity of 4, the elasticity of demand changes at
different points on the curve.
The reason for this discrepancy is due to the fact that elasticity of demand is
based on percentage changes in the price and quantity, rather than simply an
absolute change in the numbers.
When there is an increase in quantity, when the output is already low, this
amount counts as a much higher increase than if that increase were to come
when output was already high.
Therefore the percentage change is always going to be higher when it begins
from a low point.
This means that as the quantity increases, the numerator becomes less and less.

Emile Woolf International

65

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Conversely, as we move down a demand curve, price is going to move from

being a small percentage, to a large percentage change.
Where the two percentage changes are equal, is the point at which there is
unitary elasticity of demand.
To the North-West of the point of unitary elasticity will be elastic, and points to the
South-East will be inelastic.

1.4 Price elasticity of demand: more detail

The price elasticity of demand is useful for a number of reasons. An
understanding of how a product will behave to changes in price allows for better
predictions on how total revenue will be affected when a firm makes a pricing
decision.
It also has uses for governments wanting to understand how the market
measures that they plan to impose will likely affect consumer behaviour.
There are also a number of determinants of the price elasticity of demand.
The following are considerations, and useful indicators, as to how price sensitive
a product may be:

The proportion of income spent on the good

The availability of substitutes

The degree of brand or product loyalty for the good

Whether the good is a necessity or a luxury

Whether changes in demand are being measured in the long-run or the

short-run.

Other elasticities of demand

It is not just a products sensitivity to its own price which will be of importance
when it comes to economic analysis.
The relationship of the quantity of a product demanded to changes in other
variables can also offer insight as to its characteristics.

Emile Woolf International

66

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

1.5 Income elasticity of demand

The income elasticity of demand for a product is also what is used to determine
if the good is normal or inferior.
Definition: Income elasticity of demand
A measure of the responsiveness of demand for a good in relation to a change in
the level of money income amongst consumers.
A normal good will always have a positive income elasticity of demand,
because as income increases, demand for the product increases also.
An inferior good will always have a negative income elasticity of demand,
because as income increases, demand for the product will decrease, as
consumers switch to other alternatives.
Formula: Income elasticity of demand

Percentage change in quantity demanded

Percentage change in level of income

Where:
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in level of
income

New demand old demand

Average demand
New level of income old level of
income
Average level of income

Example: Income elasticity of demand

A persons income increases from Rs. 10,000 to Rs.15,000.
As a result, their demand for a product goes from 50 units to 40 units.
Percentage change in quantity
demanded
Percentage change in level pf
income
Income elasticity ()

Here, we pay particular attention to the sign of the result. Because it is negative,
this means that the good is inferior.

Emile Woolf International

67

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

As income has increased, demand for it has decreased. As we discussed in

previous chapters, this can occur for a number of reasons, such as consumers
choosing to consume higher quality goods.
Knowledge of income elasticity of demand is important for a business when
deciding on its future product range. Firms can use the information to forecast the
impact that forecast changes in income will have on the demand for individual
products. This in turn aids sales and production planning.
As an economy grows and incomes rise, firms need to be producing goods which
have a high income elasticity of demand in order to ensure the business grows
and sales increase. This might require the switching of resources from the
production of goods which have a low income elasticity of demand to those with a
high income elasticity of demand. Alternatively, existing products may be graded
to give them a higher income elasticity of demand.

1.6 Cross price elasticity of demand

Another measure of elasticity is what the effect is of a price change in another
good. This is called cross price elasticity of demand.
As with the income elasticity of demand, the sign of the cross price elasticity of
demand is important to determine the characteristics of the good. The sign can
be used to determine whether the two products being analysed are complements
or substitutes.
Definition: Cross price elasticity of demand
A measure of the responsiveness of demand for a good A in relation to a change
in price of good B.

Formula: Cross price elasticity of demand

Percentage change in quantity of Good A demanded

Percentage change in quantity of Good B demanded

Where:
Percentage change in quantity
of Good A demanded

Percentage change in price of

Good B demanded

New demand for good A old

demand for good A
Average demand for good A

New price for good B old price for

good B
Average price for good B

We shall briefly cover these types of goods, and undertake a calculation to

explain further.

Emile Woolf International

68

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Complement goods
Definition: Complement good
A good where demand for Good A is increased, by a rise in demand for Good B.
These types of goods are often bought together, or have some sort of
dependency upon each other. If one sees a change in demand, it is likely that the
other will experience this change too.
This could be all manner of goods: golf clubs and golf balls, computers and
computer cases. If they were sold separately, the ultimate complementary goods
would be left shoes and right shoes.
A complement good has a negative cross price elasticity of demand
Example: Cross price elasticity of demand (Complementary goods)
The quantity of cricket balls (Good A) demanded increases from 500 to 600, when
the price of cricket bats falls from Rs.100 to Rs.90.
Percentage change in quantity
of Good A demanded (balls)
Percentage change in price of
Good B demanded (bats)
Cross price elasticity of demand

Not only are they complements (the sign is negative), but the relationship is
elastic (1.72% is greater than 1).
This means that quantity of cricket balls demanded is sensitive to the price
of cricket bats. The quantity demanded is very dependent on price
movements in the other.

Another way of thinking about the negative sign, is to think that because the
demand for the two goods is correlated, if the price of Good A increases this
will cause a fall in demand of Good A. If demand for Good A falls, then this will
cause a decrease in demand for Good B. Hence the two factors (Good As price,
and Good Bs quantity) move in opposite directions.
Substitute goods
Definition: Substitute good
A good where demand for Good A is increased, by a fall in demand for Good B.
These types of goods are often bought instead of each other. If one sees a
change in demand, it is likely that the other will experience the opposite change.

Emile Woolf International

69

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

This could be all manner of goods: butter and margarine, a Canon camera and a
Kodak camera, a mackerel and a cod.
A substitute good has a positive cross price elasticity of demand.
If the quantity of milk chocolate (Good A) decreases 5% when the price of dark
chocolate (Good B) decreases 8%, the cross price elasticity of demand is simply
5%/8% = 0.625 (62.5%).:
The positive sign means that the products are substitutes, and that the absolute
number is less than one means that the relationship is inelastic.
Example: Cross price elasticity of demand (Substitute goods)
Suppose the quantity of milk chocolate (Good A) demanded decreases from 100 to
90, when the price of dark chocolate decreases from Rs.50 to Rs.30.
The calculation would be as follows:
Percentage change in quantity
of Good A demanded (milk)
Percentage change in price of
Good B demanded (dark)
Cross price elasticity of demand

This shows how milk chocolate and dark chocolate are substitutes, and
also that they are inelastic in their relationship.
This means that quantity of milk chocolate demanded is not particularly
sensitive to the price of another good: dark chocolate. This could be
because those who consume dark chocolate are quite loyal to their type,
and would not want to switch unless there was a significant price change.

Another way of thinking about the positive sign, is to think that because the
demand for the two goods is correlated, if the price of Good A increases this
will cause a fall in demand in Good A. If demand for Good A falls, then this will
cause an increase in demand for Good B. Hence the two factors (Good As price,
and Good Bs quantity) move in the same direction.

Emile Woolf International

70

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

ELASTICITY OF SUPPLY
Section overview

Introduction

Price elasticity of supply: the basics

Price elasticity of supply: more details

2.1 Introduction
Now that we have covered the important aspects of the elasticity of demand, we
can do the same for the elasticity of supply.
The overriding question to think about throughout this section is: what is the
percentage change in the quantity supplied, in relation to a percentage change in
the price.
What is particularly interesting about the elasticity of supply is that it changes
over time. As we shall see, in the momentary, short-run, and long-run, supply
tends to get more and more elastic. This is because in the long run, all
adjustments are able to take place.

2.2 Price elasticity of supply: the basics

The price elasticity of supply is similar in concept to that of demand, so some of
the expressions and equations should begin to seem familiar.
Definition: Price elasticity of supply
A measure of the responsiveness of quantity supplied to a change in the price
of the good.

Formula: Price elasticity of supply

Percentage change in quantity supplied

Percentage change in price

Where:
Percentage change in quantity
supplied

Percentage change in price

Emile Woolf International

71

New quantity supplied old

quantity supplied
Average quantity supplied
New price old price
Average price

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example: Supply elasticity

a) Perfectly elastic supply

If the price moves below 8, then no firm will supply to the market.
b) Elastic supply

Percentage change in quantity

supplied
Percentage change in price

Elasticity of supply

A small increase in price leads to a proportionally greater increase in

quantity supplied.

Emile Woolf International

72

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Example (continued): Supply elasticity

c)

Unitary elasticity of supply

Percentage change in quantity

supplied
Percentage change in price

Elasticity of supply

An increase in price leads to a proportional increase in quantity supplied

d)

Inelastic supply

Emile Woolf International

73

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example (continued): Supply elasticity

Percentage change in quantity
supplied
Percentage change in price

Elasticity of supply

A large increase in price leads to only a small increase in quantity supplied.

e)

Perfectly inelastic supply

Supply is fixed at 6 units regardless of whatever price would be offered.

Emile Woolf International

74

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

2.3 Price elasticity of supply: more details

Increasing our analysis of the price elasticity of supply, there are a number of
determinants of the price elasticity of supply. For clarity of understanding, the
following points relate to factors that would increase the price elasticity of supply:

Greater availability of stocks

If back stocks exist then these will be sold if demand increases

without the need for price to rise.

If demand falls then goods will be withdrawn from sale and stored.
This avoids surpluses pushing prices down.

Greater ability for firms to switch resources to and from substitutes in

production

Increased ease of entry and exit to and from the market

Shorter length of production process

The length of time since the change in demand conditions changed also has
an effect on the elasticity of supply.
If demand rises, firms will need time to bring forward additional supply. Therefore
the analysis of elasticity is commonly divided into three periods:

Momentary (or market) period

Immediately following the demand change when supply has had no chance
to respond. Here, supply is perfectly inelastic.

Short run period

An intermediate stage when supply has begun to change but has not fully
incorporated the demand change. Here, supply is inelastic.

Long run period

The time period in which supply has fully adjusted to the change in
demand. Here, supply is most elastic

Emile Woolf International

75

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Graphically, this can be represented like so:

Illustration:

In the above diagram equilibrium is initially at P0Q0, a position of longrun equilibrium. Demand rises from D to D1 at price P0.

In the momentary period the prices rises towards Pm

In the short-run period the increased elasticity of supply adjusts

price towards Ps

In the long run the price adjusts to P1

This concept can be better explained through an example.

Example: Time and elasticity of supply
A firm produces mobile phones at full capacity.
If there is a sudden rise in demand, then the company will be unable to
immediately supply the market more than what it produces its supply is
perfectly inelastic.
After some time, they could order more materials from suppliers, and gradually
increase the quantity to the market. This might not be the most efficient means
of doing so however, meaning that the additional products that are supplied will
be priced higher.
In the long run, the firm can produce more efficiently at the increased output,
meaning that the price they can supply to the market is lower, and therefore the
curve is flatter.
Interacting with the new demand curve will mean that, as the diagram indicates,
as the market moves from momentary, to short, to long run, the equilibrium price
decreases.

Emile Woolf International

76

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

DYNAMIC SUPPLY AND DEMAND

Section overview

Introduction

Price stability

Cobweb theory

3.1 Introduction
So far we have looked mainly at supply and demand in a static form. By this we
mean it has been a snapshot of what has occurred in a market at one particular
time.
Discussions of how supply becomes more elastic with greater time brought in an
element of dynamism. However in this section we will be going into more depth,
by looking at two areas in particular: price stability and the cobweb theory.

3.2 Price stability

Certain markets have particularly volatile price changes, whereas in others, the
price remains more or less stable. For example, the price of rice does not
fluctuate on a daily basis.
This is in stark contrast to prices on the international commodities markets where
the prices change constantly.
There is difference therefore, and we can now use our knowledge of demand and
supply elasticities to offer an explanation.
Milk market
One of the characteristics of the milk market is that it is fiercely competitive in
terms of supply. There are lots of firms able to supply to the market, and
consequently if the price increases slightly, quantity will increase.
The demand for milk is neither spectacularly elastic nor inelastic.

Emile Woolf International

77

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

This can be graphically represented below:

Illustration:

This shows how even if demand were to increase dramatically (for example, a
health campaign is begun promoting the benefits of milk in ones diet) then,
because of the type of supply, the price of milk would remain relatively stable.
Corn market
The international market for corn fluctuates greatly throughout the year, and also
from year to year.
On the supply side, there is uncertainty with regard to whether there will be a
good harvest or not. This means that output could be greater, or less than
planned.
On the demand side, it can also be faced with inelastic demand because many
food processes rely on corn, and cannot substitute other grains for it.
This can also be represented graphically:

Emile Woolf International

78

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

Illustration:

As we can see, just a small shift backwards in supply and, because of the
inelasticity of both curves, the price has increased significantly.
A consequence of this is that if ever there is a slight change in either the supply
or demand of corn, the price would fluctuate considerably.
Causes of instability
There are several factors that can contribute towards unstable price movements.
These are particularly prevalent in the agriculture sector.

Weather conditions: can dramatically influence the size of harvest

Constant, inelastic demand for produce must be bought whatever the

price

Competition to produce other goods i.e. biofuels for energy

In summation, the more elasticity that exists in both supply and demand, the
more price stability we would expect to see in the market.
Government policies to increase price stability in agriculture
A stable price of agricultural commodities is often a political objective for most
governments. The price of a good is the main source of income for those
individuals and firms that work in the agriculture sector. Therefore, in order to
ensure that these people receive a stable, predictable income, the government
often acts to stabilise the price.
This is usually done through a buffer stock scheme.
Definition: Buffer stock scheme
A measure that uses commodity storage for the purpose of stabilising prices in a
market

Emile Woolf International

79

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

The government agrees to pay a fixed price, above the market rate, for the
commodity. This means that buyers and sellers interact to the market equilibrium,
and then the government intervenes to purchase the surplus.
Illustration:

In the above diagram supply shifts outwards from S1 to S2

meaning (with no intervention) the price will fall to Pe.

However, because the government guarantees the price at Pmin it

buys the surplus stock: Q2 Q3

The fact that farmers receive this price, naturally means that the
price is stable, thus achieving the policy goal

Should there be a commodity shortage in a future period, these

stock levels could be used to release onto the market and reduce
the upward pressure on price

Disadvantages of buffer stock scheme

The main disadvantage that comes from this policy is the upfront cost of
purchasing excess stock above the market price. This requires capital that, as we
have seen through the concept of opportunity cost, could be spent meeting other
policy objectives.
It can also encourage over-production of certain commodities, as the pricing
signal of the market mechanism is no longer in action.
There are also a lot of administrative, and storage costs associated with the
maintaining levels of buffer stocks.

Emile Woolf International

80

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 3: Demand and supply: elasticities

3.3 Cobweb Theory

A second application of the dynamic movements between supply and demand is
represented through the cobweb theory.
This theory looks to offer an explanation as to why prices periodically fluctuate,
especially in agriculture, and traces the movement through changes in supply
and demand.
When we say that market equilibrium has been reached (where supply is equal to
demand), it doesnt necessarily happen instantaneously. There will be some
interactions between supply and demand which eventually settle on the
equilibrium price and quantity.
The cobweb theory offers an explanation as to how the market reaches
equilibrium, from a point that started off-equilibrium.
Use the illustration below as a guide for the following sequence of events
Illustration:

The key aspect to grasp is that there is a time difference between each market,
and also the choice a farmer has of how many cows to supply at the next market
based on his knowledge of the price of cows in the current market.
The price received is always found by tracing the quantity (Q) up to the demand
curve.
Suppose a farmer is evaluating how many cows to rear to take to market and
sell. At the market he is at currently, the quantity is Q* and the price is P*.
Before the next market, there is a disease that kills a number of cows. This
means that the quantity at the market is just
(less than Q*), and consequently
the price is . The new, short term equilibrium is at A .
At this market then, the price received for each cow is higher than the last. How
then will the farmers respond? Seeing a higher price for their stock, at the next
market, the quantity of cows produced will be what is expected at , and is
therefore .

Emile Woolf International

81

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

However, because the market price is determined by tracing the quantity up to

the demand curve, the price at the market is .
Seeing that price has now dropped below equilibrium price, the producers will
supply less to the next market ( ). The fall in supply means that the price
becomes
and as such will supply more to the following market.
And so it continues.
Each time P is too high, it follows that Q will be high, causing P to move the other
way, causing Q to be low as well. As this oscillation continues, the trail of
movement mimics that of a spider cobweb circling in towards the centre.
The important point to note is that with each iteration, the price is getting closer to
the equilibrium. In this example, the long term equilibrium will eventually be
reached.
In this sense, we can say that the price is dynamically stable.
Importance of elasticities
This is not always the case though. In instances where the slope of the supply
curve is flatter than that of the demand, then we find that with a few iterations, the
short run equilibriums do not tend to the long run.
Going back to our cow scenario, if supply was more elastic, the price changes
would cause such a swing in the quantity supplied in the next period that demand
will effectively die out.
The illustration below demonstrates this:
Illustration:

Consequently, if the slope of the demand curve is steeper than that of the supply
curve, the points are dynamically unstable.
Critique of the cobweb theory
The main assumption in the cobweb theory is that expectations of the price in the
next period are made solely on what they were in the last period. It might be
natural to suppose that after a few rounds of the market the producers would
learn that this is not necessarily the best tactic to adopt.

Emile Woolf International

82

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Utility analysis
Contents
1
2

Introduction
Diminishing Marginal Utility

Indifference curves

Extensions of indifference curves

Emile Woolf International

83

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO1

Understand the nature of micro-economics and its basic concepts.

LO2.5.1:

Utility analysis and indifference curve: Explain the law of diminishing marginal
utility and discuss its assumptions and limitations

LO2.5.2:

Utility analysis and indifference curve: Explain the law of equi-marginal utility

LO2.5.3:

Utility analysis and indifference curve: Discuss the meaning and

characteristics of indifference curves

LO2.5.4:

Utility analysis and indifference curve: Explain consumers equilibrium through

indifference curve analysis

Emile Woolf International

84

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

INTRODUCTION
Section overview

Definition

Utility and rationality

Cardinal measures of utility

Problems measuring cardinal utility

Ordinal utility

1.1 Definition
The concept of utility is used throughout microeconomics as a means to measure
the satisfaction or happiness one gains from a good or service.
Definition: Utility
A measure of happiness of satisfaction gained from a good or service.
Its roots come from the utilitarian movement of the 18th and 19th centuries whose
writers, including Jeremy Bentham and John Stuart Mill advocated that the goal
of society was to maximise the total utility for individuals by aiming for the
greatest happiness for the greatest number.
Whilst a worthy objective for a society to aim for, economists have discovered
that there are a number of issues that need to be addressed before thorough
analysis can be conducted. We cover these now.

1.2 Utility and rationality

An important relationship to establish at this stage is between utility and
rationality.
We have touched upon rationality briefly and know that, in short, it is assumed
that consumers make the decisions based on a rational preference.
In this context, it is said that rational agents will look to maximise their utility.
This seems a fair assumption to make. When faced with a number of options,
you would assume that someone will evaluate which will give them the greatest
happiness, and then choose it at the expense of the other, less favourable ones.

1.3 Cardinal measures of utility

A cardinal measure is a way of assigning an option someone has with a level of
utility. In this context, the measurement is often called a util.
Example:
Aleem could have the following options:
- Eat an apple (8 utils)
- Eat an orange (6 utils)
- Eat a banana (4 utils)
- Eat a peach (2 utils)
And, assuming that he could only choose one piece of fruit, we can see that
Aleem would choose to eat an apple. Although he would eat an orange and a
banana instead, if given the option
(6 utils + 4 utils > 8 utils)

Emile Woolf International

85

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Benefits of this measurement

The main benefit of this type of measurement is that one can look in detail at a
number of options facing someone, and evaluate what decision he is likely to
make.
It is possible to say that, as in our example, someone may enjoy eating an
orange x times more than a peach, which is useful especially when analysing
decisions in welfare economics (where the objective is to maximise total utility in
society).

1.4 Problems measuring cardinal utility

Whilst theoretically it is very useful to use cardinal measurement, in reality it is
difficult to implement.
Unlike a number of the other concrete topics we have covered so far, utility is an
abstract concept. Finding out how much utility someone would assign to a certain
action is extremely difficult, and is the subject of debate amongst economists and
philosophers.
This problem of measurement arises, as it is impossible to quantify a unit of
utility. It is arbitrary to assign an amount of utility to something in a way that
makes the value reasonable or comparable.
Example:
It is possible to say: the price of this apple is twice as much as that banana
because the measurement is quantifiably based on price.
However it is not possible to accurately say: He enjoys this apple twice as much
as that banana because it is a qualitative measurement.
This is what is meant by an abstract concept.
Therefore in response, a new branch of measuring utility was sprung, which we
cover next.

1.5 Ordinal measures of utility

An ordinal measure of utility instead ranks the options available to a consumer,
and based upon that order, is able to better determine the persons utility.
Definition: Cardinal and ordinal
It is useful to understand the difference between the two words; cardinal and
ordinal from their mathematical background.
Cardinal: 1, 2, 3
Ordinal: 1st, 2nd, 3rd
In this way, the cardinal measure assigns a value to utility, whereas ordinal ranks
the preferences.
With ordinal measures, an individual is observed preferring one choice to
another. Based upon a number of choices, they rank them from most preferred to
least preferred and from there, quantifiable measurement is possible.
This therefore measures utility by what people prefer to consume, rather than
assigning a numerical value.
Based upon our previous example, ordinal analysis simply says:

Emile Woolf International

86

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Example:
Aleem could have the following options:
-

Prefers eating an apple to an orange

Prefers eating an orange to a banana

Prefers eating a banana to a peach

Though at first this might seem like it would be difficult to interpret any real
meaning from this, we will explore how it is possible in subsequent sections.
Drawbacks of ordinal measure
Whilst this method benefits from comparing bundles of goods which consumers
can prefer over others, it is still not possible to compare utility between
individuals.
This is an academically difficult question (some argue impossibility), so for now, it
is considered the best practice for measuring utility.

Emile Woolf International

87

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

DIMINISHING MARGINAL UTILITY

Section overview

Introduction

The Law of diminishing marginal utility

Exceptions to the Law of diminishing marginal utility

2.1 Introduction
Now that we have established different ways that utility can be measured, we
turn to what useful analysis can be taken from understanding it.
There are a number of different functions and derivatives of utility that can give
insight into how it interacts with other factors. These will be explored further in the
following sections.

2.2 The Law of diminishing marginal utility

This is a concept that at first may appear to be counterintuitive but, once
understood, allows a rich ability to understand the choices that are made by
consumers within a society.
To begin, read through the following example as an introduction to what is meant
by diminishing marginal utility.
Example:
Suppose that on a hot day, Karim goes for a walk and sees an ice cream stand.
He chooses to consume an ice cream which he really enjoys - it would give him
a lot of utility. Should he have a second ice cream, he would enjoy it still, and his
overall utility would still increase, however it would increase by less than when he
had the first one. Choosing to have a third ice cream would increase his utility
compared to second, but not by as much, and so on...
What this example introduces is the concept of the term marginal. In this instance
it means additional or extra.
By consuming more units of the product, the total level of satisfaction is
increasing; however the size of the increment is falling each time. Put another
way, the growth in incremental satisfaction will slow as more of the good is
consumed. This leads to an abbreviated definition:
Definition: Law of diminishing marginal utility
Eminent economist Alfred Marshall defines the Law as follows:
The additional benefit which a person derives from a given increase of his stock
of a commodity diminishes with every increase in stock that he already has.
The Law can be illustrated graphically through an example to give greater
clarification as follows:

Emile Woolf International

88

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Example:
Ice creams
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

Total utility
0
80
120
140
150
150
145

Marginal utility (MU)

80
40
20
10
0
-5

From these two graphs, we can understand more about how utility works.
We can see the trait of utility increasing in the first four ice creams (from 80 to
150) at a decreasing rate each time.
The maximum utility Karim gets is 150, which happens when he has his fourth
ice cream. After consuming the fifth, his utility remains unchanged.
After consuming the sixth, his total utility actually declines. He gets disutility from
the consumption. (Perhaps he feels ill at this point!)
This is represented on the MU graph by the curve entering the negative zone

Emile Woolf International

89

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

There is a point to highlight from the table above to avoid confusion.

As you will see, there are numbers assigned to the Total Utility that Karim gets
from consuming ice cream. These are for comparative purposes only. This does
not mean that consuming 2 ice creams is 50% better than consuming 1 (120 is
50% more than 80), it is purely as a measure of relativity.

2.3 Exceptions to the Law of diminishing marginal utility

On the whole, this is a strong Law. There are however some exceptions that do
not display the characteristics:

Collectibles

Hobbies

Rare items

The reasons for this are that they have greater value when together as a group. If
bought individually, they have less worth. They are rarely consumed, per se, and
so there is little immediate discomfort in having more.

Emile Woolf International

90

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

INDIFFERENCE CURVES
Section overview

Introduction

Assumptions of indifference curves

Maintaining utility throughout an indifference curve

Characteristics of indifference curves

Slope of indifference curves

Consumer equilibrium

Combining budget lines and indifference curves Law of equi-marginal utility

Limitations of the law of equi-marginal utility

3.1 Introduction
With the Law of diminishing marginal returns being established, we now turn to
present it in a form which brings together the other material that we have done in
the opening chapters.
In a few simple steps, we will be able to build up to drawing indifference curves.
The first thing to remember is that it is showing a combination of goods that
someone wishes to consume. This means on the x axis will be one good, and the
y axis will be another.

3.2 Assumptions of indifference curves

Before continuing, it is appropriate to clarify what the underlying assumptions of
indifference curves are:

Consumer is rational: Consumers behaviour is consistent

Utility is ordinal: A consumer prefers one basket of goods to another

Diminishing marginal rate of substitution: The rate at which an

individual must give up Good A to obtain an extra unit of Good B whilst
keeping their overall utility constant, occurs at a diminishing rate

Consistency of choice: The choice remains constant over time periods

Preferences are not self-contradictory: If a customer prefers A to B, and

B to C, then he must therefore prefer A to C

Goods are substitutable: Utility can be maintained by exchanging the

quantity of goods consumed in any quantity.

3.3 Maintaining utility throughout an indifference curve

An indifference curve shows different combinations of goods that someone may
choose to consume.
The key idea with an indifference curve is that by substituting one good for
another, one will be able to maintain the same level of utility. This exchange in
goods will be different at various levels along the curve due to the law of
diminishing marginal rate of substitution, hence leading to its convex shape. This
will be explained later.

Emile Woolf International

91

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
Having 5 fruits and 5 vegetables gives a consumer a utility level U, as he can
enjoy both types of food.
Because each point on the line represents the same level of utility, this means
that at Point A (2 fruit and 10 vegetables) the consumer will have the same level
of satisfaction.
Similarly at Point C (10 fruit and 2 vegetables) the consumer has a utility level of
U.
What this means is that at each point along this curve, the consumer is
indifferent to the combination of goods.

Illustration:

Each point shows what combination of goods a consumer requires to have a

constant utility. When these points are connected, one has an indifference curve.
From this brief introduction, there are a number of aspects in the analysis of
indifference curves that should be considered.

3.4 Characteristics of indifference curves

To get a greater understanding of indifference curves, it will help to define some
of the properties that they possess and in doing so, explaining some of the
background to their importance.
Negatively sloped
An indifference curve will always slope from left to right. This is because if
someone increases their consumption of one good, in order to maintain the same
level of satisfaction, he must decrease his consumption of the other.

Emile Woolf International

92

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Higher indifference curve equals higher level of utility

An indifference curve that lies to the right of another represents a higher level of
satisfaction than the other. Another way of saying this is that the combination of
goods on the curve that is farther out is preferred by a consumer to a
combination of goods on a lower indifference curve.
Illustration:

Here, U4 is preferred to U3 which is preferred to U2 which is preferred to U1.

Convex to the origin
In this instance, convexity means being bowed to the origin. The shape of the
curve has to do with how much of one good does a consumer want to exchange
for another in order to maintain the same level of utility.
Suppose a consumer has a high level of Good A, and a low level of Good B. In
order to reduce his consumption of Good B, and maintain the same utility, he
would need to consume even more units of Good A. This is why indifference
curves are straighter at the extremes.
Cannot intersect each other
This can be explained through pure logic based on the assumptions of
indifference curves and is aided by an understanding of the transivity rule.
Definition: Transivity
A rule that implies an agents decisions are consistent
If a consumer prefers Good A to Good B, and Good B to Good C, then it can be
inferred that the consumer also prefers Good A to Good C.
It is important in the context of indifference curves and leads to the following
explanation.

Emile Woolf International

93

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

The curves intersect at Point B.

As they are on the same curve, the consumer must therefore be indifferent also
towards Point F as it also yields U2.
Point B is also on the same curve as Point E, meaning the consumer will be
indifferent between those two also.
However, we can see that Point F is preferable to Point E because the consumer
can get Y2 Y1 extra of Good Y, whilst in both cases receiving X1 of Good X.
This therefore means that the curves are illogical.
Curves do not touch horizontal or vertical axis
Indifference curves show the combinations of goods that yield the same utility. It
does not show what happens if someone consumes just one of the products, and
that would be the case should the curve touch one of the axes.

3.5 Slope of indifference curves

The slope of an indifference curve changes at different points along its length.
To find the exact slope of the curve means finding the Marginal Rate of
Substitution at a certain point.
Definition: Marginal Rate of Substitution (MRS)
The rate at which a consumer must give up Good A in order to obtain one more
unit of Good B and maintain the same level of utility
The MRS shows that at a certain point, what someone would be willing to trade in
order to have the same utility.
This is done by finding the line tangent to a point on the curve, and calculating
the change in Y, divided by the change in X.

Emile Woolf International

94

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Formula: Marginal rate of substitution

This is shown at two different points on the diagram below.

Illustration:

At Point A, to maintain the same level of utility, one reduces consumption of

Good Y by 4, and increases consumption of Good X by 3.
At Point B, to maintain the same level of utillity, one reduces consumption of
Good Y by 1, and increases consumption of Good X by 6.
Doing the calculations, this means the MRS has changed from:
(

At Point A, the consumer would be willing to give up 4 units of Good Y (hence

why it has a minus sign), in order to gain 3 units of Good X.
At Point B, the same consumer would only be willing to give up one item of Good
Y (because he has so few) and would need 6 units of Good X in return to keep
the same utility.
The steeper the curve, the more of Good Y you are willing to give up for an
increment of Good X. This means that the Marginal Rate of Substitution is higher
in this case.

Emile Woolf International

95

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.6 Consumer equilibrium

Definition: Consumer equilibrium
The amount of goods and services which is possible for the consumer to buy,
given their income and the prices in the market.
The consumer is in equilibrium at a point where the price line is tangent to the
highest attainable indifference curve from below.
The combination choice that a consumer makes in his decision is not solely down
to the marginal utilities of the products. There has to be some constraint on what
he chooses and this comes in the form of income.
In our example, the choice of either having Fruits or Vegetables is assuming that
a consumer can have whatever he pleases. If he has 5 fruits and 5 vegetables,
then he could increase his utility by having 7 fruits and 5 vegetables, say.
The further out a utility curve is, the greater the utility of the consumer.
Depending on the level of income, the consumer is constrained to a combination
of goods that he can purchase.
Derivation of the budget line
Each consumer will have an income, and with that income he is able to purchase
a combination of two goods.
Their total income can be split between these two in many different ways. The
calculation for this expenditure is as follows:
(

Because the expenditure part of the equation is fixed by the income, the price
and quantity of Goods A and B must equal this amount.
Example:
The price of Apples is Rs.2 and the price of carrots is Rs.1.50.
Omar has a budget of Rs.30.
If he chooses to buy 8 carrots, how many apples can he buy?
A
(
A

(
.
(

.
.

)
A
)

Omar is able to buy 9 apples.

The different combinations of goods can be shown in the form of a budget line.
The budget line shows the combinations of both goods that the consumers can
afford with their income. To work out where to draw the budget line, it is
necessary to divide the total income by the price of each good. This shows the
maximum quantity a consumer could buy if he were to devote all of his income to
just one good.
The straight line between these two points represents the budget line.

All points along it show combinations of goods that are affordable

Any point to the right of the budget line is unaffordable
Any point to the left of the budget line is affordable, but inefficient.

Emile Woolf International

96

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Slope of the budget line

The slope is representative of the relative price between the two goods. In order
to draw a line, first find the extreme points that touch the axes.
It is calculated in the following manner:
Example:
The price of Apples is Rs.2 and the price of carrots is Rs.1.50.
At first, Omar has a budget of Rs.30 meaning that his budget line is B1.
He then loses some money meaning that his budget now becomes Rs.18,
meaning the new budget line is B2

When finding the points at which it crosses on the X and Y axis, the following
calculations are performed:
(apples),

(carrots)
.
When Omars budget falls, the following calculations are:
(apples),

carrots

In this instance, the slope of the budget line has remained the same it has
simply shifted.
Throughout, it is the same as the relative prices, in this case:
the opportunity cost of one carrot is 1.33 apples.

. In words,

Change in price
However, if there is a change in price of one of the products, then this affects the
slope of the line.

Emile Woolf International

97

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
Lets assume Omar has his income of Rs.30 again.
The price of Apples goes from Rs.2 to Rs.5, whereas the price of carrots remains
at Rs.1.50.

Now when finding the points at which it crosses on the X and Y axis, the following
calculations are performed:
(apples),

(carrots)

This is represented by B3 on the graph

3.7 Combining budget lines and indifference curves Law of equi-marginal

utility
Now that we have seen how both budget lines and indifference curves can be
drawn, they can now be considered on the same indifference map.
The objective of the consumer is to maximise his utility, and therefore be on the
highest indifference curve possible to him.
The budget line constrains the maximum utility available to the consumer. Any
point to the right of a budget line is unattainable. This means that the maximum
utility available to the consumer is a point on an indifference curve that is
tangential to the budget line. This point is called the optimum.

Emile Woolf International

98

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Illustration:

The shaded area is affordable, given the current budget.

U1 is attainable, but inefficient
U3 is unattainable
The optimum on U2 is the most efficient point. At no other point could the
consumer have a higher utility given the constraints of the budget line.
The most efficient (optimal) point can be more formally identified using the
following formula:
Formula: Optimum
xy

Where:
MRSxy
MUx

= marginal rate of substitution between good X and good Y

= marginal utility of Good X

MUy

= marginal utility of Good Y

Px

= price of Good X

Py

= price of Good Y

This relationship is the point of tangency of the budget line to the indifference
curve in the above diagram.
The formula has a simple interpretation. At the optimum, the marginal utility per
rupee spent on Good X equals the marginal utility per rupee spent on Good Y. If
this were not the case the consumer could increase his utility by spending say
Rs. 10 less on the good with the lower marginal utility and using the Rs. 10 to buy
the good with the higher marginal utility. However, this is not possible as this
point is the optimum.
This is known as the law of equi-marginal utility or the law of substitution.
This can be explained further through an example:

Emile Woolf International

99

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example: Indifference map of Fruit and Vegetables

At the optimal point, it is impossible for the consumer to increase his utility,
without violating the current budget line.

Illustration:

On indifference curve of U1, the combination of 3 Fruits and 5 Vegetables is not

optimal because a higher state of utility is possible at 5 Fruits and 5 Vegetables.
The consumer would have a higher utility at 7 Fruits and 5 Vegetables on
indifference curve U2 however that is not possible as it is to the right of the
budget line. Similarly, the consumer would have higher utility at 10 Fruits and 2
Vegetables or 2 Fruits and 10 Vegetables but again both of these are not
possible as they are to the right of the budget line.
The optimum (the optimal point) occurs where the indifference curve and the
budget line are tangent. This is at the consumer equilibrium.
Importance of the law of equi-marginal utility
The law shed insight into several areas including the following.

Consumption: The law indicates how a consumer is able to make the best
choice of his wants to gain maximum total satisfaction. It suggests how
consumers achieve the optimum allocation of their income and expenditure.
In other words, it determines the relative demand for different goods.

Production: The law indicates how a producer can allocate his resource to
achieve the optimum allocation of resources. This is where the last unit of
investment expenditure brings equal productivity to all the factors of
production employed.

Emile Woolf International

100

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Assumptions underlying the law of equi-marginal utility

The law of equi-marginal utility rests on the following assumptions:

The consumer behaves rationally and seeks to maximize his total

satisfaction.

Utility is measurable in cardinal terms.

The consumer has a given scale of preference for the goods in

consideration.

The consumer has perfect knowledge of utility derived from goods.

Wants and goods are substitutable.

Prices of goods are unchanged.

Consumer income is fixed.

The marginal utility of money is constant.

3.8 Limitations of the law of equi-marginal utility

Consumer expenditure may not conform to the law due to the following
limitations:
Consumers do not make conscious calculations
The operation of the law involves calculations and comparison of the expected
satisfaction from an amount of money spent on alternative goods and services.
It is unlikely that consumers do this. Most consumer expenditure is based on
habit rather than conscious calculation and comparison of utility per unit of
currency.
However, it could be argued that the law explains the actions of rational
consumers on a sub-conscious level.
Consumer ignorance
Consumers may be unaware of other available alternatives. In this case no
substitution could take place and the law would not operate.
Custom and fashion
Some purchases are made based on custom or fashion rather than on the basis
of a rational appraisal of utility. This would distort the operation of the law.
Indivisibility of goods
The operation of the law assumes that goods and services are divisible so that
the optimum point might be reached. However, this is not the case in practice.
This prevents the marginal utilities form becoming equalised.
Underlying assumptions
The operation of the law rests on a series of assumptions which might not hold in
practice.

Emile Woolf International

101

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

EXTENSIONS OF INDIFFERENCE CURVES

Section overview

Introduction

Using the budget line

Substitution effect

Income effect

Price effect

Price change with an inferior good

4.1 Introduction
From all of the information that we have now gathered, it is possible for us to use
the indifference curves to undertake more analysis on different types of products.
The fact that the budget line pivots with a price change is useful for working out
what the income and substitution effects are on a product.

4.2 Using the budget line

We have seen how a change in the price of a good causes the budget line to
pivot.
It will be useful to analyse a scenario of a price change, and how that affects the
equilibrium position on an indifference curve.
Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

102

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

This shows that when the price of Good X decreases, the equilibrium changes
from A to B, and in doing so, taking the consumer to a higher indifference curve
What has caused this change?
Recalling from an earlier chapter, when the price of one good changes, this
affects the quantity bought of the other the cross price elasticity of demand.
There has been a substitution effect, and an income effect involved in this
change.

4.3 Substitution effect

So to start, we shall analyse the substitution effect.
The price of Good X falls, meaning that the consumer wishes to buy more of it.
However, there is also the income effect, which can also affect the quantity
demanded. Therefore we use indifference curve analysis to isolate the
movement.
Illustration:

The dotted budget line is tangential to the new budget line, and therefore
represents the same real income.
In looking at the substitution effect, we are seeing what the consumer would have
demanded, were the relative prices the same.
To do this we keep the consumer utility constant at , and find the point where
the dotted budget line is tangential. This is then a new bundle of goods which
occurs at A.
oint A is the bundle of goods that would have been bought if the relative prices
were post-price change, but if the consumer didnt experience the increase in
income that came with it.

Emile Woolf International

103

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

4.4 Income effect

The next step then, is to see the income effect.
As we know from earlier study, a rise in income causes a parallel shift in the
budget line. To isolate it, we take the bundle of goods A that would have been
bought were the relative prices the same, and push out the budget line to the
new utility curve, .
Illustration:

This shows that, from point A, what would happen to consumption of both goods
with the increase in income.
In this case, the additional income meant the consumer would choose bundle B,
which is an increase in consumption of Good X and Good Y.
The concept is explained in detail with the help of the following cases:
(i)

Income effect for normal goods.

(ii)

Income effect when good Y is inferior.

(iii)

Income effect when good X is inferior.

The above situations are explained with the help of diagrams as under:
Income effect for normal goods:
Normal goods are those goods whose demand rises with an increase in income
and falls to a decrease in income. Therefore, to an increase or decrease in
income, the Income Consumption Curve (IC) becomes 45. Because increase or
decrease in income affects both the goods generally in similar way.

Emile Woolf International

104

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Y
C

I.C.C.

Commodity Y

E2

E3
IC 3

E1

IC2
IC1
O

x1 x2 x3

D
B
Commodity X

Income effect when good Y is inferior

Income inferior goods are those goods whose demand falls to an increase in
income. If income of the consumers increases and the increase in demand is
less in proportion that is greater proportion of income is spent on goods X a
small proportion of income would be spent on inferior good Y. The income
consumption curve bends towards x axis as in figure below.

Income effect when good X is inferior

In case good X is inferior to an increase in income, lesser proportion of
income is spent on good X while larger proportion of in income is spent on
good Y so the income consumption curve bends towards Y axis as shown in
the figure.
i
i
i

Emile Woolf International

105

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

4.5 Price effect

rice effect shows change in the consumers equilibrium when price of one good
changes while the price of another good and consumer income remains constant.
It is the aggregate of the

substitution effect and;

income effect

Price effect is further explained with the help of the following cases.
(i)

Price effect for substitute goods

(ii)
(iii)

Price effect for independent goods.

Price effect for complementary goods.

Price Effect for substitute goods

Substitute goods are those goods which are used as alternates. For example
different brands / variety of bath soaps, toothpastes, mutton, beef, chicken,
vegetables, pulses etc. Due to any fall in price of Good X the demand for the
goods will not only increase but also the demand for good Y will fall. Good X
would appear to be more cheaper for consumers, so they decrease expenditure
on good Y and purchase more of goods X and the price consumption curves
slides towards x axis which shows that larger quantity of X and smaller quantity
of good Y is demanded as shown in figure below.

Emile Woolf International

106

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 4: Utility analysis

Substitute goods
Units of Commodity Y

E1

E2
IC1

PCC
IC2

B
Units of Commodity X

B1

Price effect for independent goods

In case both goods X and Y are independent, any fall in price of X will
affect total demand of X only and not going to have any impact on good Y.
Therefore the price consumption curve becomes parallel to x axis as figure
shown in figure below.

Price effect for complementary goods

Complementary good are those goods which are used in combination. For
example motor car and petrol, cricket bat and cricket ball etc. Change in price
of goods X not only change the demand of good X but also the demand for
good Y changes. Therefore to fall in price of good X the price consumption
curve becomes 45 as shown in figure below.

Emile Woolf International

107

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

4.6 Price change with an inferior good: Further explanation

Illustration:

Here we see the same price movement as before: a fall in the price of Good X.
Keeping utility constant, were we dealing with the new relative prices, then A of
Good X would be consumed.
The income effect is then brought into place, effectively moving from A to B. This
causes the quantity of B consumed to decrease.
Here the substitution and income effects are working in opposite directions;
however the substitution effect dominates the income effect.
We see that the price of Good X falling still leads to an increase in the quantity
consumed nevertheless.
In the bizarre instance where income effect dominates the substitution effect, an
increase in price will lead to an overall increase in quantity demanded. This is a
Giffen good.

Emile Woolf International

108

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Costs, revenues and firms

Contents
1 Short run costs
2 Long run costs
3 Revenue
4 Firms under different competition

Emile Woolf International

109

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO1

Understand the nature of micro-economics and its basic concepts.

LO2.6.1:

Cost and revenue curves: Discuss short run curves of total cost, total fixed
cost, total variable cost, average cost and marginal cost

LO2.6.2:

Cost and revenue curves: Derive a long run average cost curve from a short
run average cost curve

LO2.6.3:

Cost and revenue curves: Derive a long run marginal cost curve

LO2.6.4:

Cost and revenue curves: Discuss revenue curves under perfect and
imperfect competition

LO2.6.5:

Cost and revenue curves: Discuss the concept of economies and

diseconomies of scale

LO2.7.1:

Equilibrium of firm in the short and long term under perfect competition,
monopoly, oligopoly and monopolistic conditions: State the features of perfect
and imperfect competition

LO2.7.2:

Equilibrium of firm in the short and long term under perfect competition,
monopoly, oligopoly and monopolistic conditions: Discuss the short and long
run equilibrium of firms under perfect and imperfect competition

LO2.8.1:

Laws of increasing and diminishing returns: Explain the law of increasing

returns and its application and assumptions

LO2.8.2:

Laws of incr8easing and diminishing returns: Explain the law of diminishing

returns and its application and assumptions.

Emile Woolf International

110

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

SHORT RUN COSTS

Section overview

Introduction

Short, long, and very long run

Types of cost

Marginal cost

Relationship between the cost curves

Laws of costs (or Laws of returns)

Laws of returns: explanation

Law of variable proportions

Increasing and diminishing returns: evaluation

1.1 Introduction
Firms produce goods and services. This production is the supply that allows
consumer needs to be met. During the process of production, the business incurs
costs. This chapter explains cost behaviour. That is to say how costs are affected
by timescale and volume of output.
An accountant views profit as the difference between selling price and costs. An
economist would view normal profit (the acceptable return on capital invested) as
one of the costs of the business, being the return to enterprise. However, this
chapter deals mainly with the explicit costs faced by a firm. Profit earned is not
such an explicit cost but it is a return to the providers of capital.

1.2 Short, long, and very long run

Economic analysis examines cost behaviour over different timescales. Three
timescales are defined.
Short run
Definition: Short run
That period of time during which at least one factor of production must remain
fixed.
As previously explained there are four factors of production for economic goods
being land, labour, capital and enterprise. Assuming enterprise is always present
during the production process, this then leaves land, labour and capital to vary
based upon the time period.
In production, it is almost always capital that stays fixed (the factory, machinery
etc), as other factors can respond much more flexibly (labour, resources etc.)
Example:
Firm A produces wooden tables in a factory.
Firm A wishes to increase production.
In the short run, the capital (machinery used to cut the wood, say) will stay fixed.
In order to increase production, Firm A needs more materials (wood to make the
tables) and more labour (to assemble the wood).
In the short run the increase in cost will be additional cost of the labour and the
resources

Emile Woolf International

111

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Long run
Definition: long run
That period of time in which it is possible to vary output by varying all factors of
production within the given state of technology.
In the long run, it is assumed that all the factors of production can vary. This
means that a new, more efficient factory could be built that would reduce the
overall cost of production.
Example:
Firm A continues to increase its production.
Firm A moves to a new factory. This factory has more machinery meaning the
time taken to cut the pieces that go into the tables is heavily reduced.
Firm A is also able to vary the amount of labour and resources in the production
process to optimise output, and produce at a lower price than before.
In the long run, the cost of production can be reduced, when compared with the
short run because all of the factors of production could be optimised.
Very long run
Definition: Very long run
That period during which factors outside the firms control can vary.
In the very long run all factors of production are variable (as in the long run) but
other factors are also variable. For example, exogenous factors such as
government rule, social customs and technological advances are also variable.
These are beyond the control of a firm, and mean the cost of production can vary
further.
Example:
In the very long run, Firm A can fully optimise its four factors of production,
however it is also affected by exogenous factors.
The factory may be subject to a new tax (or subsidy) on using wooden products,
which would affect production costs.

1.3 Types of cost

From understanding the characteristics of different time periods, we shall next
explore the different types of cost involved for a company, which were briefly
touched upon in the previous section.
As we saw, in the short run, at least one factor of production must remain fixed.
This means that there are some costs known as fixed costs, which remain
constant regardless of the level of input.
Fixed cost
Existing only in the short run, these costs are unaffected by how much is
produced. If there was no production whatsoever, these costs would still be
incurred.

Emile Woolf International

112

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Definition: Fixed cost

Costs that do not vary with the level of output. (They do not change if output
changes).
Returning to Firm A and its production of wooden chairs, we can explore the
concept further.
Example:
The fixed costs associated with Firm A are those that would still have to be paid,
even if there was no output.
Examples of these are: rental cost of the building, rates/land taxes paid to local
authorities, costs of full-time contracted staff, and cost of business insurance.
Average fixed cost
Definition: Average fixed cost

The fixed costs of a business are known as the overheads. A useful indicator for
businesses to look at is the average fixed cost. If a firm can increase its scale of
operations, the fixed costs are spread over more units thus reducing the average
fixed cost.
Example:
Firm A has the following costs with its business:

Types of cost
Fixed costs
- Building rent
- Business insurance

Amount
(Rs.)

Output of Output of Output of

100
500
1,000
units
units
units

100,000
20,000
120,000

Average fixed cost:

Rs.120,000 100 units
Rs.120,000 500 units
Rs.120,000 1,000 units
Variable costs (/unit)
- Manual labour
- Wood
- Screws

Rs. 1,200
Rs.240
Rs. 120
1,000
500
200
1,700

Average Total Cost

1,700
2,900

1,700
1,940

1,700
1,820

As the quantity of output increases, the average fixed cost decreases. This will
always be the case, as the fixed cost is being spread over more and more units.

Emile Woolf International

113

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Variable cost
Definition: Variable cost
Costs that vary as the level of output varies.
This means that the costs to the firm will increase with every extra unit of output.
As stated earlier, in the long run, all factors of production are variable, so this is
an important concept.
Example:
The variable costs associated with Firm A are shown in the previous example.
With each additional unit of output being produced, there is a clear cost
associated with it.
The additional cost of each additional table is Rs. 1,700.
Average variable cost
Definition: Average variable cost

The information provided for Firm A shows a variable cost per unit that does not
change with the level of output. Every extra unit of output had a variable cost of
Rs.1,700.
This is not always the case. Usually, variable costs are more or less constant up
to a certain level of output after which they increase.
Example:
Suppose Firm A employs 4 people to assemble tables and that these assemble
10 tables each per day. A 5th and 6th employee (on the same wages as the others)
might each also assemble 10 tables each. This would mean that the labour cost
per table would be unchanged.
However, the 7th employee (on the same wages as the others) might result in a
reduction in the average number of tables per employee thus increasing the
labour cost per table.
This is because space might be limited and employees might have to wait for
sufficient space to finish a job or that employees now have to queue to receive
wood from the stores whereas before there was no waiting time previously.
This effect is known as the law of diminishing returns (or the property of
diminishing marginal product).

Emile Woolf International

114

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Example:
Firm B has the following cost structure:
Types of cost

Amount (Rs.)

Fixed costs
-

Building rent

50,000

Business insurance

10,000

Variable costs (per unit for units 0-10)

-

Labour

800

Materials

400

Energy costs

1,200

Variable costs (per unit for units 11-500)

-

Labour

900

Materials

400

Energy costs

800

Variable costs (per unit for units 5011000)

-

Labour

1,500

Materials

400

Energy costs

700

Disregarding the fixed costs, if we look solely at the variable costs, then these will
change at different levels of output. Remember, that because the costs are given
on a per unit basis already, it is not necessary to divide by output again.
Output
5

Average variable cost

(Rs.800 + Rs.400 + Rs.1,200) = Rs.2,400

250

(Rs.900 + Rs.400 + Rs.800) = Rs.2,100

750

(Rs.1,500 + Rs.400 + Rs.700) = Rs.2,600

This shows us a number of interesting points. For Firm B, at different levels of

output, its variable costs will change. We can see that the average cost of:
energy (power to run machines etc) decreases as output increases
labour increases as output rises, this is because more skilled labour (i.e.
managers) is required at higher levels of output, hence increasing the average
cost.
Total cost
Bringing the two costs (fixed and variable) together, we have a figure for the total
cost to the firm.
Definition: Total cost
All of the expense to produce each level of output
Total cost = Fixed cost + Variable cost

Emile Woolf International

115

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

This will vary from firm to firm, as each will have different fixed costs, and variable
costs.
Example:
For Firm B, we can calculate the total cost of production at a certain point, say
200 units.
If we recall:
Types of cost

Amount (Rs.)

Fixed costs
-

Building rent

50,000

Business insurance

10,000

Variable costs (per unit for units

11-500)
-

Labour

900

Materials

400

Energy costs

800

Therefore at 200 units, the calculation will be:

(

) [

)]

At 600 units, the calculation will be:

(

) [

)]

The concept of total cost can be represented in a graphical form as well:

Illustration:

This shows the cost structure for Firm A, whereby the variable costs remain the
same for each incremental increase in output.
The assumption of constant proportion is not present in most firms, however this
is the simplest form of displaying the relationship between the three costs.

Emile Woolf International

116

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

The illustration below shows the cost curves for a firm where the average variable
cost changes at different levels of output.
Illustration:

Here, the variable costs of a firm like Firm B increase at a declining rate, flatten
out, and then increase further afterwards.
This idea of changing rates at different points along a curve is explored in greater
h
P
y

Average total cost

A simple continuation of finding the total cost is to find the average total cost,
which is used to indicate what costs have gone into making a unit at each level of
output.
Definition: Average total cost (or average cost)
All of the expense to produce each level of output, divided by the total number of
units

It can also be calculated as: Average Fixed Cost + Average Variable Cost
The short-run average cost curve is U shaped:
The average cost is made up of an average fixed cost per unit plus an average
variable cost per unit.
Average fixed cost will fall as the level of output rises. Spreading fixed costs over
a larger amount of output is a major reason why (short-run) average costs per
unit fall as output increases.
The standard assumption about the variable costs is that up to a certain level of
output, the variable cost per unit is more or less constant but will rise when output
increases beyond a normal capacity level. This reaches a point where the
downward pressure due to the fall in average fixed cost is outweighed by the
upward pressure of increase in average variable cost (due to law of diminishing
returns) thus giving the curve a U shape.

Emile Woolf International

117

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.4 Marginal cost

Then finally we have the marginal cost. Though this may seem similar to variable
costs, the marginal cost will change at various levels of production. Also as we
will see later, it is very important to the decisions that a firm will make.
Definition: Marginal cost
The addition to total costs resulting from increasing output by one Unit. i.e. the
variable costs of the last Unit produced

This is better explained through an example

Example: Calculating marginal cost
Output

Total cost

Rs.500

Marginal cost
(in bold)
Rs.500
Rs.300

Rs.800

Rs.800
Rs.250

Rs.1,050

Rs.1,050
Rs.200

Rs.1,250

Rs.1,250
Rs.300

Rs.1,550

Rs.1,550
Rs.500

Rs.2,050

Rs.2,050

Once the total costs have been established, it is relatively simple to then
calculate the marginal cost between each output level.
We can see here that the m

Marginal cost (MC) curve

This means that the marginal cost curve for a typical firm is U-shaped. Though
different in each case, the reason for this general shape is to do with diminishing
and increasing returns.
At the low levels of output, there are still efficiencies that can be made
(increasing returns) meaning the cost of producing an extra unit will be less than
before, because equipment etc is not being fully utilised.
After a certain point though, this will begin to change, and the cost of producing
an extra unit will begin to rise with each incremental increase, as equipment etc
reaches capacity, and inefficiencies start to occur.

Emile Woolf International

118

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

1.5 Relationship between the cost curves

Now that we have an understanding of the main costs to a firm, we can look at
how these curves interact with each other.
The marginal cost is key to understanding how much a firm will want to produce,
and therefore supply to the market. By isolating the cost to produce an additional
unit of a good, they can accurately assess the cost of increasing output.
The average variable cost curve also begins by decreasing, finds a minimum
spot, and then increases afterwards.
The average fixed cost curve is always downward sloping, because the fixed
costs remain constant, and are then spread out more thinly with each additional
unit of output.
The average total cost curve is the sum of the AVC and AFC curves, so it too is
U-shaped.
This can be shown on a cost curve graph below:
Illustration:

There are a number of important points to note from this graph.

The inclusion of fixed costs raises the AVC to the AC
The MC, AVC, and AC all start by declining, before reaching a minimum point,
and then increasing again
The AC and AVC are pierced at their minimum points by MC curve
This last point deserves greater discussion.
Any average cost curve will continue to decrease if the MC is less than the AC. If
the previous incremental cost was less than the average, then this will naturally
bring the average down.
Once the MC becomes bigger than the AC, each additional unit will add cost
which is greater than the average, thereby increasing the average.
This principle is the same with the AVC curve also, which is why the marginal
cost curve crosses it at its minimum point.

Emile Woolf International

119

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.6 Laws of costs (or Laws of returns)

There are three laws of costs that we will examine here:
Law of decreasing cost (Law of increasing returns)
Law of constant cost (Law of constant returns)
Law of increasing cost (Law of decreasing returns as previously as law of
diminishing returns)
When costs are decreasing, this is due to the returns on the factors of production
exerting increasing returns. For this reason, the two are effectively the same.
These three laws apply at different levels of output for a firm.
Example:

Output

Fixed
cost

Variable
cost

Total
cost

Average
cost

Marginal
cost

Phase

100

55

155

155

55

100

95

195

98

40

100

130

230

77

35

100

165

265

66

35

5
6

100
100

210
272

310
372

62
62

45
62

I
I

100

352

452

65

80

100

450

550

69

98

9
10

100
100

570
720

670
820

74
82

120
150

I
I

Where:
D = Decreasing
C = Constant
I = Increasing
As output increases, the MC decreases until the third unit. It then remains
constant until the fourth unit after which it increases.
This can be explained in terms of marginal productivity. The marginal productivity
improves until the third unit. This represents the maximum productivity available
and is the point where the most return on the factors of production is earned.
Marginal productivity remains constant until the fourth unit after which it
deteriorates.
This is represented in a graph below:

Emile Woolf International

120

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Illustration:

MC

AC

Average cost continues to fall until MC = AC at which point AC is at a minimum.

(Up to this point, the MC of each new unit is less than the AC of units to date.
The new unit will thus reduce the average).

1.7 Laws of returns: explanation

After finding the derivation of a marginal cost curve, we look in more detail at the
flipside; productivity.
The idea of marginal returns is fundamental to the understanding how costs are
formed.
The logic behind this is best explained through an example:
Example:
A firm producing widgets (term for a generic good) has two factors of production:
the factory, and labour. The capacity of the factory is fixed, and the marginal cost
of labour is the same (i.e. each new worker will cost the same).
There are two stages to how marginal cost is affected.
1. Increasing returns (MC goes down)
As output begins to increase, the large manufacturing processes/equipment
still not fully utilised means that TC only increases slightly. The additional labour
can be productive as they can always use the equipment to its full potential, for
example. As such the MC is relatively low.
2. Constant returns (MC goes sideward)
At this point, labour is producing its optimal output per unit. The marginal cost
is therefore at its lowest.
3. Diminishing returns (MC goes up)
The more labour that is employed, the less marginal output it is able to produce.
This could be a result of too many people to efficiently operate/ rotate use of
machinery. The cost increases more and more to generate an extra unit of
output, because of labour exhibiting diminishing returns in the short run.

Emile Woolf International

121

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

In general, the productivity of factors of production can be represented as below:

Illustration:

The productivity of the variable factor will vary. This will cause the shape
of the cost curves to change from being linear to being curvi-linear.
This leaves us with need to formally define the relationship between productivity
laws of returns and marginal cost:
Definition: relationship between MC and returns
If the variable factors of production show increasing returns, then MC is set to be
falling. However as these factors ultimately exhibit diminishing returns of
productivity, the MC curve will always eventually increase.

1.8 Law of variable proportion

The Law of variable proportion goes on to synthesise a lot of the points and
concepts that have been made above.
It states:
Definition: Law of variable proportion
As the quantity of one factor is increased, with others remaining fixed, the
marginal product of that factor will decline.
However, this is dependent on three assumptions:
Constant state of technology: if technology improved, then the marginal
product could increase also.
Fixed amount of other factors: they must stay constant to be able to test it.
Possibility to combine factors: the factors must be able to combine to make
a product.
In doing so, the productivity of the factor inputs will follow the pattern below:

Emile Woolf International

122

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Illustration:

Going through these phases shows how productivity changes with the isolated
increase of a factor. This then leads to returns displaying the features that we
discussed.

1.9 Increasing and diminishing returns: evaluation

There are a number of points to be considered with regard to the analysis we
have done so far on productivity returns. It is important to bear in mind the
underlying assumptions that have been made:
Assumptions
Time is so short that fixed factors cannot change.
Labour is the only variable factor, increased output may decrease material
costs.
There is no change to the technique of production.

Emile Woolf International

123

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

LONG RUN COSTS

Section overview

Introduction

Diagram
Economies and diseconomies of scale

Deriving a long run average cost curve

Deriving a long run marginal cost curve

2.1 Introduction
So far we have looked only at the short run, where all but one of the factors of
production has been fixed. As you recall, in the long run, all of these factors are
variable, and so the average cost of production could fall beyond what it is in the
short run.
In our example, if the widget factory is close to capacity, the firm could consider
buying a new plant, which could decrease the overall average cost. However this
would only be so once a sufficient output was reached to cover the initial cost of
buying the new plant which lends itself to this analysis.
First, let us clarify the shape, and some features, of the average cost curve

2.2 Diagram

As the output of the firm increases the unit cost decline up until output level
Qmes.
Qm
h
m minimum efficient scale of output and is where unit costs are
minimised because economies of scale are maximised.
After a point further growth may cause unit costs to rise due to the inefficiencies
generated by diseconomies of scale.

Emile Woolf International

124

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

2.3 Economies and diseconomies of scale

There are a number of factors which affect the unit cost of a product depending
on the output.
Cost reducing benefits to large scale production are known as economies of
scale.
Definition: Economies of scale
Factors which lead to the overall decrease in unit cost, as output increases.
These are usually costs which have similar characteristics to fixed costs, and can
be spread out amongst ever greater units, hence reducing the average cost
Examples of these are:
Technical: generate better efficiency through larger quantities of output.
Managerial: able to employ specialist managers to increase efficiencies.
Trading: able to buy and sell in bulk at more optimal prices.
Financial: able to demand better interest rates with more assets as collateral.
External: firms clustering together development of specialised labour force etc.
The converse of these are diseconomies of scale: cost increasing disadvantages
of large scale production.
Definition: Diseconomies of scale
Factors which lead to the overall increase in unit cost, as output increases.
These are often a result of managers/ staff losing control/ motivation as
production gets greater. There can also be strains on local infrastructure which
come with scale.

2.4 Deriving a long run average cost curve

From what we know of these curves in the short run, it is possible to make up a
long run curve. As mentioned above, this sort of analysis is useful for a firm
deciding whether to build a new factory.
They would look at forecasts of what the average costs would be at various
levels of future output, and from there, find the output size that leaves them with
the optimal average cost.
Many decisions are fixed in the short run but variable in the long run. This leads
to the long run cost curve being a different shape to the short run cost curves.
The following figure shows the long run cost curve of a firm. As the firm moves
along the cost curve it is adjusting the size of its factory to the quantity of
production. The diagram also shows the short run cost curves for a small medium
and large factory. (Of course these are not the only three factories that could be
built. The firm could choose any intermediate size and in each case that would
result in a different ATC curve).

Emile Woolf International

125

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

ATC1 = Average total costs in short run of a small factory.

ATC2 = Average total costs in short run of a medium factory.
ATC3 = Average total costs in short run of a large factory.

The long run cost curve is much flatter than the short run cost curve. All short run
cost curves lie above or on the long run curve. This reflects the extra flexibility
available in the long run.
In the short run the firm faces whatever short run curve results from its past
choice as to the size of the factory but in the long run the firm can choose its
short run cost curve.
Suppose the firm had a small factory. It would experience average total costs
represented by ATC1 above. Assume that the firm was manufacturing at a cost
represented by the lowest point on ATC1. If it wanted to increase production in
the short run it could only do so by taking action that would increase average
total costs (i.e. a point represented further up ATC1).
Alternatively the firm could invest in a medium size factory. This would allow the
firm to benefit from economies of scale. The new short run curve would be ATC2.
Because the LRAC is a curve where all inputs are flexible, and the SRAC is a
curve where only one input is flexible, it is impossible for the SRAC to undercut
the LRAC. At points where they meet, this is when resources are deployed in the
same way, and so the costs are equal.
This leads to the following relationship:
Definition: Envelope relationship
At a planned output level, short run average total cost equals long run average
total cost, but at all other levels of output, short run average total cost is higher
than long run average total cost.
Consequently, when deriving the LRAC, we take the lowest, or near-lowest costs
for the SRACs when the plants are different sizes, and find the best fit around
them so that no SRAC points are below the LRAC.

Emile Woolf International

126

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

2.5 Deriving a long run marginal cost curve

There is also a distinction to be made with regard to the short run marginal cost
(SRMC) and the long run marginal cost (LRMC).
Due to all factors being variable, we find that the LRMC is flatter than the SRMC.
In words, this translates to it costing the firm less to increase a unit of output
when all factors of production are flexible, than when some of them are fixed.
As with the derivation of the LRAC, the LRMC and SRMC also exhibit an
envelope relationship.
To derive an LRMC, we will begin by drawing a Long Run Total Cost (LRTC)
curve.
The slope of the LRTC is the LRMC.
A steep slope indicates a high MC, and a flat slope indicates a low MC.
Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

127

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Drawing the graphs in this way allows us to see at which points the LRMC will be
at its lowest, and when the costs are increasing and decreasing.
We can see that the minimum point of the LRMC is when the LRTC is flat
where there is no change in the addition of cost from an extra unit of output.
The lowest point of the LRAC occurs when the flattest tangent from the origin
meets the LRTC. On the diagram, this occurs at Q .
The LRMC will cut the LRAC from below at the minimum level of the LRAC. After
this point, there are diseconomies of scale and the cost of producing an extra unit
becomes even greater.
As was mentioned in an earlier section, the relationship between marginal cost
and average cost remains the same, in that the MC curve will cut the average
cost curve at its minimum point. See 1.5 to recap.

Emile Woolf International

128

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

REVENUE
Section overview

Introduction

Under perfect competition

Under imperfect competition

3.1 Introduction
Up to this stage it has been only the cost side of firm behaviour that we have
considered in depth. However, an analysis of how revenue, the money firms
receive from selling their products, is equally necessary to understand the
behaviour of firms.
To begin, we first consider the total revenue (TR) that a firm can earn from selling
its products:
Definition: Total revenue
m

This is not an unfamiliar concept, as we touched upon this before. From knowing
that this is the total revenue, we can delve deeper into other types of revenue.
Average revenue
Average revenue (AR) can simply be thought of as how much money a firm
earns for its goods on a per unit basis.
Definition: Average revenue

Substituting the TR equation into the AR equation, we can see that AR is equal to
Market price. This means that whatever the prevailing market price is, is what the
average revenue per unit will be.
In other words, the AR curve is equivalent to the demand curve for that good.
Marginal revenue
As w h h m
concepts we have seen, marginal revenue is the
incremental earnings from an additional unit sold.
Definition: Marginal revenue
h
h
Marginal revenue is useful for the firm because they can evaluate what additional
income they will receive from selling an extra unit of the good.

Emile Woolf International

129

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.2

Under perfect competition

One of the distinct features of perfect competition is that the demand curve is
completely horizontal. This is because the price remains the same regardless of
output it is not a downward sloping demand curve like we have seen earlier.
From a firm perspective, because price remains constant, this means that
average revenue remains constant also.
As each additional unit of output is generating the same revenue (i.e. the
constant price) this is one instance where marginal revenue is equal to
average revenue.
Illustration:

3.3

Under imperfect competition

In all other instances (i.e. imperfect competition), the demand curve faced by
firms is downward sloping.
This is to do with the Law of Demand that we learnt about earlier, whereby as the
price of a good decreases, the quantity demanded increases.
For this reason, the demand curve, and therefore AR curve, is downward sloping
and to the right.
We shall now look at the graphical representation of AR and MR on a graph as
follows.
The marginal revenue is always less than the price due to the arithmetic of
averages and marginals.
To better understand the reasons behind the slopes of marginal revenue, and
average revenue, we shall look now at an example.

Emile Woolf International

130

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Example:
A firm is faced with the following schedule for the quantities they sell, and the
revenue that they will receive:
Quantity

AR (P)

TR

MR

Rs.100

100

100

Rs.90

180

80

Rs.80

240

60

Rs.70

280

40

Rs.60

300

20

Rs.50

300

Rs.40

280

-20

We see here that marginal revenue falls quicker than average revenue.
At the point where the quantity sold goes from 6 units to 7 units, the marginal
revenue that the firm could earn actually decreases they would earn more from
selling 5 or 6 units at a higher price than they would be selling 7 units at Rs.40.
This can be represented on the graph below. The MR curve crosses the x-axis at
6 units.
Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

131

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

FIRMS UNDER DIFFERENT COMPETITION

Section overview

Introduction

Perfect competition
Imperfect competition

Monopoly

Oligopoly

Monopolistic competition

4.1 Introduction
Firm behaviour depends on the market structure that they operate within.
Here, we shall discuss the two extremes: perfect and monopolistic (imperfect)
competition.
Whilst there are differences in the final outcome for the consumer between the
two scenarios, there are some characteristics that remain the same.
The most salient being that: every profit maximising firm will produce at the point
where the marginal revenue is equal to the marginal cost, provided that
marginal cost cuts marginal revenue from below.
This is also the condition which is loss minimising for the firm.

4.2 Perfect competition

The firm operating in conditions of perfect competition will face a number of
features particular to its market.
Features
Large numbers of buyers and sellers: No single buyer or seller is able to
influence the market price for the product this is only possible through high
volume which dilutes any power any single party may have.
Homogenous product: An identical product means no individual producer can
charge more for a good that could be considered superior.
Free entry and exit: Firms can leave and enter as determined by fluctuations in
profit.
Perfect knowledge of prices: Buyers and sellers are fully aware of prices in the
market.
Transport costs are negligible: Th
the economic agents.

h m

Perfect factor mobility: Factors of production are perfectly mobile, allowing free
long term adjustments to be made by the firm.
Firms are price takers: Firms accept the market price that is given, and have no
influence on changing it.

Emile Woolf International

132

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Illustration: Perfect competition

Because the perfectly competitive firm is too small to influence the market price
its MR is the market price. Therefore it will maximise profits where its MC equals
the market price. i.e. P Q . In fact, supply curve of the firm is the marginal cost
curve.

Short Run Equilibrium with Supernormal Profits

Illustration: Short Run Equilibrium with Supernormal Profits

Points to note
The firm is producing where AR>AC.
This means that the revenue derived from supplying the market exceeds the
opportunity cost of the factors used. Consequently the firm is making a
Supernormal Profit.
The firm is producing to the right of (i.e. above) the quantity corresponding to its
lowest AC.
Recalling that high productivity leads to low unit costs we can see that this firm is
enduring rising unit costs in order to supply the present quantity. This means it is
y
y

Emile Woolf International

133

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Short Run Equilibrium with Subnormal Profits

Similarly when the price drops below the bottom of the average cost curve, the
following occurs:
Illustration: Short Run Equilibrium with Subnormal Profits

The firm is producing where AR<AC.

This means that the revenue derived from supplying the market is less than the
opportunity cost of the factors used. Consequently the firm is making a
subnormal profit.
The firm will be producing to the left of (i.e. below) the quantity corresponding to
its lowest AC (which is unsustainable).
As all firms will be faced with this situation, some will have to exit.
The converse of what is explained below then happens
In the short run, it is possible for the firm to survive if P<AC. A firm will exit the
market if its average revenue/ price is below the average variable cost. The
reason for this is to do with the shutdown condition.
Definition: Shutdown condition
The market price that forces a firm to exit the market. This occurs when P<AVC.
The reason for this is the distinction between Total Cost and Variable Cost, and
also sunk costs.
In the short run the firm will continue to produce as long as total revenue covers
total variable costs or put another way, so long as Price per unit is greater than or
equal to Average Variable Cost (AR = AVC).
The reason for this is because a firm must pay its fixed costs even if there is no
m
h h
h
w
h
firm shuts down) then the loss per unit would be higher if the firm were to shut
down, so long as they were still able to cover the variable costs.
It is therefore feasible for a firm to not shut down (in the short run) if P<AC.

Emile Woolf International

134

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Restoration of long-run equilibrium

Illustration: Restoration of long-run equilibrium

In the long-run the supernormal profits will be eroded by the following process:
Higher price will attract more firms into the market
The increased supply will lower the price
With demand staying constant, this will cause the price to drop again, to P1
This is level at the bottom of the AC curve.
Points to note
Firm makes only normal profits in the long-run due to absence of barriers to
entry
Price is at its lowest feasible long-term level where it just compensates the
firm for the opportunity cost of the resources used.
The firm produces efficiently where its AC is at the minimum.

4.3 Imperfect competition

From seeing perfect competition, we now turn to the more common imperfect
competition.
This arises when only a few firms are able to supply a certain good at the given
market price. This becomes problematic mainly from a public policy perspective.
If a few firms hold a lot of power in a marketplace, then they are more likely to
increase the price for their own profit, at the expense of consumer welfare.
As such, governments have been known to intervene if this market power
becomes abused.
Sources of imperfection
To analyse imperfect competition, we need to know some of the sources of this
imperfection.
Many are caused by barriers to entry being formed when only a small number of
firms actually supply to the market. If there are significant economies of scale,
then only those who are in the position to supply can have costs low enough to
warrant entry into the market. If a small firm tried to enter, they would not be able
to compete.

Emile Woolf International

135

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Other barriers can come from regulation. If, for example, a firm registers a patent
meaning that it is the only firm allowed to sell a certain type of product, then they
have a market advantage that others cannot. This means, say, that they could
supply to the market at a cheaper price than other firms, again acting as a
barrier.

4.4 Monopoly
The extreme case of imperfect competition happening is in a monopoly.
Definition: Monopoly
A market structure where there is just one firm supplying to the whole market.
There is absence of competition - whatever price/ output choice they make as an
individual firm is what it is for the whole market.
Features of a monopoly
There are a number of features particular to a monopoly which deserve mention:
Sole supplier of good or commodity
Profit maximising firm
Price maker
Earn super normal profit
Very high barriers to entry
Examples of a monopoly
Not many examples exist of true monopolies, as they are difficult to be
established in a true free market economy. That said, some governments issue
firms the right to run a monopoly, such as the following:
U.S. Steel
Deutsche Telekom
National Football League
Long run equilibrium of a monopolist
Unlike for perfect competition there is no difference between the long-run and
short-run equilibrium of the monopolist. The firm faces a downward sloping
demand curve because the average revenue decreases as output increases.
The monopolist cannot simultaneously set price and quantity
If it cuts quantity prices will rise.
If it raises quantity prices will fall.

Emile Woolf International

136

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Illustration: Monopoly

Points to notice
The firm may make supernormal profits by charging a price above AC. This has
the effect of exploiting the consumer. Total supernormal profits are Q P - .
h

efficient to survive.
The firm can continue making supernormal profits in the long-run due to the
existence of barriers to entry.

The monopolist can deter entry from competitors

With the monopolist holding significant market power, it is possible for them to act
in a way that prevents other firms from entering the market.
In principle, if they are able to maintain barriers to entry high; other firms will not
be able to enter, and they can retain their excess profit.
These come in three categories:
Structural
Due to differences in production costs
Economies of scale
Vertical integration
Control of resources
Expertise/ reputation of incumbent

Emile Woolf International

137

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Strategic
Choices by the monopolist to make entry harder
P
y
w
h
m
m
able to do,
thus driving them from the market, and then increasing the price again once
they leave)
Marketing/ product differentiation
Legal
Barriers enforced by law
Patents
Copyright
Licences

Advantages of a monopoly
Despite being labelled as imperfect, there are nonetheless a number of
advantages that can be had from a market or industry being run by a monopoly.
Benefit from economies of scale: O y
m
y
y
w
h s is the
argument for natural monopolies and is the reason why many governments
promote them.
Dominant domestically allows for international competitiveness: By
running a monopoly with the ability to produce at scale, a firm can then
operate internationally at a much more competitive rate.
Supernormal profits: can be used to fund technological improvement, such
as investment in R&D
Able to take a long term approach: This allows for investment in long term
projects, rather than short termism

Disadvantages of a monopoly
Despite the above positives, there are also a number of disadvantages that come
with the monopoly market structure.
Output is restricted in the market
Price is higher than in a competitive market
Less choice for consumers
Less consumer sovereignty
This can be measured in different types of inefficiency: technical inefficiency,
productive inefficiency and X-inefficiency
Definition: Technical inefficiency
When a firm is not producing the maximum output from the minimum quantity of
inputs.
An example of technical inefficiency would be a firm hiring too many employees
to produce a required level of output, or using outdated capital.
Within the scope of technical inefficiency, there are two other types we shall
consider.

Emile Woolf International

138

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Definition: Productive inefficiency

Where the production of a good is not achieved at the lowest resource cost
possible.
This occurs in a monopoly because they produce at an output which is not at the
lowest point on the Average Cost curve. This means that the cost is above what
the minimum could be.
Definition: X-inefficiency
The difference between the efficient behaviour of firms, and the observed
behaviour of firms. It occurs owing to a lack of competitive pressure.
A monopoly incurs x-inefficiency when, because there is not competition from
other firms, the monopolist does not seek the most technically efficient practices
in its business. This could be under-utilisation of capital, or over-hiring of
employees.

Price discrimination
One of the characteristics of a monopolist is the ability to engage in price
discrimination.
Definition: Price discrimination
The action of selling the same product to different groups of buyers at different
prices in order to maximise profits.
The heterogeneity in price is independent of the cost of production; it is purely on
the basis of maximising profit. True price discrimination only occurs when the
good being sold is identical. For example, a First Class seat on a plane will have
higher associated costs than an Economy seat, and so charging a higher price

m
Conditions required for price discrimination
In order to work, there are three conditions that must be met:
Monopoly power: Firm must have the ability to set prices.
Elasticity of demand: Each group of buyers must have a different elasticity of
demand in order to extract consumer surplus.
Separation of market: Firm must be able to split up the groups of buyers, and
prevent goods from being resold between them.
Price discrimination: diagram
Based on the above conditions, the concept of price discrimination can be
illustrated like so:

Emile Woolf International

139

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

What is important to note here is that the demand is more elastic in Market A,
and therefore the monopolist charges a lower price in order to maximise profit. In
Market B, the demand is more inelastic, meaning it charges a higher price.
Without price discrimination, the monopolist would charge just one price to both
Market A and Market B, in which case the total level of profit would be lower.

4.5 Oligopoly
Definition: Oligopoly
An industry dominated by a few large suppliers.

Often an oligopoly is defined as an industry with 2 or more but not more than 20
suppliers. However, an oligopoly would also exist if there were a large number of
small suppliers in a market dominated by several large suppliers. For example,
the UK regulatory definition of an oligopoly is a five firm concentration ratio of
more than 50% (this means they have more than 50% of the market share).
An industry in which there are only two dominant firms is called a duopoly.
Examples of oligopolies include:

h
y
wh h
m
Deloittes, KPMG and Ernst and Young);

y h

PW

Commercial aircraft industry which is dominated by Boeing and Airbus.

Oligopolies might be collusive (i.e. member firms work together in making pricing
and output decisions) or non-collusive. Each of these is discussed later.

Features of oligopoly
Few sellers markets:
It is a market model in which the number of entities producing / trading
homogenous or differentiated product are few, that is, few large firms with a high
Concentration Ratio.

Emile Woolf International

140

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Interdependence of firms:
It is the unique feature of oligopolistic market that the policies of every producer
directly affect others, because the products are good substitutes. They have high
cross elasticities of demand, therefore, pricing and output decisions of one firm
are highly important for others. A firm is not certain how its rivals will respond to
an action initiated by it. Consequently there is interdependence in decision
making.
Maximum advertisement:
Because of interdependence and being good substitutes, oligopolistic firm
spends much in advertisement. It is generally said that "Advertising can become
a life and death matter for them". For example if all oligopolists continue to spend
lots of money on advertising their products and one seller does not match up with
them, he will find his customers gradually shifting to his rival products.
Inside competition - Outside agreement:
True competition consists of a life of constant struggle i.e. rival against rival, a
phenomenon which one can only find in oligopoly market model leading to
another feature of the oligopolistic market; the presence of competition. This
competition is not a shape of perfect competition where there is no battle
because there is never anyone strong enough to disturb the peace. Thus in
Oligopoly, although there is a joint stance of firms on many issues like pricing etc.
but in-fact they are always competing of other issues like market size etc.
Lack of uniformity in size of the firms:
Another feature of oligopoly market is the lack of uniformity in size of firms. Some
firms may be very large (dominant) and other firms may be of small size.
Uniformity in size of entities is rare in oligopoly.
Demand curve under oligopoly market:
Since under oligopoly the exact behaviour pattern of a producer cannot be
ascertained with certainty, the demand curve cannot be drawn accurately and
with definiteness.
No unique pattern of pricing behaviour:
Because of interdependence and rivalry, all players enter into a formal
agreement with regard to price and output changes. It leads to a monopoly under
oligopoly. For example, organization of petroleum exporting countries (OPEC)
regularly determines the price of oil and its output in the world oil market.
Barriers to entry (Entry is difficult but not impossible):
Since there may be a monopoly under oligopoly, the existing firms create artificial
barriers to new entry. For example economies of scale are important entry
barriers in a number of oligopolistic industries such as the aircraft, rubber and
cement industries. In these industries, each of the existing say three or four firms
might have sufficient sales to achieve economies of scale. But new firms entering
this market would have such a small operating level / market share in the
beginning that it would be difficult for them to survive and absorb huge
operational losses. Entry barriers may also be because of Government
Restrictions, Licences, and Patents etc.

Emile Woolf International

141

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Mergers:
Some oligopolies have emerged mainly through the growth of the dominant firms
in a given industry. More recently many of the players in the airlines, banking and
entertainment industry have merged. The merging or combining, of two or more
competing firms may substantially increase their market share, and this in turn
may allow one of them, say the new firms to achieve greater economies of scale
through merging with the larger firm. These merged firms would then have more
control on supply and thus the price of their product(s).
Homogenous or differentiated goods:
An oligopoly may be homogenous oligopoly or differentiated oligopoly depending
upon whether the firms in the oligopoly produce standardized or differentiated
products. Many industrial products (steel, zinc, copper, lead, cement etc.) are
virtually standardized products that are produced in homogeneous oligopolies.
While many consume
m
m
household appliances cigarettes and many sporting goods) are differentiated
oligopolies engaging in considerable non-price competition supported by heavy
advertisement.
Lack of market information:
Consumers in oligopolistic markets lack detailed market information and are
susceptible to the market strategies of the suppliers.
Collusive oligopolies
Firms may attempt to collude (agree on an approach) in oligopolistic markets. If
they were to do this they could act as a monopoly, setting the price so as to make
higher profits over the long term. Oligopolists acting in this way are known as a
cartel.
Collusive oligopolies are rare in practice.
Cartel members might be tempted to break the agreement in the pursuit of
increasing their share of the industry profit.
Price fixing in a cartel arrangement is often illegal.
Strength of collusion oligopolies
Collusion is possible if following conditions apply.

Only very few firms are operating which are all well known to each other.

They are open with each other regarding costs and production methods.

Production techniques and costs of all the firms are similar.

They produce similar products.

There is a dominant firm.

There are significant barriers on entry of new firms.

The market is stable (that is no price war and price rivalry).

Non - intervention by the Government to hinder Collusions.

Emile Woolf International

142

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Illustration: Collusive oligopoly

Price

Supply

Pc

Pm

Demand

Qc

Qm

Qs

Quantity

In the above diagram the free market price would be Pm and the
quantity supplied would be Qm.
However, the cartel decides on a price of Pc (which may be established
by restricting supply to Qc by use of a quota on its members).
This creates the problem of potential oversupply because
at price Pc a member of the cartel might be tempted to maximise its
own profits by producing at output Qs. This would undermine the cartel
agreement and probably lead the other members to increase production
also.
Success and failure of price cartel
Price cartels are established when the cartel firms have the ability to control
nearly total supply in the market. However, the main drawback or weakness of
price cartels is that each firm wishes secretly to sell more output than the allotted
share which results in breaking the price cartel agreement. The failure or success
of cartels depends on the following:
Control on supply: Whether price cartel is consisting of most or all of the selling
firms of the product? If price cartel is controlling the supply, price cartels are
successful otherwise price cartel will break.
Close substitutes: Price cartel is successful if close substitutes are not available in
the market because at higher price agreed on by the oligopoly firms if close
substitutes are available buyers will shift demand to close substitutes, therefore,
price cartels will not exist.
The ease with which supply can be controlled: If the supply in the market is easily
controlled by the oligopoly firms, price cartel is successful. However, if supply (in
case of agricultural crops) is dependent on climatic conditions and weather
conditions, or discovery of new natural resources price cartel may not be
successful as in case of favourable climatic conditions there may be a better and
bumper harvest of agricultural products.
Price elasticity of demand: Success of price cartels is dependent on price
elasticity of demand. If price elasticity of demand is elastic i.e. at higher price,
buyers contract demand more proportionately, price cartels will be unsuccessful.
But if the price elasticity of demand is in-elastic, price cartels are successful
because higher price agreed-on may be established.
Agreement on individual share: If all the firms in cartel agree on their allotted
quota of supply, price cartels are successful. However, if firms secretly increase
production and sale of the product, price cartels will collapse because at
increased supply, charging a higher agreed-on price would not be possible.

Emile Woolf International

143

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Non-collusive oligopolies kinked demand curve

O
h m
ym
h
y m
output policies are dependent on price and output policies of other oligopoly
firms. Although price cartels are formed but existence of these cartels and
collusions in the long run are converted into price war among the oligopoly firms
as there is inside competition among the oligopoly firms and all the firms try to
sell their share. If any of the firms starts losing its share in the total market it tries
to sell its produce secretly at low price.
In short a firm cannot pursue independent strategies. Theory of oligopoly
suggests that, once a price has been determined, it will not change except to
m

h
Example:
The demand curve for price increase is relatively elastic
If an airline raises the price of its tickets from Lahore to Sydney, rivals will not
follow suit and the airline will lose revenue. Rivals have no need to follow suit
because it is to their competitive advantage to keep the original price.
The demand curve for the price decrease is relatively elastic
If an airline drops the price of its tickets from Lahore to Sydney, rivals will
respond by lowering their prices otherwise they would lose market share.
This means that members of a non-collusive oligopoly face a kinked demand
curve as the reaction of competitors to a price change depends on whether price
is increased or decreased.
Illustration: Kinked demand curve

At the starting position the firm supplies Q0 at a price of P0.

Price increase
If the oligopolist raises price above P0 the rivals will maintain their price
in order to make the firm lose customers.
Demand will move along the more elastic portion of the demand curve
to the left of Q0
Price decrease
If the oligopolist cuts price below P0 then rivals will cut price too and
hence there will be little or no increase in demand.
The firm will be forced on to the less elastic portion of its demand curve
to the right of Q0.

Emile Woolf International

144

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Illustration: Kinked demand curve showing marginal revenue curves

The kink in the demand curve leads a discontinuity in the marginal

revenue curve.
Illustration: Kinked demand curve showing marginal revenue and marginal cost
curves

Providing the marginal cost of the firm remains in the region between
MR0 and MR1 the firm will not benefit from changing its price.

Assumptions of kinked demand curve:

There is an established or prevailing market price for the product of the

oligopolistic industry.

Any attempt by one seller to increase sales by reducing price of his product
will trigger other firms will also follow his move and thereby starting Price
War.

If one seller raises price of his product other firms may not follow his price
rise policy.

Emile Woolf International

145

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Advantages of oligopoly

Members of an oligopoly might be able to set prices (though this might be

illegal).

Oligopolists are able to make large profits as there are few players in the
market.

Barriers to entry allow an oligopolist to maintain profits in the long term.

Customers are easily able to make price comparisons among the few
players existing in the market and this may lead to competitive pricing.

Stable prices in the market make planning easier for both the supplier and
the customer.

Disadvantages of Oligopoly

Price setting in an oligopoly might prove disadvantageous to customers.

Innovation of small players in the industry is stifled.

An oligopolist is able to make good profits on an ongoing basis so there may

be no incentive for product improvement.

Oligopolistic industries can suffer from price wars.

4.6 Monopolistic competition

On the other end of the imperfect competition spectrum is monopolistic
competition.
Whilst sounding similar to the previous case, the two are in fact quite different.
Definition: Monopolistic competition
A market structure where many sellers produce similar, but not identical, goods.
Each producer can set price and quantity without affecting the marketplace as a
whole.
Features of monopolistic competition
Monopolistic competition is similar to perfect competition in some ways (number
of buyers and sellers etc); however there are also a number of features that
differ.
A comprehensive list of features is as follows:
Many producers and many consumers
Knowledge is widespread, but not perfect
Non-homogenous products
P

Barriers to entry and exit do exist, but are low

Brand loyalty exists, making demand less sensitive to price
Firms also engage in some form of marketing
Ability to make some supernormal profit

Emile Woolf International

146

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

Examples of monopolistic competition

This is a common market structure in many industries. It is often characterised by
many small business owners who all differentiate in some way. These include:
Hairdressers
Soap powder
Restaurants
Hotels
Consequently, it is a business form that has had much study. The theory was
developed by Joan Robinson (UK) and Edward Chamberlain (USA) in the 1930s.
Graphical representation of monopolistic competition
To see more of the implications of monopolistic competition, we shall next
analyse the following graph depicting the industry in the short run.

Monopolistic Competition: Short Run

Illustration: Monopolistic Competition: Short Run

We begin by assuming that there is a firm in the market that has a dominant
position, perhaps through some innovation of the entrepreneur.
As usual the profit maximising output occurs when marginal revenue equals
marginal cost: MR = MC. Therefore the monopolist produces a level of output at
Q.
In this instance we see that the firm earns supernormal profit represented by the
area, PABC.
An examination of the above diagram can provide insight into the impact that
changes in market conditions would have on a firm of this type.

Emile Woolf International

147

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Increase in

Both the ATC and MC curves would rise.

The point of intersection with the MR curve (i.e. where profit is

maximised) would be further back on the MR curve meaning that
profit is maximised at a higher price and lower output.

The rise in the ATC curve reduces the area of the rectangle PABC
meaning that profit would be reduced.

Increase in consumer income:

Both the MR and AR curves would move to the right.

The point of intersection with the MC curve (i.e. where profit is

maximised) would be higher up the MC curve meaning that profit is
maximised at a higher price and higher output.

The movement of the AR curve increases the area of the rectangle

PABC meaning that profit would be increased.

Monopolistic Competition: Long Run

With near perfect information in the market, other entrepreneurs and firms are
aware that this supernormal profit is being earned.
Attracted to the potential of also earning profit, other firms look to enter the
market. Owing to the low barriers to entry, they are able to compete with the
incumbent.
As more and more firms enter, the average revenue that the firm earns is shifted
to the left. The demand they face has been shifted back due to other substitute
goods.
Consequently, the amount of profit that firms can earn is reduced.
Illustration: Monopolistic Competition: Long Run

Emile Woolf International

148

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 5: Costs, revenues and firms

As the graph shows, the AR curve shifts back to a point whereby no supernormal
profit can be earned by any of the firms.
Should supernormal profit be earned, then this would soon attract new entrants,
who would shift the individual curves back to a point where profit is once again
normal.
Firms will enter until the marginal profit that can be earned is zero.

Monopolistic Competition: Subnormal profit

In some instances subnormal profit exists in a monopolistic competition market.
As the diagram below shows, at a level of output, Q1, the cost of production for
the firm is at C1, and the price in the market is P1.
This means that the firm would be running at subnormal profit (a loss).
The converse of order of events occurs to when the market had supernormal
profits: firms begin exiting the market until the average revenue that the
remaining firms can receive is equitable with the average cost curve.
Illustration: Monopolistic Competition: Subnormal profit

Here the amount of loss that the firm encounters is represented by the rectangle
.
Advantages of monopolistic competition
This style of market has a number of advantages for the economy:
No significant barriers to entry: means that the market is relatively
contestable.
Differentiation increases consumer choice: this will increase the potential
utility to be had by consumers.
More efficient than monopoly: there are arguably less inefficiencies than
with a monopoly.

Emile Woolf International

149

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Disadvantages of monopolistic competition

On the other side of this though, issues do exist for monopolistically competitive
markets:
Differentiation can be unnecessary: if it is just wasteful. Resources spent on
competitive advertising against one another could arguably be spent on other
projects for society.
Price is higher than MC: which is inefficient when compared to perfect
competition.

Emile Woolf International

150

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Macroeconomics: An introduction
Contents
1 Introduction
2 GDP, GNP and NNP
2 Measurement methods
3 Macroeconomic equilibrium

Emile Woolf International

151

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO2

Understand the nature of macro-economics and its relation with the

measurement of economic growth.

LO3.1.1:

Measurement of national income: Define macro- economics and discuss its

scope and limitations

LO3.1.2:

Measurement of national income: Define gross national product, gross

domestic product and net national product

LO3.1.3:

Measurement of national income: Explain the product approach, income

approach and expenditure approach to the measurement of national income

LO3.1.4:

Measurement of national income: Explain circular flow of Income (covered in

more detail in chapter 1)

LO3.1.5:

Measurement of national income: State the difficulties usually faced in

measuring National Income.

Emile Woolf International

152

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

INTRODUCTION
Section overview

Macroeconomics

Introduction to measuring the size of an economy

National income

Difficulties in measuring national income

Difficulties of interpretation

1.1 Macroeconomics
Microeconomics is the study of decisions that people and businesses make
regarding the allocation of resources and prices of goods and services.
Macroeconomics is the study of the behaviour of the economy as a whole.
Definition: Macroeconomics
Macroeconomics is the field of economics that studies the decisions of
individuals, firms and countries in the aggregate (in total).

Governments attempt to manage the national economy to improve the welfare of

the citizens of their country. They achieve this through their macroeconomic
policies.
Most governments have the following macroeconomic objectives which would be
generally expected to be beneficial to the population:

Economic growth: This would increase the wealth of the country and
hopefully the standard of living of the population.

Low price inflation: Most population accept that a certain level of inflation is
desirable (in fact, it is virtually unavoidable if the economy grows) but high
inflation erodes wealth and reduces consumer confidence.

Low unemployment: Unemployment is a waste of resource (as unemployed

people are not contributing to the economy) and can have a high social
cost in terms of poverty that might result from it. Higher employment levels
increases aggregate demand (the total demand in the economy) and
promotes growth.

Equilibrium in the balance of payments: This refers to achieving a balance

between earnings from exports and other inward flows to the economy and
payments for imports and other outward flows from the economy.

Different governments (or different political parties in a country) might disagree

on the relevant importance of each of the above, the priorities for action and the
way in which the objectives might be achieved.
Macroeconomics is concerned with questions like the following:

What causes the economy to grow over time?

What are the key economic indicators that should be tracked to provide
information on the health of the economy and the result of government
action? Following on from the above, these would be:

Emile Woolf International

153

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

the rate of economic growth;

the rate of inflation;

the level of unemployment; and

the balance of payments deficit or surplus.

What causes fluctuations in an economy and how can they be managed?

1.2 Introduction to measuring the size of an economy

A key macroeconomic objective is to achieve growth in the economy.
Governments might instigate policies to encourage such growth. For example:

A government might reduce interest rates. This would reduce borrowing

costs and make it easier for firms to invest in capital projects.

A government might invest in technical education in order to provide a work

force which would allow expansion in certain industries.

It stands to reason that governments must be able to measure the size of the
economy in order to understand whether it is growing and whether its policies are
having an effect.
There are a number of measures which can be used to measure the size of an
economy:

National income

Gross domestic product

Gross national product

Net national product

The above measures are linked to each other (as would be expected as they all
attempt to cast light on the size of an economy).
Other measures of interest include:

Personal income

Disposable personal income

1.3 National income

Definition: national income
National Income is the monetary value of the flow of goods and services
produced by the economy during the year, after indirect taxes
In other words, it is the amount of all products (apples, chairs, computers, hotels,
and T-shirts) that any society produces using its land, labour, physical capital and
human capital. It is equal to the sum of money values of all consumption and
investment goods, along with government purchases.

Emile Woolf International

154

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

1.4 Difficulties in measuring national income

A number of decisions must be made before national income is measured. A
country must decide on:

Which measure (or measures) to use;

Which measurement method (or methods to use);

How to use the information once it is collected and collated.

There are many difficulties associated with the measurement process.

Lack of trained staff: Collection, compilation and analysis of statistical data is a
highly technical exercise and availability of sufficient trained staff is often difficult.
Illiteracy/unreliable record keeping: Due to illiteracy many producers keep
unreliable data of their production.
Inadequate information caused by poor collection procedures. This could include
a poorly designed process, lack of infra-structure to provide the information or
lack of trained staff;
Not all information about the size of an economy is captured:

The process only measures what is defined as legal production. Many

kinds of productive works such as services of housewives, agricultural
products used by farmer for own consumption are ignored.

Barter transactions are either totally ignored or included on the basis of

approximation.

The measurement process overlooks the hidden economy (e.g. income and
trade that is not declared to the authorities) also known as the black
economy or the shadow economy.

Double counting is a problem.

Firms produce goods and supply them to other firms who incorporate them
into new goods. Including the production of every firm double counts the
production of the economy. This is discussed further in section 3 of this
chapter.

Transfer payment: Within an economy, not every transaction that takes

place contributes towards to the level of national output. In some instances,
money is simply moved from one agent to another. An example of this is
social security benefits. Money is transferred from the government to
individuals. The national output remains unaffected by this transaction, and
so it is not calculated in national income calculations.

Income of foreign firms creates a complication in terms of whether to include it in

national income of the country of operation or country of origin.

Emile Woolf International

155

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.5 Difficulties of interpretation

Measures of national income can be used to make:

single country comparisons (e.g. tracing the economic progress of Pakistan

over a period of time); and

international comparisons (e.g. comparing the economic performance of

Pakistan to that of other countries).

Difficulties in making single country comparisons

Inflation distortions

Changes in the price level between years can give the impression of
economic growth when in fact it is inflation.

Overcome by the use of a GDP deflator to reduce current values to real

values in terms of the prices of a chosen base year.

Standard of living is usually measured as national income per capita which

overlooks:

Inequality in the distribution of output between the rich and poor.

The social costs of factors which affect the well-being of others without cost
these are called externalities), for example pollution, stress, crime etc.

Doesnt reflect the different amounts of leisure enjoyed by different

economies

Difficulties in making international comparisons

Problems in using national income figures to compare countries include

differences in classification of activities between countries

Differences in the extent to which they rely on the market to provide

services and goods

Exchange rate distortions harm comparability of figures

Different accounting conventions

Different climates e.g. hot countries spend less on heating and clothing
than cold ones yet their standard of living is unaffected.

Different production priorities: e.g. one country may produce consumer goods
while another may produce capital goods or defence goods. Both will have the
same income though the standards of living will be different.

Emile Woolf International

156

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

GDP, GNP AND NNP

Section overview

Gross Domestic Product (GDP)

Gross National Product (GNP)

Net National Product (NNP)

The link between GDP, GNP and NNP

Other measures of interest to governments

2.1 Gross Domestic Product

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) is the market value of all the products, goods and
services, which are produced within a country during a selected time (commonly
in the countrys financial year).
Formula: Gross domestic product
GDP = C + I + G + (X M)
Where:
C
I

= amount of consumption in the economy

= amount of investment in the economy

= amount of government spending in the economy

= amount of exports from the economy

= amount of imports into the economy

GDP is the aggregate demand in an economy (this is explained in more detail in

section 4 of this chapter).
The circular flow of income (see section 3 of this chapter) implies that the
aggregate demand (AD) = the aggregate supply (AS) in an economy.
In other words the GDP is the total output from all of the sectors of an economy:

Primary sector (agriculture, mining etc.)

Secondary sector (manufacturing and construction; and

Tertiary sector (services)

GDP per capita is often considered an indicator of a country's standard of living,

though it is not a measure of personal income.
GDP does not include services and products that are produced by the nation in
other countries. In other words, GDP measures products only produced inside a
countrys borders.

Emile Woolf International

157

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

2.2 Gross National Product (GNP)

Definition: Gross National Product
A countrys GDP, plus any income earned by residents from overseas
investments, minus income earned by overseas residents within the domestic
economy
In other words, GDP is the production within the geographical confines of a
nation by all residents in that country (whether citizens or non-citizens) and GNP
is the production of the citizens of a country only, wherever they are located.
Example: GDP compared to GNP
A Japanese company has a subsidiary in Pakistan.
The output of the subsidiary would be part of Pakistans GDP and Japans GNP.

2.3 Net National Product (NNP)

There is a further distinction that can be made to the GNP figure that an
economist arrives at. A nations Net National Product (NNP) removes capital
depreciation from the calculation of national income.
This is useful when assessing what effect the change in output has had on
society as a whole.
Example: Net National Product
A firm has an old machine, and so produces a new one to replace it.
A few years later this machine is also replaced.
In GNP terms, there has been an addition of two machines to the nation, and so
the GNP figure will rise accordingly.
However, in that time, two machines have lost value, and are no longer used by
society.
NNP is found by deducting the value of capital depreciation that has occurred (in
this case the two machines that were replaced) from GNP.

2.4 The link between GDP, GNP and NNP

This can be represented as follows:
Illustration: Link between GDP, GNP and NNP
Gross Domestic Product (GDP)
Less: Goods made in the country by foreign citizens

X
(X)

Plus goods made abroad by the countrys citizens

Gross National Product (GNP)

Less: Capital depreciation

(X)

Net National Product (NNP)

Emile Woolf International

158

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

2.5 Other measures of interest to governments

Personal income
Personal income is the aggregate of income received by individuals and
companies that are not corporations.
Definition: Personal income
Income received by individuals and firms that are not classified as corporations.
This means that items such as retained earnings, and corporate income taxes
are deducted from the level of national income. As we remember, national
income takes the net national product and deducts indirect taxes, so this
measure removes retained earnings of corporations, and corporate income
taxes.
Disposable personal income
More deductions are made from personal income, when we consider the next
level of income: disposable personal income.
This is concerned with the actual amount of money that individuals on aggregate
have the ability to spend within an economy.
This is found by removing any payments that individuals must make with the
government.
Definition: Disposable personal income
Personal income minus government obligations
The most obvious obligations that individuals make are taxes, however this
measure also includes fines and other relevant payments.

Emile Woolf International

159

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

MEASUREMENT METHODS
Section overview

Broad approaches

Circular flow of income

Product/output approach

Income approach

Expenditure approach

Conclusion

3.1 Broad approaches

National income: factor cost
One overall approach in measuring national income is based upon the cost of the
factors of production.
From an accounting perspective, this is relatively simple to measure as
information can be extracted from the financial statements of all of the firms in an
economy in order to find the price that was paid for certain goods and services
and attribute that as the cost in production.
This has the added benefit of not taking into account any subsidies or taxes that
might be imposed on the final product. This would skew the measure of national
income, because the taxes and subsidies are not part of the value produced by
the economy.
One of the problems with this approach is that basing the value of a product on
what it costs to produce may be distorted with what somebody is willing to pay for
it at various times.
National income: market price
An alternative is to use the market value of the final product.
The goods that are produced will often have a different value when sold on the
market.
Example:
Firm A produces wooden tables.
The factor price approach (using the costs of factors of production).
Rs.
Wood
Labour
Machinery
Return to entrepreneur

500
1,000
10,000
8,500
20,000

A market price approach would use the price for which the asset was sold.
Sale price Rs.20,000

Emile Woolf International

160

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

3.2 Circular flow of income

There are a number of ways of measuring the national income of a country,
which should theoretically result in the same figure. In practice there are often
imperfections in how it can be measured so several methods are used to get a
better understanding of what the actual number might be.
The basis of the three approaches can be explained in the following diagram.
Illustration: Circular flow of income

The diagram above shows how all three methods should equate to the same
amount, as all of them are showing the same value at different stages within the
economy. For example, all of the expenditure that households have will be equal
to the incomes that firms pay to those households, and the value of the output
that firms produce.
The circle, however, is not wholly continuous. There can be withdrawals and
injections into the flow at various junctures:
Withdrawals include:

Savings: Households save an element of their income thus reducing

consumption.

Taxation: Amounts required by the government reduce households ability

to spend.

Imports: Purchases from abroad result in money leaving the circle.

Injections include:

Investments: This is a form of spending on future output in addition to

expenditure.

Government spending: Funds spent by governments inject money to the

circle.

Exports: Sales to abroad result in an injection to the circle.

Flow of national income Short term and long term

In a national economy there are three withdrawals from and three injections into the
circular flow of national income. Withdrawals from the national income flows are
savings (A), Taxes (T) and Imports (M) and Injections into the circular flow of national
income are. Investment expenditures by firms (I), Government expenditures (G) and
Exports (X).
National income equilibrium is reached not only by the equality of aggregate demand
and aggregate supply but also the planned withdrawals from the flows of national
income must also be equal to planned injections into the circular flow of national
income i.e. withdrawals = Injections or S + T + M = I + G + X.

Emile Woolf International

161

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

(a)

Any difference in the balance of payments deficit or surplus is equal to the

long values of import payments (M) and export receipts (X) of goods and
services long. In the short run this difference is filled by borrowings or lendings
from or to abroad.

(b)

The difference between public expenditure and public revenue can be filled by
public sector borrowing requirements (PSBR) and public sector debt
repayments (PSDR).

(c)

Although people who save and invest are different even then in the long run
savings are made equal to investment through capital market.

(d)

Lord Keynes explained the difference between planned withdrawals and

planned injections in terms of trade cycles.

3.3 Product/ output approach

This method finds National Income by adding the net values of all production
that has taken place in all sectors during a given period.
The net values of production of all the industries and sectors of the economy plus
the net income from abroad give us the Gross National Product (GNP).
Subtracting the total amount of deprecation of the assets used in production,
from the figure of GNP, gives National Income.
This approach measures the output from an economy.
Definition: Product approach
The total value of final goods and services produced during the year.
The term final goods and services relates to those that are consumed. It does
not include components or capital goods which are termed intermediate goods.
Example: Bread
In measuring the value of bread in an economy, one could measure the product
value of the grain (Rs.50/kg), then the flour (Rs.75/kg), then the final loaf of
bread (Rs.100/kg).
When calculating all the output, an economist could add up the value of the
farmers product (grain), and then the millers product (flour), and then the
bakers product (bread).
Doing so would have the value of the product as Rs.225/kg for bread, however
this means the value of the products has been double counted, as the final
value is only Rs.100/kg.
The value of the bakers work is taking flour, and turning it into bread. The miller
takes the grain from the farmer and turns it into flour. If we count the value of the
bread, this already takes into account the value of the farmer and the miller, and
prevents double counting.
Difficulties associated with the output method
Double counting: The outputs of some firms become inputs of others. For
example, the output from a factory making electrical components will be used as
inputs in the motor industry. If the total value of both industries' output were
included in the aggregate then the value of the components used in the motor
industry would be included twice.
To avoid this problem only the value added at each stage of production is added.

Emile Woolf International

162

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

3.4 Income approach

Definition: Income approach
The total value of all the incomes earned from producing goods and services
during the year.
This method measures the National Income after it has been distributed and
appears as income earned or received by individuals of the country.
This method estimates National Income by adding up the rent of land, wages of
employees, interest and profit on capital and income of self-employed people.
Illustration: Income approach
Rs.
Income from people in employment

Income from people in self-employment

Profits of private sector businesses

Rent income from the ownership of land

X
X

These incomes will equal the total value added in the process of making the
product. Returning to the bread example above, this would involve adding
together the incomes earned in the process of making a loaf of bread, by the
farmer, miller and baker.
The calculation does not include:

Transfer Payments (e.g. state pension, unemployment benefits and other

social payments) which are ignored to avoid double counting the income:

when the original household earns it prior to it being taxed

when the household receiving the transfer payment receives it from

the government.

Income gained from stock appreciation. This is due to inflation and not a
rise in output.

Private transfers of cash from one person to another.

Income not declared to the tax authorities (the black or shadow

economy).

Activity such as subsistence farming and barter transactions.

Difficulties associated with the income method

Double counting also becomes a problem when using the income method. The
sum of all factor incomes is not the same as the sum of all personal incomes as
these also include transfer incomes, which are subsistence payments for no
actual productive process.
These payments are purely transfers from tax payers who provide the money to
other persons such as the unemployed or disabled and thus should not be
included twice as two forms of income.

Emile Woolf International

163

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Another major problem is that of self-provided services. Some goods and

services are not actually traded through the market sector and are not therefore
included as part of the aggregate output figure although they do form part of the
country's output. Examples include repair and improvement work done on a DIY
basis or housework carried out at home. There is no market measurement of the
value of the output and thus it is not included. In some cases an imputed value is
used for instance the value of owner occupied housing where the market rents of
similar properties are used as guidelines.
A problem using the income method is the non-distribution of some factor
incomes to factors of production. Companies as well as the government may
retain profits and surpluses and thus an allowance has to be made in the national
income figures to account for these undistributed amounts.

3.5 Expenditure approach

The expenditure approach involves counting the expenditure in the economy on
goods and service, by different groups of people.
These groups were identified in the original definition of GDP as Consumption,
Investment, Government Spending, Exports and Imports.
Definition: Expenditure approach
The total value of expenditure on purchasing final goods and services during the
year.
This is measured by adding up the expenditure that has happened in the country,
and includes: household consumption, government expenditure on consumables,
export demand.
Example: GDP of a Country A
Rs
(millions)
Personal consumption (C)
Durable goods
Nondurable good
Services
Gross private domestic investment (I)
Non-residential
Residential
Change in business inventories
Gross private domestic investment (I)
Government consumption and gross
investment (G)
Net Exports (X-M)
Exports (X)
Imports (M)
Total GDP

Emile Woolf International

164

Percentage
of GDP

500
2,500
2,000
5,000

6.25
31.25
25.00
62.50

1,100
395
5
1,500

13.75
4.94
0.06
18.75

2,000

25.00

1,000
1,500

12.5
18.75

-500
8,000

-6.25
100

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

The above figures show that Personal Consumption accounts for the largest
portion of GDP with Government Spending as the second largest component of
the economy.
Note that social security spending (i.e. paying benefits to disadvantaged
members of society) does not feature because it is a transfer payment. It is
counted in the Personal Consumption part of the calculation, rather than
Government Spending.
Investment Spending is categorised into different types (I and G) and Net Exports
simply aggregates the outflows and inflows of the countrys trading.
Difficulties associated with the expenditure method
The main warnings that should be made with this approach is that something
only gets counted if it is sold. A lot of production occurs without a transaction
taking place (i.e. home cleaning, Do-It-Yourself home repairs). If there is a trend
away from this activity, to one where people employ others to do this, then a
large increase in GDP will be calculated, however the actual output wont be as
significant.
Figures are distorted by indirect taxes and subsidies for which an adjustment
must be made. Indirect taxes increase the total expenditure on goods and
services compared to the amount received by the factors of production and vice
versa for subsidies. The expenditure total is therefore adjusted to factor cost by
deducting indirect taxes and adding back subsidies.
Further adjustments are necessary for changes in stock levels, for exports net of
imports and an allowance for depreciation to allow for the capital used up in the
production process.
General precautions for all measures of GDP
It should be noted that there are points that are affected by all three measures to
GDP that we can consider.
For example, it takes no account for quality of life of the citizens in an economy. It
may mean that they have higher material wealth on the whole, however things
that count towards the happiness of society are not considered.
Example:
The country of Burma has been considered the happiest country in the world via
measures of Gross National Happiness, however in terms of GDP is only 122 nd in
the world.
In addition, there is the added problem of accuracy of the figures which affects all
three measurements.

Emile Woolf International

165

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.6 Conclusion
The above methods all agree on the figure for Gross Domestic Product.
The table below explains how this figure can be converted from GDP, to GNP,
and finally into a value for Net National Income.
Illustration:

Definition: Capital Consumption

An imputed charge for the depreciation of the nations capital stock and
infrastructure during the year
All three measures offer a different insight into the state of the economy, and
should be used in conjunction with each other to fully appreciate how the nation
is performing.

Emile Woolf International

166

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

MACROECONOMIC EQUILIBRIUM
Section overview

General introduction

Aggregate supply

Aggregate demand

Equilibrium of AS and AD

Output gap

Inflationary gap

Deflationary gap

4.1 General introduction

Now that we have been introduced to the fundamentals of how to measure the
performance of the macroeconomy, we shall look at how this can be used for
broader analysis.
This will require us to briefly touch upon points regarding how the macroeconomy
interacts, and some of the broader concepts that exist within the field.

4.2 Aggregate supply

The first important measure that we will learn is aggregate supply. Similar in
concept to national income, it measures the volume of goods and services within
an economy.
Definition: Aggregate supply
The total supply of goods and services produced within an economy at a given
overall price level, in a given time period.
This is represented through an aggregate supply curve, which shows the
relationship between the price level and quantity of output that firms are willing to
supply. As with regular supply, the relationship between aggregate supply and
price is often a positive one, meaning that at a higher price level firms are willing
to produce more.
One thing to note here though is that the shape and behaviour of the aggregate
supply curve is of debate amongst economists. First we shall present the theories
of neo-classical economists, and second, the view of Keynesians (named after
the seminal economist John Maynard Keynes).
Short Run Aggregate Supply (SRAS)
As with other concepts in economics, our analysis of aggregate supply differs in
the short run and long run. This, as we found before, has to do with the flexibility
of factors, and the potential output that they can yield.
In the short run, the aggregate supply curve slopes upwards, as a regular supply
curve does.

Emile Woolf International

167

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

Higher prices in the economy lead to an expansion of aggregate supply in the

short run.
The level of aggregate supply is determined by supply side performance of an
economy. It is a reflection of the productive capacity within an economy, as well
as the costs of production in each sector.
Shifts in the SRAS curve
The SRAS curve will move around for a number of reasons, rather than just
remaining static. As we know from earlier sections of the text, there are
exogenous factors that are likely to cause a shift in a curve. Below is a diagram
of an SRAS curve shifting, and then reasons that may cause it.
Illustration:

The shift from

price level

to

shows an increase in aggregate supply at each

The shift from

level

to

shows a fall in aggregate supply at each price

Emile Woolf International

168

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

What causes the shift forwards or backwards in short run aggregate supply?

Change in factor productivity of both labour and capital

Change in size and quality of capital stock, through investment

Change in size and quality of the labour force

Change in unit cost of labour (i.e. wages)

Change in producer taxes or subsidies

Change in inflationary expectations (e.g. causing a rise in inflation, and a

rise in wages, causing supply to shift inwards)

When aggregate supply is considered in the long run however, the shape of the
curve changes, which we shall cover now.
Long Run Aggregate Supply (LRAS)
From what we know previously about supply in the short and long run, it is
unsurprising that the slopes of the curves changes.
In the short run, supply changes to the price level, as the factors of production
are adjusted to enable the most efficient use of resources.
In the long run however, it is assumed that supply stays independent of the price
level. It is determined by the overall productivity of the resources in the economy.
Another way of viewing this is that LRAS represents the productive potential of
the economy. If all resources were at their most productive; that is the level of
output that could be achieved.
Shifts in LRAS are therefore factors that affect the level of this potential.
Because it is independent of the price level, and signifies the upper limit of the
capacity in the economy, the curve is a vertical line.
Illustration:

In the short run, producers respond to a price increase by increasing quantity

In the long run however, aggregate supply is assumed to be independent of price,
and is therefore vertical.

Emile Woolf International

169

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

By its nature, it is assumed that the LRAS curve doesnt fluctuate too greatly.
Instead, if there are significant, permanent changes to the productive potential of
the economy, then this will lead to a shift.
These factors would be permanent changes to the SRAS factors that are
discussed above.
Illustration:

An increase in the quantity and productivity of the factors of production, or an

advance in technological capabilities in the economy would cause an increase in
the productive potential.
This is shown as the shift outward of the LRAS curve
Keynesian aggregate supply curve
From this approach to aggregate supply, we now turn our attentions to how
Keynesian economists view the aggregate supply curve.
Keynes still viewed the macro economy in terms of price level and real output,
however he saw no distinction between the short run and the long run.
Keynesians still believe that when the economy reaches its productive potential,
the A curve will be vertical. However, when the economy isnt at full output, they
believe that the A curve will be flatter, because any resources arent being fully
utilised.
If there are underutilised resources, then as output increases, this wont put
pressure on the price level, instead the economy will just use up spare capacity.
It is only once the economy approaches its production potential will firms begin
having the power to influence prices upwards.

Emile Woolf International

170

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

Keynesian diagram of aggregate supply

Illustration:

Here we see that as output increases, the price level at which firms will supply, in
aggregate, begins to increase. However only once the full employment level is
approached.
The point where the AS curve goes vertical is also known as the level of full
employment.
Definition: full employment
The point at which all factors of production are fully utilised in an economy.
This is where, without cause to shift to the curve outwards, it would not be
possible to increase output beyond what was possible.

4.3 Aggregate demand

Aggregate demand is equally as important to the understanding of
macroeconomics as aggregate supply is. Just as aggregate supply is the
collective of what all firms have produced within an economy, aggregate demand
is what has been consumed.
Definition: Aggregate demand
The total amount of goods and services demanded within an economy at a given
overall price level, and in a given time period.
This is represented through an aggregate demand curve, which shows the
relationship between the price level and quantity of output that agents are willing
to spend. As with regular demand, the relationship between aggregate demand
and price is often a negative one, meaning that at a higher price level households
are willing to consume less.

Emile Woolf International

171

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Components of aggregate demand

The factors that make up AD will be recognisable from earlier sections in this
chapter on GDP. The reason for the similarity is that AD is a measure of all that is
demanded within an economy, and so is equivalent to the expenditure amount.
Recalling, it is made up of:

C: consumer expenditure on goods and services

I: Investment spending

G: Government spending

(X-M): the net difference between exports and imports in the economy.

AD curve
To better understand the aggregate demand relationship, we shall draw a curve
representing it below:
Illustration:

The y-axis represents the price level of all final goods and services in the
economy. On the x-axis is the Real National Output.
We see that the AD curve is downward sloping, meaning that as the price level
decreases, the level of demand in the economy increases.
Shifts in the AD curve
As with other graphs, a shift in the AD curve is not caused by a change in the
price level. Instead, it is by some exogenous factor.

Emile Woolf International

172

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

Illustration:

AD to AD is an increase in aggregate demand, and AD to AD is a decrease in

aggregate demand
Some reasons for this shift in aggregate demand will be due to a change in any
of the component parts of the equation. The following would cause a shift out of
the AD curve:

Consumers have more income and begin spending more in the economy

Firms have a wave of optimism and begin in investment in projects

Government decides to spend more on infrastructure projects

Exports become more attractive to foreign firms

Imports become less desirable for domestic firms

Effective demand
Though we have looked at aggregate demand as an overarching concept, there
are in fact distinctions that can be made, and more detail that can be gone into.
The first of these is effective demand, a key idea proposed by economist John
Maynard Keynes.
Definition: Effective demand
Actual expenditure in an economy is based on existing/ actual income, rather
than if the economy was at its productive potential (when all resources are fully
utilised).
This asserts that agents in an economy will only make expenditures with a
percentage of their income, rather than an assumption that if the economy is in
the long run, all income could possibly be used to fuel aggregate demand.
More discussion on Keynes theories of consumption and income will be found in
the following chapter.

Emile Woolf International

173

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

4.4 Equilibrium of AS and AD

Now that we have been introduced to aggregate supply and aggregate demand,
we will see how these two will interact.
For this, we shall use the neo-classical approach to aggregate supply, and the
aggregate demand.
Illustration:

The macroeconomy is in equilibrium at the point where SRAS (value of output

produced within an economy) is equal to AD (level of demand for goods and
services).
The reason it is not the LRAS is that this is the productive potential in the
economy. SRAS is what is actually being supplied in the macroeconomy, and is
therefore what equilibrium should be based upon.
If the general price level is above the equilibrium point, then firms will persistently
find that their stock levels are being unsold. This then indicates that they should
cut back on further production, to reduce the level of inventory.
If, however, the general price level is below the equilibrium point, then demand
will outstrip supply, stocks will quickly become run down, thus signalling to
producers that they should increase supply.
These mechanisms ensure that the macroeconomy is restored to equilibrium.
Changes in aggregate demand
We have seen what effects a shift in AD will have when looking solely at the AD
curve.
Here though, we shall see how it affects the equilibrium of national income:

Emile Woolf International

174

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

Illustration:

We see that an increase in aggregate demand (shift in the curve) causes an

expansion of aggregate supply (movement along curve) leading to a new
equilibrium at a higher level of national income.
In the process, this causes an increase in the price level within the economy.
Changes in short run aggregate supply
The change in conditions of aggregate supply is also something that will bring
about a new equilibrium in the macroeconomy.
Illustration:

An increase in aggregate supply leads to an expansion along the AD curve

Here, the rise in supply (perhaps caused through a fall in production costs) has
led to aggregate demand meeting it at a lower price level, thus increasing
national output.

Emile Woolf International

175

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Changes in both AD and SRAS

There are scenarios where both aggregate demand and short run aggregate
supply are shifted. Depending upon the magnitude, this can have an interesting
effect on where the equilibrium point resettles.
Illustration:

Here, we can suppose that there has been a rise in the cost of imported raw
materials.
This leads to a decrease in the level of aggregate demand, and also a decrease in
short run aggregate supply as the cost of production increases for firms.
As a result, we see how the equilibrium in the economy shifts back to point C.
Another scenario is where there is a rise in aggregate demand, perhaps caused
by an increase in government spending, and also a decrease in the short run
aggregate supply (caused by a rise in wage costs).
Illustration:

The rise in aggregate demand takes equilibrium from A to B, and the rising wage
costs shift the short run aggregate supply curve back from B to C.

Emile Woolf International

176

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

These two effects, in this instance, have cancelled each other out, meaning that
the equilibrium level of output has been returned to Ya.
However, notice also what has happened to the general price level in this case.

4.5 Output gap

The difference between the actual output of an economy and the production
potential of an economy is known as the output gap.
Definition: Output gap
The difference between potential GDP and actual output in an economy.
There can be both negative and positive output gaps.
Negative gaps are when an economy is performing below its potential, and
positive gaps are when it is above its potential.
The two scenarios are both important concepts, and we shall explore them
further in the subsequent sections.

4.6 Inflationary gap

When the equilibrium in the macroeconomy is beyond the productive potential, it
is said that there is an inflationary gap.
Example:
How can the economy be beyond its productive potential?
Whilst this might seem counterintuitive, it is possible.
It is expected in the future, and so arises when expected expenditure will not
equal consumption at a future date in time.
This is not sustainable, without a long term shift in the LRAS.
It can be thought of as an excess in planned expenditure in an economy.
On a diagram, this scenario looks like follows:
Illustration:

SRAS and AD joining at the point Ye is beyond the LRAS

Emile Woolf International

177

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

To understand this concept more requires knowledge of the rise in the general
price level. This is just a brief explanation. There is more detail on inflation in later
chapters.
Definition: inflation
A continuous or persistent rise in general price level.
The movement of equilibriums in the macroeconomy can be better represented in
the diagram below.
Illustration:

There is an increase in AD, and then a shift back in SRAS

Beyond the LRAS a shift in AD caused by an increase in government spending,

results in the equilibrium in the economy moving from A to B. This increases the
price level from P1 to P2 because if demand increases, consumers in the
aggregate are willing to pay a higher price for goods.
When the equilibrium is at B, this is unsustainable. To produce that much output
would mean that there is a shortage of labour. In the long run, this will mean
wages will increase, causing a rise in the level of SRAS.
This takes the economy from B to C. In doing so, the price level increases from
P2 to P3.
This is important to note: a price rise does not equate to inflation.
However, persistent price rises (i.e. two or more) is the definition of the start of
inflation.
This therefore means that whenever output is beyond the LRAS, there is a
tendency for inflation to occur. Therefore, it is known as the inflationary gap.

Emile Woolf International

178

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 6: Macroeconomics: An introduction

4.7 Deflationary gap

Conversely the deflationary (or recessionary) gap exists when the equilibrium in
the economy is less than the production potential.
Graphically, it will look like the following:
Illustration:

The distance between Y and Ye is what constitutes the deflation gap, as the
price level is below what it would be with full employment in the economy. The
equilibrium price level is also below the full employment price level.
When no inflationary or deflationary gap exists this is called ideal equilibrium.

Emile Woolf International

179

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

180

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Consumption, savings
and investment
Contents
1 Consumption and saving
2 Investment

Emile Woolf International

181

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO2

Understand the nature of nature of macro-economics and its relation

with the measurement of economic growth.

LO3.2.1:

Consumption, saving and investment functions: Understand the meaning of

consumption and saving and its relationship with the income

LO3.2.2:

Consumption, saving and investment functions: Identify how Keynes

Psychological law of consumption explains the relationship between
consumption and income with the help of average propensity to consume and
marginal propensity to consume curves

LO3.2.3:

Consumption, saving and investment functions: Understand the determinants

of the consumption function

LO3.2.4:

Consumption, saving and investment functions: Understand the stability of

consumption and saving functions in the short run and discuss the reasons
thereof

LO3.2.5:

Consumption, saving and investment functions: Understand the meaning of

investment, induced investment and autonomous investment

LO3.2.6:

Consumption, saving and investment functions: Explain the relationship of

investment with marginal efficiency of capital and interest rate.

LO3.3.1:

Marginal propensity to consume and save: Discuss the marginal propensity to

consume and save

Emile Woolf International

182

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

CONSUMPTION AND SAVING

Section overview

Introduction

Keynes Psychological Law

Determinants of the consumption function

Keynesian analysis of consumption

Propensity to consume and propensity to save

Stability of consumption function

1.1 Introduction
This chapter provides further information on the wider measures for GDP and
National Income, and gives more detail on some of the component parts of the
macroeconomy.
The fundamentals of aggregate demand are based upon the levels of
consumption and investment. It is useful to understand how these component
parts are made up.
This analysis is made up by layering different theories on top of each other, and
so it makes sense to become comfortable at each stage before progressing to
the next. The way in which they are calculated might at first seem complicated. If
at any stage you become confused, you should go back over the earlier steps.
In analysing the consumption function, it is important to first assess its
interconnectedness with saving and income.
Consumption
Each household has an income, with which it can choose either to spend on
goods and services immediately (i.e. consume), or to choose to not spend it in
the current period (i.e. save).
This leads us to a definition of consumption as follows:
Definition: Consumption
Total spendings made by the household sector at a given level of income is called
consumption.
We then define the functional relationship between consumption and level of
income as the consumption function.
This relationship is as follows:
Definition:
Consumption = Income Savings
and therefore:
Income = Consumption + Savings
Consumption and savings are interrelated. Since we have established the
meaning of consumption, we shall do the same for savings.

Emile Woolf International

183

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Definition: Savings
The income remaining from the household sector after all consumption has taken
place.
We then define the functional relationship between savings and the level of
income as the savings function. As we shall see, keeping in mind that
consumption and savings together make up income means that we will often see
what is happening to one, is the reverse of the other.
This will become evident as we move through the chapter.

1.2 Keynes Psychological Law

Keynes observed the actions of a wide range of society, and developed a law to
encapsulate their behaviour. He then constructed an economic model based on
the collective behaviour.
The law deals with households in the aggregate. In other words, it applies to the
macroeconomy, rather than individuals per se.
Definition: Keynes Psychological Law
People increase their consumption as their income increases, but not by as much
as their income increases.
There are 3 propositions that we can infer from this law:
Aggregate consumption can increase due to increased aggregate income, but
the increase in aggregate consumption will be less than the increase in income.
This is because as basic necessities are fulfilled, people begin to save additional
income, hence savings increase.
What isnt spent on consumption is saved.
The increase in income will lead to increased consumption or savings. It is not
possible for an increase in income to lead to a decrease in consumption and
savings.

1.3 Determinants of the consumption function

The consumption function refers to a list of variables that influence consumption.
The main determinants in the consumption function are as follows:
Real income: as we will see in the next section, this plays an important role
in how much one is able to consume. This is the key factor.
Distribution of wealth: if it is unequal, more of the income is in the hands of
rich people with a lower propensity to consume. A more equal distribution
increases consumption
Expectations of price changes: if prices are expected to rise, then the
population will move to spend their income quicker in the present, hence
increasing consumption
Changes in Fiscal Policy: if low income households are taxed more, then
overall consumption decreases
Changes in Interest Rates: as interest rates increase, it usually decreases
the amount of disposable income (by increasing mortgage repayments etc.)
and thus reduces consumption

Emile Woolf International

184

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

1.4 Keynesian analysis of consumption

John Maynard Keynes was an eminent economist who looked at the relationship
between income, savings and consumption in more detail during the 1930s and
1940s.
His ideas about the consumption function are extremely important in
understanding the make-up, and features of the macroeconomy.
He claimed that current real disposable income is the most important determinant
of consumption in the short run. (Real income is money income adjusted for
inflation. It is a measure of the quantity of goods and services that consumers
can buy with their income).He proposed a mathematical formula as follows:
Formula: Keynesian theory of consumption
C =a + bY
Where:
C = consumer spending
a=

autonomous spending
This is the level of consumption that would take place even if
income was zero.
If an individual's income fell to zero some of his existing spending
could be sustained by using savings (or by borrowing).

b=

the marginal propensity to consume

This is the change in consumption divided by the change in
income.
It is the percentage of each additional rupee earned that will be
spent.

Y=

real disposable income

This implies that consumer spending will occur even if real disposable income is
zero, as there are basic necessities that all households have to consume.
The extra consumption resulting from an increase in income is called induced
consumption. Thus, consumption at a given level of income is made up of
autonomous spending plus the induced spending the amount of which depends
on the marginal propensity to consume).

Emile Woolf International

185

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

The Keynesian consumption function shown above is an equation of a straight

line which describes a positive relationship between disposable income (Y) and
consumer spending (C). It follows that an increase in income leads to an increase
in total consumer demand.
The gradient of the consumption curve is the marginal propensity to consume.
Illustration:

This model suggests that as income rises, consumer spending will rise. However,
spending will increase at a lower rate than income.
People with low incomes have a higher average propensity to spend. People with
low incomes will spend a high proportion of their income. Such people cannot
afford the luxury of saving and must spend everything on consumption.
People with high incomes have a lower average propensity to spend. As incomes
rise, people can afford to save a higher proportion of their income. Therefore, as
income rise, spending increases at a lower rate than disposable income.
Implication
A transfer of money from high-income households to low-income households will
lead to an increase in the overall level of consumption in the economy. This can
be achieved by lowering taxes for lower income groups but increasing them for
the higher earners.

Emile Woolf International

186

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

Shifts in the consumption curve

Changes in some variables (other than real disposable income) can shift the
curve.
For example, a change in interest rates, consumer confidence might lead to a
change in consumption spending at each level of income.
In the following diagram, the consumption function has shifted to the left. (C1 to
C2). This means consumers are spending a larger percentage of their income.
This could be due to positive forecasts about economic prospects increasing
consumer confidence.
Illustration: Shifts in the consumption curve

Emile Woolf International

187

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Changes in marginal propensity to consume

This refers to a change in gradient of the consumption curve. In the following
diagram the curve has become steeper. This means that people are spending a
higher percentage of their income. This might be due to increased confidence or
easier availability of credit.
Illustration: Changes in marginal propensity to consume

Savings function
A graph of the savings function can be derived from that of the consumption
function.
Illustration: Savings function

Savings begin at the point when the consumption moves above the 45 degree
line (i.e. point A above).

Emile Woolf International

188

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

1.5 Propensity to consume and propensity to save

The propensity to consume refers to how the level of consumption changes with
an increase in income. As with other concepts of this nature, it is necessary to
analyse both the marginal propensity to consume and average propensity to
consume.
The formal expressions are as follows:
Definitions
P

change in consumption
change in income

total spend on consumption

total income

The same equations can also be adapted for the marginal and average
propensities to save. Following from the assumption that income is either saved
or consumed, we can introduce other identities which hold true:
Definitions
P

change in consumption
change in income

change in savings
change in income

P
P

Another way of viewing this is that the marginal propensity to consume (MPC)
and marginal propensity to save (MPS) are both positive, but less than unity.
Example:
Income increases by Rs.10,000: Rs.7,000 is spent on consuming goods, and

. and the MPS is

Rs.3,000 is saved. The MPC is

Together: .

Emile Woolf International

. .

189

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.6 Stability of consumption function

When looking at the stability of the consumption function, it is necessary to view it
in both the short and long run.
As income rises, a household will (as a percentage of total income) spend less,
and save more, meaning that over time, the APC will decrease (and thereby not
remain constant).
As income rises the MPC does not change (until higher levels when it tends to
decline).
Example: Stability of consumption functionx
Income
0

Consumption
1

APC

MPC

1
2

1.6
2.2

1.60
1.10

0.6
0.6

2.8

0.93

0.6

3.4

0.85

0.6

5
6

4
4.6

0.80
0.77

0.6
0.6

5.2

0.74

0.6

5.8

0.73

0.6

6.4

0.71

0.6

10

0.70

0.6

Calculation of the marginal propensity to

consume
Income increases from 0 to 1

Income increases from 6 to 7

Emile Woolf International

190

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

INVESTMENT
Section overview

Introduction

Autonomous investment

Induced investment

Interest rates and investment

Government means of influencing investment

Impact of change in interest rate

2.1 Introduction
Another important aspect in building up our model of the macroeconomy is
investment. The simplest explanation of investment is:
Definition: Investment
An asset, item, or project that is purchased with the hope of generating future
income.
Naturally though, with such a broad definition, there are distinctions that can be
made. Identifying and explaining these divisions will give us a greater
appreciation of the types of investment that exist within the macroeconomy.

2.2 Autonomous investment

This type of investment is independent of the level of income and aggregate
demand, and can be shown in the illustration below.
Definition: Autonomous investment
Investment that is motivated by the wellbeing to society that it delivers.

Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

191

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

This type of investment is also independent of the profit it may bring, as it is not
carried out for that purpose.
This type of investment is ordinarily undertaken by public bodies, or private
organisations not pursuing profit
Examples of autonomous investment include: construction of highways, street
lighting and other infrastructure projects.

2.3 Induced investment

Conversely, investment that is dependent on the level of income is known as
induced investment.
Definition: Induced investment
Investment that is motivated by the margin of profit that it delivers.
This can be presented in the following, representative illustration:
Illustration:

The greater the margin, the more will be invested until the economic gains no
longer outweigh the costs.
This type of investment is associated with private enterprise in pursuit of
maximising profit.
Examples of this include: improvements to machinery, human capital (i.e. staff
training that will generate an economic return) and new assets.

2.4 Interest rates and investment

For the purpose of our analysis, we will be considering induced investment of the
private, profit maximising firm.
The interest rate at which firms can borrow is an important factor to consider. A
change in interest rates should affect the level of investment in the private sector
of the economy.
Keynes stated that the two factors that determined the level of investment in an
economy were:

Marginal Efficiency of Capital

Market rate of interest

Emile Woolf International

192

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

These two concepts are considered further below.

Definition: Marginal efficiency of capital (MEC)
The rate of discount which makes the present value of the prospective yield from
the capital asset equal to its supply price.

Definition: Market rate of interest

The rate at which a firm or household must pay for funds in the present, which
will be paid back in the future. This rate is expressed as a percentage of the
principal.
This then leads us to seeing an example of how the two interact.
Example:
A fall in interest rates should decrease the cost of investment relative to the
potential yield that the investment might bring, thereby increasing the likelihood
that investment will occur.
Firms will invest if the discounted yield (i.e. the benefit) exceeds the cost of the
project.
The inverse relationship between the rate of interest, and the level of investment
can be summarised as a Marginal Efficiency of Capital curve.
Illustration: Marginal Efficiency of Capital

The MEC schedule shows the total level of investment which will take place in
the economy at each level of the interest rate.
At interest rate project I is marginally efficient i.e. has a net present value of 0
(or its internal rate of return equals ). All points to the left of the MEC have a
positive NPV.

Emile Woolf International

193

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

If the interest rate falls to r1 then further projects become profitable up to project I1
which is marginally efficient.

Factors that affect investment and MEC

The MEC can shift outwards (to MEC1) if the expected rate of return increases.
There are a number of reasons that could cause this:
Short Run factors

Demand for the good: If demand is expected to grow or costs to fall, then
entrepreneurs are likely to expect a better return, and therefore would look
to invest. Converse is true for falling demand and higher costs.

Change in income: If entrepreneurs receive a sizeable increase in income,

perhaps through a tax concession or similar, then there will be more
opportunity to invest.

Liquid assets: If the assets an entrepreneur holds are liquid (i.e. can easily
be sold for cash) then it might be possible for more investment.

Current rate of investment: If there has already been significant

investment in an industry, then the marginal returns to more investment
may be negligible, which might mean marginal efficiency of capital will be
lower.

Change in sentiment: If businessmen are optimistic over the future

economic climate, it may be that MEC is overestimated, and will therefore
be higher.

Long Run factors

There are also other factors which will have less of a direct influence on MEC
and investment, but might contribute to trends in the level of investment.

Population growth: If the rate of population growth is increasing

dramatically, then this will serve to boost future demand for goods, and thus
encourage investment.

Technological development: If there is an increase in the capabilities of

an industry, then this may encourage investment. Further, if one industry is
experiencing technological advancements (say, the automobile industry)
then ancillary industries (e.g. steel, rubber) may also experience a boost in
investment to catch up.

Quantity of capital goods already in existence: If many substitute goods

exist already, then it is less advantageous to invest, as the MEC will be less
in that industry.

Tax rates: Anything that serves to reduce the profitability of venture will
reduce the MEC. Taxes on inputs, or other parts of the process will do just
this.

Emile Woolf International

194

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 7: Consumption, savings and investment

2.5 Government means of influencing investment

The government can influence the level of private investment in several ways:

Control interest rates: By keeping interest rates low, for example, the
government might encourage a higher volume of investments, whereas by
allowing interest rates to rise, the government would probably cause the
volume of investment to fall. Government can influence interest rates.

Provide direct encouragement to investing firms: By offering

investment grants, perhaps directed at particular regions, by lowering the
cost of investment i.e. cost of doing business, by improving the rule of law,
by providing tax incentives etc.

Seek to stimulate business confidence: By developing and announcing

an economic policy for continued growth which should be consistent with
the stated goals. Frequent and sudden changes in economic policy results
in loss of business confidence.

Encourage technological developments: By financing research schemes

of its own as well as those of private firms. In the long run, investment in
education might be significant for the strength of innovative research and
development by the count ys indust ies.

Influencing the volume of consumption: Sometimes the government

indirectly influence the level of investment, for instance a policy to control
the growth in the money supply, would help in credit control and would in
turn affect consumer spending, especially in consumer durable goods.
Changes in consumption affects investment levels, with the influence of the
accelerator.

Government spending: Higher government spending in infrastructure

cerates demand which stimulates investment by the private sector.

Emile Woolf International

195

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

2.6 Impact of change in interest rates

Increase in interest rates
An increase in interest rates will discourage investment as it would be more
difficult for firms to earn an adequate return on projects. (However, it might
encourage people to save, thus resulting in availability of more funds for
investment which would put downward pressure on interest rates).
Consumption would fall for a number of reasons:

High interest rates encourage people to save. This would put a downward
pressure on consumption.

High interest rates would result in lower disposable income for those people
with loans and mortgages.

High interest rates make it more expensive to borrow. This would reduce
consumption.

The opposite would hold for a fall in interest rates

Decrease in interest rates
A decrease in interest rates would encourage investment as it would be easier for
firms to earn an adequate return on projects. (However, it might discourage
saving, thus resulting in a reduction in funds available for investment which would
put upward pressure on interest rates).
Consumption would rise for a number of reasons:

Low interest rates discourage saving.

Low interest rates result in higher disposable income for those people with
loans and mortgages.

High interest rates make it less expensive to borrow. This would increase
consumption.

Emile Woolf International

196

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

Multiplier and accelerator

Contents
1 Introduction
2 Determining output
3 Multiplier model
4 Accelerator model
5 Interaction of multiplier and accelerator

Emile Woolf International

197

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO2

Understand the nature of nature of macro-economics and its relation

with the measurement of economic growth.

LO3.4.1

Multiplier and accelerator: Comprehend the effect of the multiplier on the level
of national income

LO3.4.2

Multiplier and accelerator: Understand the assumptions and limitations of the

multiplier concepts

LO3.4.3

Multiplier and accelerator: Comprehend the principle of acceleration of derived

demand

LO3.4.4

Multiplier and accelerator: Understand how the multiplier and accelerator

interact

Emile Woolf International

198

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

INTRODUCTION
Section overview

General

1.1 General
Now that we are aware of how consumption, investment and savings interact, we
look now to what effects this has on output in the economy.
We learnt in the Macroeconomics Introduction that output in the economy is
determined when the Short Run Aggregate Supply (SRAS) curve meets the
aggregate demand (AD) curve.
In the previous chapter, we found out more about the interaction of consumption,
investment, and savings, and so will now apply this to two new phenomena: the
multiplier and accelerator.

Emile Woolf International

199

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

DETERMINING OUTPUT
Section overview

Introduction

Consumption and savings schedules

Savings and investment schedules

Consumption and investment schedules

2.1 Introduction
Keynes developed a theory of the multiplier model in response to the Great
Depression in the USA during the 1930s.
Remembering the Keynesian view of aggregate supply, it was flat at low levels of
output, and then sharply rose as the economy reached full employment.
During the Great Depression, output and prices were persistently low across the
whole country. Many government policies, such as taxes on imports to boost
domestic supply, were adopted, however it was to no avail.
Keynes view was that instead of focussing on the supply side potential of the
economy, there should be a stimulation of aggregate demand, to increase output
and national income in the economy.
If aggregate demand is boosted
When the economy was in a deep depression, Keynes argued that the AS curve
would be flat. There would be so much spare capacity for firms that an increase
in production wouldnt lead to an increase in price.
For example, if there is high unemployment, if a firm needs to hire more workers
to increase supply, then the cost to the firm will be comparatively low, compared
to if the economy was at full employment, and wages would be high.
Illustration:

The increase in AD has caused output to increase from

level remains unchanged

to

, but the price

This shows how a boost in AD has the effect of increasing output, thereby
helping the economy move out of depression.

Emile Woolf International

200

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

If aggregate supply is boosted

The types of policies that Keynes argued were not necessary were ones that
looked to increase the competitiveness or capacity of supply. Examples of these
are measures to reduce wages, or the cost of raw material.
From the point of being in a depression, Keynes argued that there would be no
change in the output of the economy, because AD would remain stubbornly fixed.
This is illustrated below.
Illustration:

The increase in AS has had no effect on the equilibrium output because the AS
curve remains horizontal at that stage.
This view of the macroeconomy provides the setting for understanding the role of
the multiplier effect.

2.2 Consumption and savings schedules

Covering what was learnt in the previous chapter, we will revisit the consumption
and savings functions.

Emile Woolf International

201

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

We know that consumption and savings are closely linked, and this is shown by
the length of the arrows being equal, to show that when Consumption is below
the 45 degree line, that amount is Savings. And also the equilibrium point A
occurring at the same level of output.
The Q* band represents the level of potential GNP in the economy. This is more
or less the same concept as the LRAS from our study of macroeconomic
equilibrium.
This shows also how the graphs of the two are effectively mirrored images, and
will together add up to equal the 45 degree line.

Emile Woolf International

202

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

2.3 Savings and investment schedules

We have also learnt about the factors that determine the level of investment.
These are based upon the expected levels of future output, business confidence,
interest and other regulation.
We will see how savings and investment schedules will interact with each to
determine output.
Equilibrium between savings and investment
Output determination occurs when the savings of all of the households in an
economy are equal to the desired investment opportunities.
The simple process by which to think of this is:
Rich households dont wish to consume all of their capital
Entrepreneurs require capital to invest in projects
An agreement is made between household and entrepreneur
Therefore savings become used for investment
This process is usually facilitated by banks
Lets view this diagrammatically:
Illustration:

For the sake of simplicity, we have assumed that intended investment will be
made independent of the level of GNP, hence why it is flat.
At an output of M, households in an economy wish to save the value of ME. Firms
will look to invest the value of ME also.
At no other point will savings and intended investment be in equilibrium.
It is worth noting also that these are just planned levels of savings and
investment. It will not necessarily follow that agents in the economy will follow this
level, however it is the intent that is important.
The two functions cannot remain at a point away from equilibrium, because
forces will revert them back. For example, if output is beyond M, then households
will save a higher portion of their income. This means that they will be holding

Emile Woolf International

203

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

back from consumption, which means firms will not invest (because there will not
be the demand to meet it).
Should a firm continue investing at that level, eventually inventories would
increase, firms would not be able to sustain such levels of production and would
then cut back on staff. This would eventually take GNP back to the equilibrium
point.

2.4 Consumption and investment schedules

Determining output through the combination of these two functions is another
way of identifying the level of output in the economy.
This is done through measuring the total spending in an economy at different
levels of output. By combining consumption and investment, we see the level of
desired expenditure by consumers and firms at each level of output.
The economy is in equilibrium when this crosses the 45 degree line, because the
total output is then exactly equal to desired levels of consumption and investment
in the economy.
Illustration:

Disequilibrium in output determination

It is important to establish why equilibrium must occur at E where planned
consumption and investment is equal to planned output rather than at any other
point on the graph.

Emile Woolf International

204

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

Example:
Suppose the economy is at output D. In the case of house builders, there would
soon become a shortage of houses.
This is because at output D, consumers and producers are planning to spend
more than output can provide. Due to the high level of C+I spending, the output of
houses will quickly be consumed.
This will lead to a disequilibrium, as house builders then act to build more houses,
to meet the demand.
As a result, output will increase.
Planned versus actual quantities
To recap, there has been a lot of mention regarding the planned outputs, or
desired consumption which should be clarified.
The actual savings, and actual investment will always match, as calculated by
statisticians. However there will often be a disparity between what firms and
households plan to do, and what they actually do, when they find their planned
sales or production is different from what occurs in the economy.
It is only at the equilibrium point when there will be no tendency for change.

Emile Woolf International

205

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

MULTIPLIER MODEL
Section overview

Introduction

Multiplier effect

Multiplier effect: extensions

Multiplier effect: assumptions

Multiplier effect: limitations

3.1 Introduction
With an understanding of how the consumption, savings and investment
schedules interact, we are now prepared to understand an integral idea in
macroeconomics: the multiplier.
The concept proposes that an increase in private investment can increase output
and employment, and a decrease in investment will cause it to contract.
Keynesians believe that the increase in investment will have an overall impact on
GNP that is greater than itself. The term multiplier is used to show that the
spending done to boost investment has an amplified effect on output.

3.2 Multiplier effect

This leads us to a more formal definition of the multiplier.
Definition: Multiplier effect
The number by which a change in investment must be multiplied to result in the
final change of total output.
We can initially illustrate this with a very simple case.
Example:
If there was an increase in investment in an economy by Rs.10 million, and the
overall effect on the total output of the economy was Rs.40 million, then the
multiplier effect would be equal to 4.
Similarly, if the overall total effect was equal to Rs.25 million, the multiplier
effect would be 2.5.
How is this so?
Conceptually, it can be thought of as: the consumption of one person becomes
the income of another.
When an item is bought, or money is invested, it is not just the initial change in
the output that will occur, there are knock-on payments that will increase national
output also.

Emile Woolf International

206

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

Example:
Imran decides to build a wooden table with the value of Rs.1000.
This will increase the amount of national income by Rs.1000, owing to this
investment.
However, there is also a chain of other payments that would be made.
Suppose the carpenters and wood merchants are paid Rs.1000. They too will use
this money to spend on resources: new consumption goods. Lets say that they will
spend Rs.750 of what they earned.
This means that their marginal propensity to consume (MPC) is . Consequently,
the firms that they spend this money on will see their incomes rise by Rs.750.
These firms also have an MPC of , and so will spend ( of of Rs.1000 which
equals) Rs. 562.5 on other firms in the economy.
This chain will continue until all of the initial investment has been spent.
We can give more clarity to this by including numbers:
Example:
Imrans initial Rs.1000 investment will have the following net effect:
Rs.1000

1 x 1000

+ Rs. 750

+ x 1000

+ Rs. 562.5

+ () x 1000

+ Rs. 421.88

+ () x 1000

+...

+ ...

Rs.4000

or

Here we see that the MPC is an important point in the power of the multiplier
effect.
Had the MPC been lower, say , then less of the income would have been
passed on at each stage of the chain. This means that the overall impact on the
economy would have been less.
This leads to a generic formula for the multiplier which is as follows:
Formula:
hange in output

change in investment

Alternatively;
hange in output

change in investment

If MPS (marginal propensity to save) is higher, then there will be more

withdrawal from the chain, as more income is saved, rather than spent in the
wider economy.

Emile Woolf International

207

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Graphical representation
Returning to our previous diagram, it is possible to graphically show what has just
occurred.
Illustration:

The Rs.1000 increase in investment leads not only to an Rs.1000 increase in

GNP, but a further Rs.3000 increase also.
Therefore each Rs. of investment has been multiplied 4 times.

3.3 Multiplier effect: extensions

The model that we have provided thus shows a simple model of the economy,
whereby the money that is earned by one party is then transferred the next as the
inverse of the marginal propensity to save.
This introduces the concept in a concise manner. We shall now look at ways of
accounting for other inclusions in the equation.
Marginal rate of tax on income
The idea of the multiplier works by a portion of income being passed on from
agent to agent, each of whom then spends it in the wider economy.
The leakage from this that we have seen is savings: households choosing a
portion of their income to forgo current consumption for the future.
A further way that money will not be passed on from agent to agent is through
taxes.
If the government taxes the income that someone receives, he is not able to use
this portion of his income to spend on other service.
Definition: Marginal rate of tax on income
The percentage of income that is paid to the government in the form of tax.
It is also known as the marginal propensity of tax (MPT)

Emile Woolf International

208

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

With the inclusion of taxes, the multiplier equation now looks as follows:
Formula: Multiplier with taxes
ultiplier

marginal ta on income

We can work through an example of this, as follows:

Example:
Marginal propensity to save = 0.2
Marginal tax on income = 0.2
The value of the multiplier then becomes
.

For every Rs.1000 investment, the effect on output is Rs.2500

Marginal propensity to import
Building up our model further, we next introduce an element of trade. In an open
economy, the flow of money will not just be circulating between the hands of
society, there will also be exchange with those outside.
Definition: Marginal propensity to import (MPM)
The percentage of income that is used to buy goods and services outside of the
domestic economy.
With the inclusion of imports, the multiplier equation now looks as follows:
Formula: Multiplier with taxes
ultiplier

We can work through an example of this, as follows:

Example:
Marginal propensity to save = 0.2
Marginal tax on income = 0.2
Marginal propensity to import = 0.1
The value of the multiplier then becomes
.
.
.
For every Rs.1000 investment, the effect on output is Rs.2000

Emile Woolf International

209

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.4 Multiplier effect: assumptions

To understand how much impact the multiplier effect will have on the economy,
we need to look at some of the factors, and assumptions that underlie it.
The broad way of understanding it, is how much of the income that is generated
by one party, be passed onto to another party and so on. Throughout this
exchange, there are elements that will be extracted, thereby reducing the
multipliers impact.
Marginal Propensity to Consume: How much of income generated through
the investment will be spent on other goods and services in the economy. If
MPC is high, then the multiplier effect is stronger.
Tax rate: How much of this income will be returned to the government in the
form of tax. The lower the tax rate, the higher the multiplier effect.
Fall in the aggregate demand: The effect can also be negative. Suppose a
local factory closes, removing the income of members of the community. The
firms which survived off their consumption then lose their income, and so on
Supply-side capacity of the economy: If there is no spare capacity in the
economy, an increase in the government investment may lead to inflation,
which would lessen the real effects of the investment.

3.5 Multiplier effect: limitations

There are a number of limitations to the effectiveness of the multiplier effect. We
have just seen a number of the assumptions that the concept is based upon.
Next, we shall examine two other limitations to the effect of the multiplier.
Elasticity of supply
As we discussed earlier, the effectiveness of the multiplier as a tool is dependent
on how much the aggregate demand is able to shift, with regards to aggregate
supply.
If AS is flat, i.e. there is a lot of spare capacity in the economy, then other
investment projects can start at little change to the price level.
Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

210

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

Here we see that, despite an equal increase in aggregate demand, the overall
effect on output is not the same.
-

is less than

, because the elasticity of supply at

is greater.

Time lag
The second limitation with the effectiveness of the multiplier effect is that a time
lag exists between when the initial investment will be made, and when the full
effects of the multiplier will be felt.
Example:
Suppose that Rs.500million is set aside for a large public works investment
project. The boost to the economy will not be instant.
There may be many time delays towards implementing the plan, and further, once
the money does begin to get passed on to other agents, it may take months, or
years for them to pass on to the next agent.
The overall effect may be not be so dramatic.

Emile Woolf International

211

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

ACCELERATOR MODEL
Section overview

Introduction

Simple accelerator model

4.1 Introduction
The multiplier effect that we have just considered is focussed on how a change in
investment will affect a change in output in the economy.
The accelerator effect looks at how capital investment levels within an economy
are related to the rate of change in GDP. However it looks at what effect a
change in the level of output will have on the rate of investment.

4.2 Simple accelerator model

The basic idea behind the accelerator principle is that the level of investment
within an economy is a function of output. If output increases, then firms will have
to invest more in order to maintain a higher output.
Definition: Accelerator principle
Investment levels in an economy are positively related to a change in the rate of
GDP.
There are a number of other features that need to be brought in, so that we can
fully understand the acceleration principle.
Begin by thinking of a firm making kitchen equipment. It has a level of stock that it
maintains, to then sell to the market. If there is an increase in GDP, then there
will be an increase in demand for the good, and therefore the firm must increase
output, by increasing investment. This is to produce enough stock to meet the
new demand.
The firm has a number of performance properties when it comes to the stock that
it holds.

For example, a capital output ratio of 2:1 means that for each unit of
output, it must have 2 units in stock.

Net investment that the firm makes is twice the change in output, in order to
meet future demand

Also, the value of stock from the previous year depreciates by 5% at the end of
each year.
This can be examined in more detail using a numerical example.

Emile Woolf International

212

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

Example:
Year

Y
(=Output)

Stock of
capital
[1]

(0)

(100)

(200)

100

200

120

Net
investment
[2]

Depreciation
[3]

Gross
investment
[4]

10

10

240

40

10

50

140

280

40

12

52

160

320

40

14

54

160

320

16

16

[1]: Capital : output ratio = 2:1

[2]: Net investment = 2*change in output compared to previous year
[3]: Depreciation = 0.05*Stock of previous years capital
[4]: Gross investment = Net investment + depreciation

Definition: Gross investment

Gross investment = net investment + depreciation
The amount of investment required for all new investment, plus to service the fall
in value of existing capital
An example of this is in the factory making kitchen equipment.
In Year 3, there is an increase in output of 20. This means that to meet this
increase, the firm must invest twice as much to cover it: this is the net investment.
It is also the case that e isting machinery will need replacing due to wear and
tear. In this case, this at the rate of 0.05, and is known as depreciation.
Together, these form gross investment, the amount that a firm will invest in each
time period.
What we can see from the numerical example is that in Year 2, there is a jump in
the level of gross investment from 10 to 50. This signifies a big amount of
investment (a 500% increase!) compared to the previous year.
In Year 5, despite sales (output) remaining the same as in the previous year, the
level of gross investment has dropped significantly, from 54 to 16.

Emile Woolf International

213

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
Year

Y
(=Output)

% change in Y

Gross
investment

% change in
gross
investment

(0)

(100)

100

10

120

20

50

400

140

16.67

52

160

14.3

54

3.8

160

16

-70.4

The shows the disparity in the rates of change of output and gross investment.
As soon as output remained the same, there was a 70.4% drop in the level of
investment.
This shows how when output is increasing, the level of gross investment jumps
up dramatically.
On the flipside, if output begins to drop, then we see a sharp decrease in the
level of investment.
This is why it is called the accelerator effect: a change in output accelerates the
change in the investment.
Below is a representative example, using real data, of the relationship between
GDP and capital investment.
Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

214

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 8: Multiplier and accelerator

Limitations of the accelerator theory

Despite the example presented above making intuitive sense, there are some
considerations for the applicability of the model.

Adjustment/ time lag costs: The time and resources to adjust levels of
capital stock are not considered in the simple model. These costs may be
business costs due to installation of new machinery. In searching for the
optimum level of capital stock, firms may reach this point smoothly, rather
than jump in between.

Spare capacity: There may be spare capacity within the firm which means
it does not need to increase net investment by such a large amount its
existing resources could manage.

Emile Woolf International

215

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTERACTION OF MULTIPLIER AND ACCELERATOR

Section overview

Introduction

Applying this to the wider economy

Business cycles

5.1 Introduction
We have now been introduced to these two important concepts in
macroeconomics. We will see how the two can interact, and what effect this will
have on the state of the economy.
By what we know, of the two, we can see how a change in the level of output can
induce a change in the level of investment (accelerator) which can induce a
change in the level of output (multiplier) which can induce a change in the level of
investment...
Thus, the two can work together, causing even greater swings in the output of an
economy.

5.2 Applying this to the wider economy

What this tells us is how small changes in the economy can have knock-on
effects throughout the rest of the economy.
If the economy is expanding
Suppose that output is growing

This induces investment via the accelerator principle.

The new investment gives further rise to output through the multiplier effect.

This means that the rate of growth of output will be self-sustaining.

However, the rate of growth will eventually meet a point where GNP can no
longer keep up. If this is the case, the level of (desired) output will soon
exceed the production capability of the economy.

Consequently, the rate of investment in the economy will have to decrease,

as firms would no longer want to commit resources, when there will not be
demand to meet it.

We have seen how when output slows, there is a sharp scaling back of
investment that is undertaken.

With a scaling back of investment, we are likely to also see a sharp fall in output,
due to the reverse effect of the multiplier. This effect will then be accelerated
again, causing output in the economy to drop significantly.

5.3 Business cycles

The basic chain of events above describes the theory behind business cycles.
Definition: business cycle
The recurring fluctuations of output that an economy experiences over a long
period of time.
This is covered in more detail in Chapter 10

Emile Woolf International

216

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

9
Money

Contents
1 Introduction to money
2 Functions of money
3 Demand for money
4 Supply of money
5 Quantity Theory of Money
6 Inflation

Emile Woolf International

217

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO2

Understand the nature of nature of macro-economics and its relation

with the measurement of economic growth.

LO3.5.1

Money and its value: Understand the main functions of money

LO3.5.2

Money and its value: Understand credit money and its advantages and
disadvantages

LO3.5.3

Money and its value: Understand sources of the money supply

LO3.5.4

Money and its value: Understand the quantity theory of money

LO3.5.5

Money and its value: Understand the measurement of the value of money

LO3.5.6

Money and its value: Understand inflation and its kinds and impacts

LO3.5.7

Money and its value: Understand the causes of inflation and measures for
overcoming inflation

LO3.5.8

Money and its value: Understand the unemployment and its types and Phillips
Curve

Emile Woolf International

218

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

INTRODUCTION TO MONEY
Section overview

Definition

The key idea

Difference of opinion

Classical economists

Keynesian economists

Monetarists

Conclusion

1.1 Definition
Money, in its modern form, is a relatively recent phenomenon for the human
species. It may at first seem odd to have a world without money. However, for
much of human existence, trade between groups of people has often been by
various levels of bartering. Barter is where one type of good is exchanged for
another.
From a self-sufficiency standpoint, the ability to barter was a remarkable step in
the social evolution of the human race. No longer would someone have to
produce all the goods needed to survive. Instead, a person could produce wool
and another grain, and through bartering they would each have the materials to
eat and be clothed.
As long as each party is happy, then this simple exchange of goods is fine.
However, in the more complex world that we live in today, it is necessary to use
money in its current.
Definition: Money
An officially-issued legal tender used as a medium of exchange, usually through
currency notes and coins.

1.2 The key idea

The important concept to understand with money is how some people want more
liquidity and others want less liquidity.
Definition: Liquidity
The degree to which an asset can be converted into tradable value.
The most liquid asset is cash (money).
Those who want less liquidity will lend money to those who want more of it, for a
price. This price is called: the interest rate.
Definition: Interest rate
The amount charged, as a percentage of the principal, by a lender to a borrower for
the use of assets. Interest rates are typically paid back on an annual basis.
In the context of this chapter, the asset in question will be money. Interest rates
could be charged on the use of many other financial assets (bonds, T-Bills etc.)
and on some non-financial assets.

Emile Woolf International

219

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.3 Difference of opinion

Money plays such an important role in the economy that it is inevitable, as with
other areas of the subject, that there is debate around its characteristics and how
it should be used to meet policy goals.
Below are some differing views of what role money plays in the macroeconomy.

1.4 Classical economists

Classical economists are characterised by their faith in markets to balance out
the forces of supply and demand. For them, money acts as a lubricant to allow a
smoother interaction between buyers and sellers in a marketplace.
Using money instead of bartering was a huge step in creating greater efficiency
in the market system.
However, it is also believed by classical economists that it has little additional
use. It essentially plays a passive role in the economy.
Other forces will determine the level of output that a firm wishes to produce, the
distribution of wealth, and demand for commodities.

1.5 Keynesian economists

For Keynesians, as well as allowing smooth trade of goods in an economy,
money also has another role: it acts as a store of value. By this we mean, rather
than simply saying that money can be used to facilitate transactions, money can
be used to purchase goods and services in the future.
Should one think that he can purchase more with his pot of money in the future
than in the present, then he might forgo consumption in the present, in order to
purchase in the future.
This goes against the classical view of the neutrality of money.
More on the Keynesian view of the demand for money is found later (section 4).

1.6 Monetarists
The third economic school of thought is monetary economics.
Monetarists are a branch of new classical economists that, as the name
suggests, believe that money has a very important part to play within an
economy.
They believe that aggregate expenditures in the economy are influenced by the
market rate of interest, and therefore money can affect the level of output in the
short run economy.
However, they further believe that money influences the long run unemployment
in the economy. If monetary policies are used to increase aggregate demand, it is
thought that this use of additional money may cause a short term boost in output,
but will ultimately lead to inflation in the economy.

1.7 Conclusion
These are the three core views on the role of money within an economy. The
Keynesian and Monetarist theories will be discussed at greater length in
subsequent sections of this chapter.
Where possible, it is important to consider the different outlooks on money as we
progress through the reading.

Emile Woolf International

220

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

FUNCTIONS OF MONEY
Section overview

Definition

Functions of money

Kinds of money

Characteristics of money

Credit money

2.1 Definition
Money, in its modern form, is a relatively recent phenomenon for the human
species. It may at first seem odd to have a world without money, however for
much of human existence, trade between groups of people has often been
various levels of bartering.
Barter can only be of value if there is a double-coincidence of wants.
Exchanging a bag of grain for a bag of wool only works if there is someone who
wants to purchase a bag of grain. But not only that, this person must be able to
provide something of value to the other. And then they must also be able to meet,
and exchange.
There are several problems with barter that we shall see below:

Ability to exchange: Finding someone who has the opposite needs to you
is problematic in a complex society.

Rate of exchange: We may establish that one bag of grain is of equivalent

value to one bag of wool. However, how much is one apple worth? Or two
loaves of bread? Fixing a measure across different product types is near
enough impossible.

Storing/ saving: If a baker uses bread as a medium of exchange, how will

he store value? The bread he bakes will have no value if it is stale. Also,
should a carpenter wish to save, he would need a lot of space to store his
tables, which would be used in exchange.

Divisibility: If trading a table for a bag of grain, the carpenter may believe
his table to be worth more than the grain. How though does he factor this
into the exchange? To chop up the table into the correct amounts would
be pointless.

2.2 Functions of money

The problems that come with bartering have led to the evolution of money in its
current form. The functions that money should be able to possess, in part due to
identifying the problems of the barter system, are explained below.
There are four functions that money undertakes in modern society
1.

To act as a medium of exchange: Allowing economic agents to exchange

goods without the need to barter.

2.

To act as a unit of account: Allowing people to compare the relative price

of goods and services through a common denomination.

Emile Woolf International

221

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

3.

To act as a store of value: Allowing people to forgo immediate

consumption if they have a surplus of resources, and to retrieve it at a later
date in order to consume.

4.

To act as a standard of deferred payments: Allowing people to consume

goods and services in a current time period, whilst continuing to pay in
future periods.

Effects of inflation
A persistent rise in prices will affect the functions of money in different ways. For
ease of interpretation, we will assume that economy is in a state of hyperinflation,
as the effects are much more pronounced.
As a medium of exchange, people may not trust that the money they are holding
will be exchangeable for goods and so money will lose this functionality.
As a unit of account, inflation will distort the relative prices between goods
making comparisons difficult.
The most important way in which inflation degrades the functionality of money is
through its use as a store of value. High inflation means that money does not
keep its value, because purchasing a good tomorrow will require more money
than today.
As a standard of deferred payments, inflation distorts peoples willingness to
accept deferred payments, as the value they receive will not be consistent with
the present.

2.3 Kinds of money

There are three main categories of money that can be used within an economy.
Whilst all will share the same functions, it can be created in different ways

Commodity money: has value even if it wasnt used as money (also

known as intrinsic value). The most common is gold, as this is said to hold
value aside from its monetary properties, as it is used in jewellery, and
other goods.

Commodity-backed money: differs slightly from commodity money.

Whilst commodity money uses the commodity itself, commodity-backed
money can be exchanged for the commodity on demand. The most
famous case of this is the Gold Standard.

Fiat money: is money with no intrinsic value. The value comes solely
from the fact that the government has decreed that it has money for that
purpose. It is used by most countries, as it can be designed to allow a
stricter adherence to moneys main functions.

2.4 Characteristics of money

The form which money takes, distinct from its functions, means that there are a
number of shared characteristics. These characteristics have persisted over time
and will be present in successful current forms of money.

Durability: it retains the same shape and substance over an extended

period of time. It will not deteriorate nor degrade over time. This is
important to maintain the functions of medium of exchange and store of
value. It is not confined to just physical durability though, if issued by the
government, it must be assumed that the government too will be durable,
for the paper that they issued to have value.

Emile Woolf International

222

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

Divisibility: means it can be divided into small increments to facilitate

exchange of a variety of goods. Historically, precious metals have been
used as money as they can be easily divided up.

Transportability: means money can be easily moved between locations

when such an exchange is necessary. In its current paper form, money
can be easily transported, however, if money took the form of concrete
blocks, then moving it to a market would be problematic. Precious metals
have historically been fairly transportable, however it could still not been
as mobile as paper.

Noncounterfeitability: it is not easily duplicated. It will fail as a medium

of exchange if people can create their own easily. Preventing the
duplication of money is a task that the government must oversee to
ensure the functions of money remain intact. To ward off counterfeiting, a
government will employ a number of measures (such as watermarking) to
make the process of duplication more difficult.

2.5 Credit money

The final function of money that was mentioned is now covered in a bit more
detail now.
The idea that money allows one to enjoy the benefits of something in the present,
and then pay it back over a period of time is known as a credit agreement.
Definition: Credit money
Any monetary claim against a physical or legal person that can be used for the
purchase of goods and services.
This can include a simple verbal, or written agreement, and any other financial
instruments that arent immediately payable such as bonds.
There are many cases where people wish to spend money before they have it.
Credit money facilitates these transactions, based on a trust between these
parties that the money will be repaid.
Advantages of credit money

allows immediate consumption of expensive goods, based on future

earnings (this includes houses, education, cars, which could otherwise not
be bought).

allows firms to invest, expand and generate future revenue, rather than use
retained earnings.

Disadvantages of credit money

there is often an element of risk involved that the person issuing credit may
not receive full payment from the person receiving credit.

it may not be possible to establish trust between parties.

Emile Woolf International

223

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

DEMAND FOR MONEY

Section overview

General introduction

Definition

Classical view

Keynesian view

Keynesian liquidity preference

Keynesian liquidity trap

Total demand for money

3.1 General introduction

We have now established how money is superior to other forms of exchange
such as bartering, and what an important role it plays within the modern
economy.
As well, the different schools of economic thought have been touched upon who
each have their opinion on the importance of the role the money in the
functioning of the economy.
The next step for us is to look at the demand for money.

3.2 Definition
It is a widely accepted idea that people would like more money.
But why? Is it because of the goods that they can buy with it? Is it so that they
can invest it? Is it for the innate pleasure in simply possessing it?
The answer to this question has divided economists throughout the history of the
subject.

3.3 Classical view

Classical economists believed that there should be no demand for money, as
money is neutral.
To quote the founder of modern economic thought, Adam Smith, "Money is like a
road which helps in transporting the goods and services produced in a country to
the market, but this road does not itself produce anything".

3.4 Keynesian view

Despite the classical view, economic thought has developed somewhat since the
time of Adam Smith (1723-1790), and we now appreciate that there are
influences on the demand of money.
Four main factors influencing total demand
Though there are many influences that will affect how much money is demanded
in an economy, we shall highlight the most important four:
1. The level of prices
2. The level of interest rates
3. The level of real national output (GDP)
4. The pace of financial innovation

Emile Woolf International

224

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

We shall explore these in the subsequent sections.

3.5 Keynesian liquidity preference

Elaborating on earlier points about money, Keynesians believe that demand for
money depends upon someones liquidity preference.
Definition: liquidity preference theory
The idea that, all else equal, people prefer to hold cash (liquidity) rather than
assets that are illiquid. They will, however, be paid a premium to hold more
illiquid assets.
This makes intuitive sense. If a friend asked you for Rs1000 and said they would
pay it back tomorrow then, if you trusted them, you may be happy to lend it to
them. If they said that they would pay you back in one year, then this increases
the risk that they will not be able to do so. Therefore, to compensate you against
the risk of it not being paid back, you might ask for a premium (i.e. more than
your Rs1000) when they pay it back.
It is the Keynesian view that there are three reasons why someone would wish to
hold money.

Transactional: ability to pay for goods and services

Precautionary: the money people hold for emergency purchases

Speculative: as a store of wealth

The speculative point merits more discussion. Keynes assumed that wealth could
be stored either in cash or bonds, and that the price of a bond is inversely related
to the interest rate.
Definition: Bond
An investment that is bought up front by an investor, and which then pays a fixed
amount in return at regular time periods (usually annually).
This can be explained better through an example:
Example:
Suppose a bond is issued for Rs.4000, and its annual return is Rs.400. This
means the annual rate of interest is 10%.
If the market interest rate falls to 5%, then the price of the bond will increase to
Rs.8000.
This is because, in order to maintain an annual return of Rs.400, Rs.8000 would
need to be invested in another asset.
This means that as the interest rate falls, the price of bonds increases. Therefore
there is an inverse relationship between interest rates and the market price of
fixed government securities.
Keynes believed that each individual had their opinion on what was the average
rate of interest. If the market interest rate was above the average rate, then it
would be rational to expect it to fall, and vice versa.
When interest rates are high, individuals would expect the rate of interest to fall,
and the price of bonds to rise. Therefore to speculatively benefit from this, they
should use their speculative balance of money to buy bonds (because if/when the

Emile Woolf International

225

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

price of bonds rises, they can sell them and make more money). The speculative
money balance is low when interest rates are high.
When interest rates are low, individuals would expect the rate of interest to rise,
and the price of bonds to fall. Therefore to avoid the losses involved with a fall in
the price of bonds, individuals would sell their bonds, thus increasing the balance
of speculative cash. The speculative money balance is high when interest rates
are low.
In short, there is an inverse relationship between the rate of interest, and the
speculative demand for money.

3.6 Keynesian liquidity trap

In cases where interest rates are very low (at, or near zero) monetary policy can
cease to have any impact on aggregate demand. This is known as the Keynesian
liquidity trap.
Definition: liquidity trap
A situation where prevailing interest rates are low, and savings rates are high,
causing monetary policy to be ineffective.

It centres around the expectations of households and businesses in periods of

low interest rates. When interest rates are very low, people may downgrade the
forecasts of return on their investments, such as stocks, property or bonds.
A low interest rate may also be an indication that the economy is unhealthy, and
therefore in an act of precaution, they may decide to hoard cash, or move
savings to short-term investment bearing accounts.
With low interest rates, their expectation will be that they will rise in the future,
thereby making saving an even more attractive proposition. Their behaviour will
manifest itself as postponing consumption, despite the very reason of a low
interest rate policy being to stimulate spending.
Consequently monetary policy is no longer effective at boosting demand in an
economy.
Overcoming the liquidity trap
A number of policies can help to break out of the liquidity trap:
Fiscal policy: becomes a very important instrument in raising demand, for
example running a larger budget deficit.
Rising inflation expectations: higher inflation will cause savings to be worth
less. This will disincentivise hoarding of cash, as its real value will decrease.
Therefore consumption will increase.
Expectations of low interest rates: if a Central Bank convinces people that
interest rates will stay low, they will have less reason to postpone present
spending.

Emile Woolf International

226

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

3.7 Total demand for money

Aggregating the transactional, precautionary and speculative demand for money,
we get the total demand for money. This is sometimes known as the liquidity
preference curve, and is inversely related to the rate of interest.
Illustration:

As the rate of interest increases, the total amount of money demanded falls
Money demanded and an increase in GDP
Suppose that economic growth increases in the economy. Consequently real
incomes increase as well as the number of people employed in the economy.
This will cause an increase in the demand for money at each level of interest
rate.
Consequently there is an outward shift in the demand for money.
Illustration:

An increase in GDP increaes the total amount of money demanded, causing an

outwards shift

Emile Woolf International

227

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Money demanded and an increase in financial innovation

Financial innovation is a loose term that, on the whole, incorporates a new
means of spending money.
In recent years, a major innovation has been the rise of financial products, such
as credit cards and debit cards, which reduce the need for people to withdraw
cash in order to purchase goods and services.
Consequently financial innovation has reduced the demand for cash balances at
each level of interest rate.
Illustration:

The rise in financial innovation has decreased the level of money demanded.

Emile Woolf International

228

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

SUPPLY OF MONEY
Section overview

Definition

Measuring money

Importance of money supply

Methods of controlling the money supply

4.1 Definition
Now that we have an idea of what determines the demand for money, our next
step is to establish what makes up the supply.
There are a number of important aspects to take into consideration regarding the
level of money supply. The first is what constitutes money?

4.2 Measuring money

It is important to note that there are different types of financial instrument that can
still be classified as money. Though we are most familiar with the money that is
held in our pockets (notes and coins) it is too narrow to simply describe this as
money.
The central authorities in many countries adopt a scaled system for the
categorisation of different types of money:
Transactional money (M0): that which is used to buy and sell things within an
economy
Checking accounts (M1): money that is in peoples accounts that they have
immediate access to
Savings deposits (M2): money that belongs to people, but which they cannot
access immediately
Large time assets (M3): such as institutional money market funds
The key variable amongst these different sources of money is their level of
liquidity. We see that the types of money here are categorised by their liquidity,
with large time assets being the most illiquid, and transactional money, by its
nature, already being fully liquid.
One of the most important points to understand is that to hold any value, the
supply of money must be finite.
If the currency could be produced to an unlimited extent, then people could use it
to bid up the price of all goods in the economy, meaning prices and incomes
would be sky-high.
Consequently, power over the money supply is left with the government.

4.3 Importance of money supply

The reason that money supply is important is that money is intertwined with
almost all aspects of daily life.
An increase in money supply has the effect of lowering the interest rate at which
people can borrow, hence directly affecting the level of investment of and
consumption within an economy.

Emile Woolf International

229

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

The ultimate control of the money supply lies with a countrys central bank,
however we shall wait until Chapter 13 to discuss this further.

4.4 Methods of controlling the money supply

There are various means by which the government can attempt to control the
money supply.
Open market operations
This involves a central bank buying and selling bills on behalf of the government
on the open market.
This affects the credit-creating abilities of the commercial banks. For example, if
the central bank sells bills, the public will pay for them by drawing on their
accounts with the commercial banks. As these banks have to maintain a stable
ratio between cash and loans, they will have to cut back on their lending and
hence the growth of the money supply will be curtailed.
Interest rates
A government, through a central bank can influence interest rates through the
issue of Treasury Bills which results in all major financial institutions altering their
rates accordingly. If the government raises interest rates this reduces the
demand for money since less people will want to take out bank loans, thus less
money is created.
Special deposits
A government can require commercial banks to deposit a certain proportion of
their assets at the central bank. This effectively reduces their ability to create
credit and thus would support a contractionary monetary policy.
Government borrowing
The government can influence the money supply with the level of its own
borrowing:

higher borrowing by the government reduces the money supply;

lower borrowing by the government increases the money supply.

Emile Woolf International

230

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

QUANTITY THEORY OF MONEY

Section overview

Definition

Implications of the theory

5.1 Definition
The basic idea behind the quantity theory of money is that if the supply of money
increases, the general price level will do so too. This leads to uncontrollable
inflation which, as we shall see in the subsequent chapter, is seen as a negative
for society.
The theory has its roots in some of the earliest studies of society. David Hume
(1711-1776) wrote of how an influx of gold into a country led to short term
prosperity, followed by a reversion of living standards, as the price level
increased.
The equation for the quantity theory of money that is used today was formally
presented by economist Irving Fisher in 1911.
It stresses that an important relationship to consider when studying money, and
especially the supply of money, is its relationship with the overall price level in the
economy.
The equation is as follows:
Definition: quantity theory of money
where:
is the money supply
is the velocity of circulation of money
is the average price level
is the real value of national output
V is the number of times a unit of currency (i.e. Rs.1000 note) is used in a given
time period. It is often possible to predict this value, and so it can be treated as a
constant.

5.2 Implications of the theory

Given this explanation of how the different components in the economy interact,
we shall now go into more detail regarding what this means for the outlook of the
economy.
As stated, it is assumed that the velocity of money can be treated as a constant.
Further, there is an assumption that the real value of GDP is not influenced by
monetary variables. For example, an increase in the production potential of the
economy might be due to an increase in the rate of productivity, or capital stock,
but not an increase in money supply.

Emile Woolf International

231

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Therefore Y is treated as a constant also.

If V and Y are treated as constant, then a change in the rate of growth of the
money supply will necessarily equate to a change in the general price level.
Government policy
As such, if government decides that they wish to control the general price level,
the quantity theory of money suggests that they should keep in check the growth
of the money supply.
However, this strategy may not always be effective.
Example:
During the 1980s and 1990s in the United Kingdom, a policy of keeping the
growth in money supply constant was adopted.
However, it was soon apparent that the assumption of V being constant was not
applicable. An increase in financial innovation meant that the rate at which
money was changing hands was no longer predictable.
The erratic swings in the levels of money velocity meant that the relationship
between money supply and price level broke down.

Emile Woolf International

232

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

INFLATION
Section overview

Definition

Measuring inflation

Types of inflation

Impact of inflation

Causes of inflation

Remedies to inflation

Inflation and unemployment

The Phillips Curve

6.1 Definition
Since understanding the role of money in society, and learning about its
connection with the price level, we shall next investigate the concept of inflation.
Definition: Inflation
A continuous or persistent increase in the general price level.
A one-off price rise does not constitute inflation. However, if there are continual
price rises, then inflation is said to be increasing.
Another important point to note is that a fall in the inflation rate does not equate
to a fall in prices. It merely means that the rate at which prices were increasing
has fallen.
Real vs nominal prices
There is also a distinction that should be made between terms that are denoted
as real and terms that are nominal.
Definition: Real rate
A price change adjusted for inflation.
If the price of a car went from Rs.10,000 to Rs.11,000 (10% rise), but inflation
was 6%, then the real increase in price was (10%-6%) 4%. It is the measure of
how much the price changed as compared to the average price of other goods.

Definition: Nominal rate

A price change unadjusted for inflation.
The car has a nominal increase in price of 10%.

6.2 Measuring inflation

If we know that inflation is caused by continuous increase in the general price
level, how then do we measure this change?
Conceptually, this is achieved through measuring the prices of a set of goods at
various points in time, and then seeing by how much they have increased or

Emile Woolf International

233

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

decreased. Some may rise, and some may fall, but the overall change in the
price level is an indication of the inflation level.
The most common way in which this is done is through the consumer price index
(CPI).
Definition: Consumer prices index (CPI)
A measure of the weighted average of prices of a basket of goods and services.
The CPI is calculated by taking price changes for each item in the predetermined
basket, averaging them, and then weighting by their importance.
It is an index because the changes in prices are measured in relation to an index
of 100.
If the price of bread increases from Rs.150 to Rs.165 (10%) then the new price in
indexed terms would be 110.
The reason that the items are weighted is that certain goods and services are
said to contribute to the cost of living more than others. For example, most
people buy food as an everyday occurrence, and so a change in price will affect
the cost of living. However, people may only infrequently purchase a house.
Nevertheless, it still plays a role in the rate of inflation.
This can be explained in the following example:
Example:
Category
Food
Shelter
Clothing
Transportation
Medical care
Leisure

Price Index
106
105
110
98
108
88

Weighting
18
43
7
19
5
8
100

Price x Index
1908
4515
770
1862
540
704
10299

The price index is calculated by the equation:

sum of (price weighting)sum of weights
In this instance we see that the rate of inflation is

Rounding up, this means that the price index is 103.

Measuring the price after the inflation rate a year on requires some consideration.
Example:
Lets say that the weighted price index after the next year was 106.
This does not mean that inflation has risen by 6%, because the index that the
annual change is based upon is 103.
The calculation is therefore:
.

Emile Woolf International

234

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

Limitations of CPI as a measure

Though it is widely regarded as the best measure for inflation, the CPI is not
without its downfalls.

Not fully representative: because it is taking the average basket of

goods, this wont be what everyone is faced with. Single people will have
different spending habits to married couples, as will rich and poor families.

Changing quality of goods and services: a price rise may come about
because of an improvement in the quality of the good, or it may be due to
an increase in costs. This is not distinguishable, and can be problematic if a
price rise is wrongly attributed as inflationary, when in fact it is a superior
product.

Index-number problems: it is debatable which is the most appropriate

base year, as this can drastically change the values of numbers.

6.3 Types of inflation

Though inflation is the persistent increase in prices, it can come in different
forms. We shall discuss these now:
Low inflation
Though subjective to measure, low inflation typically means that the price level
will increase at a rate each year of perhaps up to 5%. Throughout Western
Europe during the late 1990s, this was typically the case.
High inflation
This is where prices begin to rise a lot quicker. It is likely that prices may be
increasing at an annual rate of 60%, or even 100% (therefore doubling each
year). Examples of this include Brazil during the 1970s.
Hyperinflation
Prices are rampant, and can increase by a rate of 1,000,000,000% annually!
Prices increase so quickly, that money becomes worthless it is no longer a
store of value, and cannot be used for transactions. Prices increase so quickly
that people begin to hoard things that can be used to barter.
The most extreme example is in Germany during 1922-1923, where holding an
asset worth Rs.1000million at the beginning of 1922, would be worth less than a
sugar cube 18 months later. This eroded wealth, and had huge social
consequences.
Deflation
This is where the price level consistently falls year on year. It is when the rate of
inflation becomes negative. A recent example of deflation is Japan in the 1990s.
Economic history would suggest that if inflation increases above low inflation it
may then move into high inflation. The fact that it may accelerate is what makes
politicians and central bankers especially worried, and why many policies are
implemented to stop inflation increasing too much.

6.4 Impact of inflation

It has been implied that inflation can be a bad thing for an economy, especially if
it reaches the levels of high, or even hyperinflation. We shall now investigate why
this is the case.

Emile Woolf International

235

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Different types of inflation are likely to have an effect on the economy in different
ways.
The main impact that occurs is that there is a divergence in relative prices. The
general price level will increase, however the rate at which wages increase by is
often not as much.
If, as an employee of a firm, you receive a wage that increases by less than the
general price level, this then means that you have less disposable income. The
price of goods is increasing, but you now have less money to spend on buying it.
The disparity between the price level and the wage level is something that can be
costly to the economy.
Therefore the two noticeable impacts of inflation are:

A redistribution of wealth: which will be different amongst social classes

Distortions: in the relative prices and output of different goods, industries,

and even employment in the economy as a whole.

Costs of inflation
This then means that there are a series of costs that are associated with high
inflation.

Income redistribution: Higher inflation can have a regressive effect on

lower income families, and elderly people in society. Especially if the price
of food and utilities increases drastically.

Fall in real incomes: If wages are cut (to help tackle inflation) then this
means that real incomes have reduced.

Negative real interest rates: If the savings interest rate is lower than
inflation, than those who rely on savings as their income will become
poorer.

Cost of borrowing: as we shall see in a later section, in response to high

inflation, governments may increase the interest rates. This will increase
the cost of businesses getting a loan, which may stifle investment.

Business competitiveness: if prices in one country are higher than

another, then when selling comparable goods, the country with lower
inflation will have a lower price and therefore have much better international
competitiveness.

Business uncertainty: with high and volatile inflation, businesses are less
likely to commit to big projects, as they are uncertain as to the economic
future.

6.5 Causes of inflation

From seeing the impact that inflation can have on an economy, the next step is to
evaluate what might be the cause of inflation.
There are a number of potential causes for an increase in inflation. They can
broadly be divided into two categories:
Cost-push inflation
This is where the cost of inputs in a product increases, so in order to preserve
profit margins, a firm will push up the final price of the good. There are some
inputs that affect a number of different product categories, and so contribute
greatly to inflation.

Emile Woolf International

236

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

An example of this is oil prices. In the 1970s, the price of oil in the USA increased
drastically. This meant that any product that relied on oil as part of its production
process was susceptible to increase its price. This happened on several
occasions which led to an abnormally high inflation rate.
Illustration:

As costs increase, this shifts back the SRAS, thereby increasing the price level in
the economy.
There can be several reasons for an increase in costs:

Rising labour costs: An increase in wages often occurs when

unemployment is low, and skilled labour can demand more of a wage
increase.

Expectations of inflation: This has an important link to actual inflation. If

people in the economy expect inflation to be higher in the following period,
then they will ask for a higher wage, in order to protect their real income. In
doing so, this will increase the costs to a firm, increasing their costs and
therefore fulfilling the expectation of higher inflation. When higher inflation
does materialise, employees then expect it to be higher in the following
year, and hence the chain of events continues. This is called the wageprice spiral.

Component costs: An increase in the price of raw materials is a higher

cost incurred by the firm.

Higher indirect taxes: Such as increased duties on fuel or particular types

of food will increase the final cost of goods sold.

Cost of imports rising: If there is a fall in the exchange rate, then firms will
see the price that they pay for imports increase, thereby increasing the
costs to their firm.

Emile Woolf International

237

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Definition: Wage-price spiral

An effect whereby a rise in wages increases the disposable income of people,
which therefore increases demand for goods, increasing prices. The rising prices
(inflation) cause greater demand for higher wages, therefore increasing disposable
income and so on...
This effect is known as a spiral as it is self-perpetuating.
As shown in the diagram, the effects of these factors cause the short run
aggregate supply curve to shift inwards, and so will also reduce the level of
output in the economy.
Demand-pull inflation
Rather than just being an increase in the costs of a firm, there can conversely be
an increase in aggregate demand which leads to a rise in the level of inflation.
This is when aggregate demand for goods and services outstrips aggregate
supply. If quantity cannot increase to meet it, then the price of those goods will
rise until equilibrium is reached.
When many consumers are attempting to buy, say, a new type of car, and firms
do not have the capacity to supply to the market, then the price levels will
increase. It could also be because of an increase in money supply allowing
consumers to spend more as banks have greater ability to issue credit.
Illustration:

As costs increase, this shifts back the SRAS, thereby increasing the price level in
the economy.
Demand-pull inflation is more likely when the SRAS is inelastic, therefore when
resources are near to full employment. If there has been a boom in GDP levels
then, with scarce resources and excess demand, firms can increase their profit
margins, thereby contributing to higher inflation.

Emile Woolf International

238

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

The main causes of demand-pull inflation are:

Fiscal stimulus: will increase AD in the economy. If there is an increase in

government spending, then the effects of the multiplier might make this an
even greater increase.

Monetary stimulus: a fall in interest rates may spark an increase in

demand, therefore leading to too much money chasing too few goods.
The surplus money in the economic system would increase the price level
and therefore inflation.

Depreciation of the exchange rate: if exports become cheaper to

foreigners, and a comparative amount of imports arent bought, then AD will
shift outwards, causing a rise in the level of inflation.

Fast growth in other countries: especially if they purchase from the

economy in question, will increase the demand for those goods, and
therefore increase AD.

6.6 Remedies to inflation

As we can see with two different categories of inflation, it is not always possible
to administer exact policies that will curb inflation from increasing exponentially.
When faced with cost-push inflation, the response is often to get control over
the cost of inputs.

Limit wage increases: wages can be a significant input cost, and so by

keeping wages low, this will assist in reducing the upward pressure on final
prices.

Limit cost of utilities: as noted earlier, another significant input cost is

energy, and so the government can reduce the increase of these prices to
temper inflation.

Reduce cost of imports: this can be done by allowing the domestic

currency to appreciate in relation to the currency it is importing from,
thereby reducing the costs of domestic firms.

When faced with demand-pull inflation, the response is to reduce the level of
demand in the economy:

Raise interest rates: this will reduce consumers real disposable income,
and hence they spend less.

Raise taxes to reduce disposable income and spending: this could

include increasing a Value Added Tax (i.e. a tax associated with buying
goods) as a way to discourage spending.

Reduce money supply: by removing money from circulation, the central

authority reduces the ability for transactions to occur, thereby reducing the
potential for prices to rise.

6.7 Inflation and unemployment

One of the most critical relationships that exists in macroeconomics is between
inflation and unemployment.
High rates of both are seen as a negative for the economy, and it is often tested
as to whether a relationship exists between the two.

Emile Woolf International

239

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Definition: Unemployment
The state of being without employment and actively searching for work.
The unemployment rate is often used as a proxy for the health of the economy.
This is found by dividing the number of unemployed people in an economy by the
number of people in the labour force.
Types of unemployment
There are various reasons why someone might be unemployed, and these can
be categorised in the following manner.
Demand-deficient unemployment: when an economy is in recession or a
period of low growth, aggregate demand may be deficient to meet the potential
output in an economy. Firms therefore cutback production; in the process
reducing the amount of labour that is required.
Illustration:

Structural unemployment: is unemployment that arises through inefficiencies in

the labour market. This often occurs through a misalignment of skill sets in
certain geographical locations.
It is more prominent if labour is unwilling to move geographically in search of new
work, or if firms are unwilling to take on people with different skill sets.
Real wage unemployment: also known as classical unemployment, occurs
when wages are kept artificially high through powerful trade unions. A higher
minimum wage means that the demand for labour is less, because firms cannot
afford to employ that many people.

Emile Woolf International

240

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

Illustration:

The suggested remedy to this is to have no minimum wage, and allow the supply
and demand for labour to reach market equilibrium.
Frictional unemployment: is when people are searching for or are transitioning
from one job to another. This can often just be temporary, and can take a while
whilst peoples skill sets adapt.
Voluntary unemployment: occurs when people choose not to enter the labour
force at the prevailing wage rate. It may be more beneficial for them to receive
social security, rather than go into a job and be required to pay tax.

6.8 The Phillips Curve

In 1958 an economist from New Zealand, named William Phillips, published a
study of the historical link between unemployment and the rate of change of
money wages.
From this, a more formal link between inflation and unemployment was found,
indicating that there was a trade-off between the two.
This trade off can be explained like so:

As unemployment falls, labour shortages may begin to occur where skilled

labour is in short supply. This puts upward pressure on wages.

At high levels of unemployment, individuals do not have the bargaining

power to increase their own wage, therefore inflation is likely to stay low.

The relationship can best be displayed on a graph:

Emile Woolf International

241

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

At point A, the trade off between inflation and unemployment is great, because
resources are near full capacity.
At point B though, there is more spare capacity in the economy, meaning that the
level of wage inflation is so low, that its negative.
Phillips Curve: developments
Monetary economist Milton Friedman developed the theory of the Phillips Curve
by saying that there was in fact a Long Run, and a Short Run Phillips Curve.
He agreed that the trade off between unemployment and inflation existed,
however only in the short run. In the long run, there was no such trade off.
The argument was that each SRPC was based upon a fixed expectation of
inflation. If there was an increase in the expectation of inflation, then this would
cause the SRPC to shift higher.
In his opinion, boosting AD would only have a short run effect on unemployment.
In the long run, people would adjust their expectations to account for higher
inflation, and a new SRPC curve would form.
This can be shown in the diagram below:

Emile Woolf International

242

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 9: Money

Illustration:

The economy begins in equilibrium at A.

There is an increase in government spending to boost AD, decreasing
unemployment and taking the economy to point B where inflation is 6%
A point B, firms costs and individuals wage demands increase, meaning output
falls, unemployment rises, and hence SRPC1 shifts to SRPC2.
This means that in the short run, a trade off may occur, however in the long run, it
is not possible to expand beyond the LRPC.
Natural rate of unemployment
The implication of this is that there will always be a level of unemployment in the
economy which is unavoidable. Looking at historical data, this would appear to
be the case.
The people who are affected by this are known as frictionally, or structurally
unemployed. This is known as a type of voluntary unemployment because they
are choosing to abstain from the labour market.
Whilst this might seem unfair, in economic terms these people who do not
participate in the labour market at the current wage are unemployed. Even if a
whole industry has declined and there is not any work in the local economy, they
could in theory move to another part of the country and engage in work.
This means that in an economy there will always be a level which will persist, and
is therefore known as the natural rate.
Diagrammatically, this can be shown as below:

Emile Woolf International

243

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

shows the equilibrium between the supply and demand for labour at the wage
level
.
The workforce contains all of those people who are actively supplying their
labour, but also those who are voluntarily unemployed.
This means that - workers in the workforce choose not to partake at a given
wage level. These people are those who make up the level of natural
unemployment in the economy.
We can see how the lines converge as the wage gets higher. This is to be
expected because, at a higher wage, more of the voluntarily unemployed
workforce will choose to rejoin the workforce.

Emile Woolf International

244

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

10

Growth and taxes

Contents
1 Growth and recession
2 Fiscal policy
3 Taxation

Emile Woolf International

245

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO2

Understand the nature of nature of macro-economics and its relation

with the measurement of economic growth.

LO3.6.1

Growth and recession: Understand different phases of the business cycle

LO3.6.2

Growth and recession: Understand the indicators of growth and recession

LO3.7.1

Fiscal budget: Explain the fiscal policy and its objectives and how they are
achieved through fiscal budgets

LO3.7.2

Fiscal budget: Discuss the limitations of fiscal policy

LO3.8.1

Direct and indirect taxation: Define direct and indirect taxation,

LO3.8.2

Direct and indirect taxation: Understand functions of taxation, types of taxes

and characteristics of good tax policy

LO3.8.3

Direct and indirect taxation: Explain the advantages and disadvantages of

direct taxation

LO3.8.4

Direct and indirect taxation: Explain the advantages and disadvantages of

indirect taxation.

Emile Woolf International

246

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 10: Growth and taxes

GROWTH AND RECESSION

Section overview

Introduction

Objectives of growth

Business cycles

Indicators of growth and recession

1.1 Introduction
Moving from the role of money, and price levels, we turn now to consider the
level of output in an economy, and what might cause the fluctuations that we can
observe.
Throughout economic history, there have been bouts of prosperity and
depression. Economists view these recurring patterns in a countrys output not as
random, but as a causal chain of events which can be used to predict the future
path a country may take.
Definition: Economic growth
Economic growth is a long-term expansion of a countrys production potential.
Rather than unsustainable short run increases, economic growth is seen as a
more permanent increase in what output the economy is able to produce. From
our earlier chapters, it is akin to the level of the Long Run Aggregate Supply.

1.2 Objectives of growth

Depending upon the type of economy and society there will be different
objectives as to what is meant by growth. Some may see it as simply the output
that is generated, whereas other societies may place higher regard on, say, an
equitable distribution of resources.
To better evaluate this, we shall consider the advantages and disadvantages of
growth.
Advantages

Higher living standards: an increase in the real income of the individuals

in an economy.

Employment effects: with economic growth, the capacity in an economy

increases and therefore there is more opportunity for employment within
society.

Fiscal benefits: with higher GDP growth, firms and individuals will increase
the amount of taxes that they pay. This gives government better opportunity
to meet their objectives.

Emile Woolf International

247

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Disadvantages
Despite seeming obvious that long-term growth in an economy is beneficial, we
should also consider some of the downsides that come with this growth.

Environmental concerns: fast growth may be at the expense of the

natural environment. This has been attributed to the swathes of
deforestation in many rural areas of the world, as the wood has been used
to fuel economic growth.

Inequality: there is also an argument that economic growth merely

exacerbates inequality that is present in an economy. Whilst it might reduce
absolute poverty, the level of relative poverty in countries may increase
dramatically with a drive for economic growth.

Inflation risk: if demand outstrips supply due to rising incomes then, as we

have seen, there is the risk that demand-pull inflation will set in, causing the
general price level to increase to an unsustainable level.

Working hours: with an increased economic output, there are concerns

that workers may be exploited, working longer hours than they should. This
might upset work-life balance, leading to social problems.

1.3 Business cycles

From seeing the merits and demerits of economic growth, we next move to
evaluate what patterns of output emerge regularly in economies. The patterns of
output fluctuations are known as business cycles.
Though no cycle will be identical, there are distinct phases in each which one can
analyse, recognise, and therefore use an indicator for future events.
It has been observed throughout economic history that there is often an upwards
trend in the level of economic growth. Peaks and troughs form, but after each
cycle, the level of Real GDP is greater than before.
To ensure a clear understanding, the trend line has been drawn flat in the
diagram below. It is useful to consider the trend line as the diagram below
though.
Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

248

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 10: Growth and taxes

Illustration:

Each phase in the cycle has certain characteristics, and follows a logical flow of
events. We shall begin the cycle as the economy is about to uptake.
Prosperity (Boom period)
The economy is expanding, meaning output, income, employment, prices and
profits should all increase.
At this stage, banks issue credit more freely which facilitates firms to invest in
increasing output to meet the demands of consumers with higher income. Output
grows, as does overall business optimism.
A growing economy also means that there may be inflationary pressures, caused
by high demand, and insufficient levels of output. To temper these pressures,
central banks are likely to increase interest rates.
As output increases and increases, there comes a point where it can expand no
further, which is when the cycle reaches its peak.
Downturn
At this stage, economic activity begins to slow down.
When demand begins to decrease, firms begin to scale back their production and
investment plans. There is a steady decline in output, profits, prices and
employment as demand falls, and firms respond by reducing their output.
Banks reduce the credit they issue, firms cancel orders that they place, and
people begin to lose their jobs, which further decreases the level of aggregate
demand.
This eventually takes the economy into a state of recession.

Emile Woolf International

249

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Recession/depression
With unemployment levels high, incomes low, consumer demand low and
investment low, the economy slips into a state where output remains very low.
There is an under-utilisation of resources as machinery lies dormant. Business
confidence is extremely low, as profits and prices go lower and lower.
Economic activity is at its lowest, meaning the business cycle is at its trough.
Recovery
From the low point, there is an increase in levels of economic activity as demand
begins to increase slightly. With an increase in demand, production increases,
causing an increase in investment.
This causes a steady rise in output, incomes and business confidence. This
leads to an increase in investment, somewhat helped by banks increasing credit.
Assets in the economy begin to be utilised again, and levels of GNP increase
once more.
As this continues, the economy then enters a phase of Prosperity, and the cycle
continues...

1.4 Indicators of growth and recession

With this series of events occurring throughout the cycle, there are certain
markers that can be identified, and used to indicate at what stage the economy is
in.
These indicators can be categorised into three types, depending upon at which
stage the data is analysed.
Leading economic indicators
The nature of these indicators is that they are used to forecast at what stage the
economy will be in, at some time in the future. These in particular give an
indication for whether a peak or trough will be reached in the following 3-12
months.

Index of business confidence

Manufacturers new orders

New building permits for private housing

The money supply

Coincident economic indicators

These indicators are events and measures that occur at the same time as a peak
or trough occurs. They are used by governments to assess at what stage in the
cycle the economy is in.

Number of people in employment

Industrial production

Personal incomes

Manufacturing and trade sales

Emile Woolf International

250

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 10: Growth and taxes

Lagging economic indicators

These indicators are used to assess whether an economy has reached a peak or
trough 3-12 months after it would have occurred.

Consumer Price Index (i.e. level of inflation)

Average duration of unemployment

Interest rates

Average income

It is never an exact science to classify at what stage in the business cycle an

economy is in, which is why the variety of indicators presented above are used;
to give the best estimate of how the economy has/ will perform.

Emile Woolf International

251

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

FISCAL POLICY
Section overview

Introduction

Objectives

Public sector finances

Balancing objectives

Use of Fiscal Budgets

2.1 Introduction
In response to all of the analysis we have undertaken on the macroeconomy, we
look now at how the government acts to control it.
Definition: Fiscal policy
Policies undertaken by a government to influence macroeconomic conditions,
and therefore economic activity, through the use of taxation and spending.
There is a very important distinction which must be made with regard to the
policies that a government undertakes. In some instances it will be to stimulate
the economy, whereas in other cases it will be to rein it in, if it is growing too
quickly.
We therefore have these two types of policy:
Expansionary
Definition: Expansionary policy
A macroeconomic policy that seeks to increase the rate of economic growth.
An expansionary policy can be applicable not just to fiscal policy, but also for
monetary policy. Nevertheless in this case there are a number of policies that a
government can undertake to boost the rate of economic growth such as:

Tax cuts

Tax rebates

Increased government spending

Contractionary
By contrast, contractionary policies look to slow down growth in an economy.
Definition: Contractionary policy
A macroeconomic policy that seeks to slow down the rate of economic growth.

Emile Woolf International

252

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 10: Growth and taxes

Again, this doesnt just have to take the form of fiscal policy. If an economy is
suffering from high inflation, it may be that the countrys financial department
looks to halt the high level of growth that occurs. This can be done through some
of the following policies:

Increase taxes

Reduce subsidies

Wage freezes

2.2 Objectives
As with any action that a government would undertake, there are certain
objectives that are set to ensure the proper management of the economy, and
give them guidelines for particular policy decisions.
These objectives can be numerous and their actions depend upon what the
current state of the economy is; however some key themes do emerge:

Keep inflation low: ensuring the price level remains stable avoids
persistent problems throughout the economy.

Keep employment high: governments have a social objective to ensure

high levels of employment.

Steady economic growth: most economists agree that consistent, gradual

economic growth is favourable.

Equilibrium in Balance of Payments: this ensures that the value of a

countrys imports and exports are equal.

Run a balanced budget: meaning whatever the government spends, it can

pay for.

2.3 Public sector finances

An important part of how the macroeconomy is run is how the government pays
for the policies that it must implement. The money that it spends on projects is
often not within its possession initially, and so it must borrow in order to pay for
them.
Sources of public sector borrowing
The main way that a government will finance itself is through issuing sovereign
bonds, T-Bills, or other financial instruments. In simple terms, it receives money
now from investors and in exchange must pay them back at a future date. This
gives governments liquidity and allows them to finance their work.
This is, however, classified as a debt for the country. It is based upon the
assumption that the government will pay back the holder of the bond at the
prescribed future date.
National debt
The levels of national debt can become an indication of a countrys financial
stability. If it is unable to meet the obligations that it has to its investors, then it is
likely that a debt crisis may ensue, whereby investors become less confident that
they will receive their money back, and so ask for a higher premium which
increases the cost of borrowing for governments making it more difficult to
implement policies.

Emile Woolf International

253

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Public debt
This is the accumulation of not only the national debt that the government has,
but also the total amount of debt held by the public (consumer debt, credit debt,
mortgage debt).

2.4 Balancing objectives

By their nature, the objectives that a government wishes to meet may be in
conflict with one another.
In order to establish steady economic growth, there will be a need for the
government to utilise expansionary fiscal policies.
This, though will risk keeping inflation low, and also running a balanced budget.
If the government wants to control inflation and the trade deficit it runs, then the
opportunity cost of this decision is that there may be a slowing down of economic
growth and, as we have seen through the Phillips Curve, an increase in
unemployment.
Therefore, it will be impossible for a government to be able to achieve all of its
goals. Instead, it must prioritise, and balance the objectives so that a good
combination is achieved.

2.5 Use of Fiscal Budgets

These objectives can be somewhat contradictory, and for this reason, a fiscal
budget has been established to keep governments in check.
This also ensures that the government only spends money that it is likely to
receive. If it has a deficit (i.e. spends more than it earns), then it needs to fund
the additional spending through other means, such as borrowing.
A government cannot borrow indefinitely, meaning that this is not a sustainable
practice.
Example:
If the government wanted to keep employment high, it could employ everybody in
the country to do a mundane task, like digging holes. However, doing this would
run the risk of inflation becoming high, and it could also mean it doesnt have
sufficient revenues to pay the wages.
Therefore, using fiscal budgets, the government constrains which projects it can
and cant undertake in order to meet its objectives. Certain ones will take priority,
meaning that it wont always be possible to meet every objective. However,
remaining within the budget is used to ensure government spending isnt rash,
and brings an element of control to balancing economic activities.

Emile Woolf International

254

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 10: Growth and taxes

TAXATION
Section overview

Introduction

Functions of taxation

Types of taxes

Good characteristics of a tax

Direct taxation

Indirect taxation

3.1 Introduction
We have just discussed the importance of governments only spending money
that they receive. This next section is concerned with the main way in which
governments receive their income: through taxation.

3.2 Functions of taxation

Taxes exist for several purposes within an economy:

Fiscal: taxes form the budget from which governments can allocate
resources across the economy.

Allocation: it acts as a means of distributing wealth between various

groups of citizens: wealthy to poor, as a means of maintaining a social
stability.

Regulatory: ways of changing the behaviour of individuals or firms through

imposition of taxes.

Incentive: stipulating special tax arrangements for certain members of

society as a result of past achievement.

3.3 Types of taxes

Within an economy, taxes can be raised in a number of different ways. In order to
generate a substantial level of taxation, the government has different options at
their disposal. The distinction is made between the types of tax depending on
how the taxable base changes. The taxable base is the households income, or
the business profit.
Regressive taxes
A tax where lower income entities pay a higher fraction of their income than
higher income entities.
Proportional taxes
A tax where everyone, regardless of income, pays the same fraction of income in
taxes. This is also known as a flat tax.
Progressive taxes
A tax where higher income entities pay a higher fraction of their income than
lower income entities.

Emile Woolf International

255

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

These can take effect in a number of different forms. For example, a car duty is
likely to be somewhat regressive in nature. This is because a car makes up a
greater percentage of a lower-income households income, and therefore will
affect them more than a higher-income household.

3.4 Good characteristics of a tax

As with any regime that a government imposes, there will be good ways and bad
ways of conducting it. There are a number of characteristics that we can draw out
that are important in creating a system that is good.

Efficiency: a tax should raise revenue without creating negative distortions

in the economy, such as disincentives to work and invest.

Equitable: taxes should be paid based upon someones ability to pay.

Benefit principle: a principle whereby people should pay taxes based

upon the utility that they gain from its implementation.

There can often be trade-offs between these different principles.

Example:
A government could give a tax break to higher income individuals to encourage
higher labour productivity. However this could equally been seen as less
progressive, thereby increasing potential inequality in society.
Conversely, setting the tax rate too high could cause disincentive effects against
people working hard.

3.5 Direct taxation

There are two main types of taxation direct and indirect both of which deserve
discussion in their effectiveness of raising government revenues.
Firstly, a direct tax is one where the money is raised directly from an entity in the
economy.
Definition: Direct taxation
A tax paid directly to the government by the person on which it was imposed.

Example:
The main example of this is income tax.
The person pays tax based on the income that he earns. This tax cannot be
shifted to another entity, instead it has to be fulfilled by the person.
Other examples include: inheritance tax, capital gains tax, national insurance
contributions and corporation tax.
From a governments perspective, there are advantages and disadvantages with
this form of raising revenue.
Advantages

Equitable: people with higher income pay more into society than those with
less income, creating a more equitable distribution of (net) wealth.

Emile Woolf International

256

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 10: Growth and taxes

Cost of collection is low: meaning it is an economical way of raising

revenue, saving expense.

Relative certainty: the government can estimate how much it will receive
allowing better planning of projects.

Flexible: if a government needs to raise revenues quickly, it can do so by

raising direct taxes.

Disadvantages

Possible to evade: it is possible to falsify tax claims meaning the correct

amount is not always paid.

Unpopular: it is very obvious when a direct tax is being paid meaning the
end user will often try to find ways to avoid paying it.

Discourage savings/ investment: if too high, then it would leave

consumers and firms less money to put to other causes that could reap
reward.

3.6 Indirect taxation

There is also indirect taxation that is raised not through generating the money
directly, but by the choices that agents make in the economy.
Definition: Indirect taxation
A tax that increases the price of a good, meaning the tax is paid when the good is
bought.

Example:
An example of this is fuel taxes.
The government can choose to impose a tax on petrol as a means of discouraging
consumption, but also to increase revenues. This tax is often passed onto the
consumer in the form of a higher petrol price. Every time petrol is bought, the
government effectively generates tax revenues.
Other examples include: Value Added Tax, Customs Duty, Excise Duty, and levies.
Once again, there are advantages and disadvantages with this form of raising
revenue.
Advantages

Change the pattern of demand: the government can alter the demand for
a product (say, alcohol or cigarettes).

Can correct externalities: if a product causes direct external costs (e.g.

health costs associated with alcohol or cigarettes), the tax can be used to
mitigate these.

Less easy to avoid: often these are part of the final price, ensuring taxes
are paid.

Allows people greater choice: consumers make choices and then tax is
paid, rather than having income taken away immediately.

Emile Woolf International

257

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Disadvantages

Increases inequality: regardless of income, people are still faced with the
same tax on a good

Cause cost-push inflation: by increasing the price of inputs for goods.

Establish a black market: if taxes make prices too high, can incentivise
people to source the goods from alternate (sometimes illegal) markets.

Higher uncertainty: if in a recession, people are buying less goods, then

this means the revenue received will decrease much more.

Distorts the market: can lead to disequilibrium in the market for products
that have been taxed.

Emile Woolf International

258

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

11

Monetary policy
Contents
1 Central Banks
2 Other Banks

Emile Woolf International

259

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO4

Understand the nature of banking systems

LO4.2.1

Role of a central bank: Describe the functions of a central bank

LO4.3.1

Monetary policy: Understand the meaning of monetary policy

LO4.3.2

Monetary policy: Understand the objectives of monetary policy and the mutual
conflict of the objectives

LO4.4.1

Types of banks and financial institution: Define a bank and describe its kinds.

Emile Woolf International

260

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 11: Monetary policy

CENTRAL BANKS
Section overview

General introduction

Functions of the central bank

Monetary policy

Contractionary policies

Expansionary policies

Objectives of monetary policy

Limitations of monetary policy

1.1 General introduction

We next turn our attentions to an organisation that serves many functions in an
economy, and is known as the central bank.
Though there were precursors in the Netherlands and in Sweden, the first central
bank was established in the United Kingdom in 1694. The Bank of England
raised funds, and began issuing bank notes as a means of funding a conflict
between France and England.
Almost all countries have a central bank today, or are part of a monetary union
that acts as a central bank for all of them. They are based on the original Bank of
England model.
Definition: Monetary union (or currency union)
Where two or more states share the same currency. They operate under the same
central bank.
The most notable is the European Monetary Union, that combines 17 member
states using the same currency.
The central bank operates in a similar vein as the banks described in the
previous section, however it is nevertheless a separate institution with its own
roles and objectives.
Definition: Central bank
The entity responsible for overseeing the overall monetary policy in a country (or
countries). It is also concerned with meeting a number of objectives such as:
currency stability, low inflation and full employment.

1.2 Functions of the central bank

The responsibilities of the central bank are generally universal, however there will
be some variation between countries.

Sole supplier of currency: The central bank has the responsibility of

supplying the notes and coins throughout a country in order to bring
uniformity, but also to exercise greater control over it.

Emile Woolf International

261

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Banker to the government: It offers advice and also funding for

governments looking to fund projects, in the same way a commercial bank
would to its customers.
The central bank will organise and advise upon the public debts of a
country through working with a government.

Banker to the banks: By holding cash reserves from each bank for safe
keeping, the central bank brings a level of protection to the banks. Having a
centralised cash reserve yields greater confidence in the system, and a
better buffer against financial shocks.
Further, a central bank can offer a counselling service to commercial banks
if ever they find themselves in financial difficulty, and in need of advice.

Lender of last resort: If a commercial bank is unable to use other sources

to meet its financial requirements then they use the central bank. This
brings greater liquidity to the system, and helps protect savers deposits.

Exchange rate controls: The central bank has control over a countrys
foreign currency, and gold reserves. These are used in times to manipulate
the exchange rates with other countries, and also other policy objectives,
such as the balance of payments.

Clearing agent: As all commercial banks have accounts with the central
bank, when undertaking transactions, they can do so within the central
bank, reducing the necessity of issuing and transferring cash.

Establish specialised banks: In some cases, a central bank will allow the
creation of banks to serve a particular purpose, usually not for commercial
means. For example, a bank that organises the funds for agricultural
workers, or another sector of the economy.

This shows, at least in part, how the central bank performs a number of
operations within the economy. In part, the reason for this is to share
responsibility for the economic performance of a country with the government.
The central bank is often trusted more than the government to fulfil government
objectives, because it does not have the primary objective of being re-elected.

1.3 Monetary Policy

As we have seen from the definition of a central bank, it oversees an array of
functions in an economy. It performs these functions in a number of ways, and
through the broad definition of monetary policy.
Definition: Monetary policy
Using a variety of techniques to influence the use of money and credit within an
economy in order to meet certain objectives.
Monetary policy is based around controlling the growth and size of the money
supply, in turn affecting the interest rate that is set in the economy. The primary
objective that the central bank tries to meet is to keep inflation low and steady,
and it does this through controlling the level of spending in an economy.
It can use monetary policy as a way of controlling the actions of individuals in an
economy. There are a number of processes that the central bank can do.

Emile Woolf International

262

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 11: Monetary policy

Change reserve requirements

Suppose the central bank is looking to reduce the level of aggregate demand in
an economy. It can do so through manipulating the reserves that commercial
banks must hold. In order that the reserves are kept safe, commercial banks will
have them deposited at the central bank.
1.

Reduce reserves available to banks: the central bank controls the level of
reserves that commercial banks must hold with them. By decreasing the
level of reserves that they must hold, and keeping the reserve ratio
constant, the commercial banks must reduce the level of loans that they
give out.

2.

A Rs.1 reduction in the level of reserves that commercial banks must hold
translates, through the multiplier effect, to be a much bigger contraction in
the overall money that they loan out. This causes the money supply to
decline.

3.

As the money supply contracts, money becomes tight (i.e. less available
and more expensive). This reduced level of money in the economy raises
the interest rate, and reduces the amount of credit available in the
economy. Consequently interest rates rise for mortgage borrowers and
firms looking for investment are discouraged from borrowing, and spending
more money.

4.

High interest rates reduce the wealth of firms and individuals, causing a
drop in consumption and investment. This causes a shift to the left of
aggregate demand (AD = C+I+G+(X-M)). In short, tight money has a
contractionary effect on aggregate demand.

5.

The effect of tight money reduces the level of aggregate demand, causing a
drop in output, employment and inflation.

This is a very important aspect of what a central bank does. By affecting the level
of reserves that commercial banks must hold, it is able to affect the level of
output and spending in the real economy. This is a powerful tool for the central
bank.
Open-Market Operations
The central bank can buy or sell government securities on the open market, to
change the level of reserves that are held by commercial banks.
Again, lets suppose that the central bank wishes to reduce the level of aggregate
demand in the economy; the process will follow like so:
1.

Central bank decides it wants to decrease the level of aggregate demand

and so agrees to sell Rs.1 billion government bonds from its portfolio of
reserves.

2.

The bonds are sold to dealers in government bonds, who then resell them
to commercial banks, and other financial institutions.

3.

The buyers pay for these bonds by the central bank reducing the balance of
reserves that the commercial banks hold with them.

4.

As we have seen, if the cash reserves of a commercial bank drop, then the
level of demand deposits that it can take drops by a magnitude of the
money multiplier.

5.

Consequently, the level of money supply tightens, and aggregate demand

declines.

Emile Woolf International

263

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

It is useful to practice these steps a few times, and even what would happen if
the reverse (i.e. central bank wishes to increase aggregate demand) scenario
occurs.
Discount-rate policy
The central bank also makes loans to commercial banks. When banks are
borrowing, this helps to increase their total level of reserves, and when the level
of borrowing declines, the total reserves decline.
It is difficult for a central bank to set the exact level of borrowing that occurs
between commercial banks and itself. It may believe that commercial banks need
to borrow more, but it is not possible for them to set precise levels.
The central bank can however encourage more borrowing by lowering the
discount rate that it offers to commercial banks, as a means to induce them into
borrowing more.
That said, the use of the discounted rate that banks can borrow at is meant only
to be used sparingly. If the short-term interest rate was, say 10%, and the
discount window was 8%, then commercial banks may be tempted to undertake
all of their borrowing from the central bank. This behaviour is seriously frowned
upon, and banks will often be publicly reprimanded for doing so.
In changing the discount rate, the central bank can induce commercial banks to
increase or decrease their level of borrowing, and therefore the level of reserves
that they hold.
The discount rate is used as a proxy against which banks offer interest rates to
individuals in the economy. In the press, the discount-rate can also be referred to
as the base rate.
The logic goes that commercial banks will charge a premium on the base rate
that will remain constant throughout. If the base rate falls, the interest rate faced
by consumers will fall also, hence affecting the activity in the real economy.
Moral persuasion
The central bank can also discourage behaviour from banks by simply
conducting personal discussions with them, and persuading them not to go
through with actions that may jeopardise the wider objectives that the central
bank has.
This is not a particularly easy instrument to measure, but is nevertheless an
important part of the central banks arsenal.
Exchange rates
The Balance of Payments (see Chapter 12) can be in a deficit or surplus which
will affect the monetary base, and therefore the money supply.
The central bank can buy or sell foreign reserves (often in large quantities) in
order to ensure that the exchange rate doesnt adversely affect the outcome of
the real economy.

1.4 Contractionary policies

The monetary policies that we have observed can be used to either expand or
contract the level of output in an economy, through a mechanism that takes the
actions of the central bank, and sees the effect in the real economy.
We shall now run through an example of both a contractionary, and expansionary
policy, and how this changes the macroeconomic equilibrium that exists.

Emile Woolf International

264

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 11: Monetary policy

Example:
The central bank is concerned that the economy might be overheating, and
therefore decides to reign in the level of aggregate demand in the economy.
It does so through increasing the base rate (interest rate) that it sets throughout
the economy.

By increasing the rate of interest that banks can borrow from the central bank,
commercial banks must reduce the level of reserves that they hold.
In order to cover the higher cost of borrowing, they will either reduce the total
amount of loans that they issue, or increase the cost of borrowing to those
individuals with existing loans (and who havent pre-determined the fixed level of
interest that they will pay).
These both have the effect of reducing the level of disposable income that
individuals have, hence reducing consumption. It also reduces the level of
investment that occurs in the economy, as a higher interest rate disincentivises
firms to invest in long term projects.
This results in a decrease in aggregate demand which, as the diagram shows,
reduces the level of output from Y1 to Y2, and the price level from PL1 to PL2.

1.5 Expansionary policies

An expansionary monetary policy will be used when the central bank wishes to
stimulate the level of demand within an economy.
If the level of output is low, meaning central bank objectives are not being met,
then they will look at ways of stimulating aggregate demand through one, or a
combination of, monetary policies.

Emile Woolf International

265

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Example:
The central bank is concerned that the level of output in the economy is too low,
and therefore decides to try and increase the level of aggregate demand in the
economy.
It does so through buying government bonds in a round of open market
operations.

By purchasing government bonds from commercial banks, the central bank

transfers money to the banks, increasing the cash reserves that they hold.
The commercial banks, with their bolstered reserves, will look to then loan out
these additional reserves, to the level of the reserve rate. Doing so increases the
reserve level for second-generation banks, which do the same. Consequently the
initial increase in cash reserves to the first bank translates to a multiplied effect
across the wider economy.
This increases the level of money supply in the economy, and brings down the
market rate of interest. Consequently firms and consumers then increase their
investment and consumption respectively, and the level of aggregate demand
increases.
This is shown in the diagram by an increase in output from Y1 to Y2, and the price
level from PL1 to PL2.

1.6 Objectives of monetary policy

We have seen that monetary policy can be used to expand, or contract the
money supply in an economy. This is done to meet a number of objectives that
the central bank wishes to achieve in an economy.
As with other objectives that must be made, there is often a conflict of what can
be achieved.

Emile Woolf International

266

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 11: Monetary policy

There are numerous objectives that monetary policy looks to achieve and, as we
shall see, it is not possible to satisfy all of them.

Price stability: Keeping inflation low and steady for a more stable
economic performance.

Economic growth: With appropriate economic policy, the government

wishes to develop the overall per capita income within the country.

Exchange rate stability: Achieve stable exchange rates between countries

in part through adjusting for the balance of payments.

Full employment: Here, it is necessary to increase production and

demand for goods, allowing resources to be fully utilised and the economy
to reach full employment.

Credit control: Making banks exercise control over their issuance of credit,
but also ensuring that the most vulnerable in society are receiving their fair
share.

Though these objectives are all desirable, it is not possible to achieve all of these
at once some conflict between them exists.
Price stability vs full employment
By undertaking monetary policy to increase full employment, a central bank could
undertake policies to increase aggregate demand. Doing so could drive up
inflation, putting more pressure on the price stability target.
Economic growth vs exchange rate stability
In order to boost economic growth, a central bank may decide to manipulate
exchange rates to increase the likelihood of exports. Doing so would jeopardise
stability in exchange rates.
Economic growth vs credit control
A way to grow the economy might be through the expansion of credit, as it would
spur investment and spending. However, this comes with heightened economic
risk of credit defaulting.

1.7 Limitations of monetary policy

Despite the many advantages that monetary policy can bring, there are
limitations to its effectiveness in the real economy.
These can take place in a number of ways:

Existence of non-monetary sector: This is especially so in developing

countries. If a large portion of society are not using money for exchange
(for example bartering in rural areas), then they are not using commercial
banks, which limits the effect of policies reaching these people.

Existence of non-banking financial institutions: These are

organisations that offer credit to consumers, however do not come under
the supervision of the central bank.

High liquidity in financial markets: When a central bank looks to tighten

the money supply, its effects will be hindered if agents in the economy have
access to highly liquid assets. Hence if the central bank tries to tighten
money supply, agents can counter this by creating their own liquidity.

Emile Woolf International

267

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Time lags: The effects of a monetary policy will often take time to occur.
Therefore a central bank must have to predict what will happen in the
future, and implement policies accordingly. Sometimes however there will
be too much uncertainty for these policies to be correct.

Lack of co-ordination between monetary and fiscal policies: In simple

terms, monetary policies are implemented by the central bank, and fiscal
policies are implemented by the government. If the two organisations do
not co-ordinate their objectives, then the effect will be corruptive.

Example:
The central bank is concerned that the level of inflation is getting too high, and so
decides to tighten the money supply.
However, the government believes that unemployment is too high, and so decides
to invest in an infrastructure project (an increase in government spending) to boost
output in the economy.

As we can see, the government pushed AD out from AD1 to AD2, only for the
Central Bank to cause it to shift back from AD2 to AD1.
The efforts of both have been wasted, due to a lack of co-ordination.

Emile Woolf International

268

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 11: Monetary policy

Example (continued)
Had better co-ordination been managed, then the government could have issued a
policy to shift out SRAS (for example forcing wages to stay low, keeping down the
cost of inputs) and the central bank could have lowered interest rates, thereby
increasing aggregate demand in the economy.
Doing so would have resulted in the following:

Emile Woolf International

269

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

OTHER BANKS
Section overview

Introduction

Types of bank

2.1 Introduction
Banks act as financial intermediaries
Definition: Financial intermediaries
A financial intermediary is a financial institution through which savers can
indirectly provide funds to borrowers.
Other examples of financial intermediaries include mutual funds and pension
funds.
An earlier section explained the way in which banks make money, through
facilitating credit in the economy. This, however, is just one form of banking, and
other types do exist.
Definition: Bank
A financial institute licensed by the government to receive deposits, which then
invests these funds in a number of securities.
The range of where banks receive deposits from, and what they invest in, is the
cause of diversity within financial intermediaries the banking sector.

2.2 Types of bank

There are two main types of bank: commercial banks and investment banks.
Commercial bank
These banks receive money from the public through deposits, and other means,
and in return finance the business sector and individuals.
Definition: Commercial bank
A bank targeted at the mass-market in which individual customers can purchase
bank services: mortgages, checking accounts, personal loans, and other bank
services.
Banks often issue this money, and are not able to recall it immediately, such are
the terms of use. This can lead them into potential bankruptcy problems.
These banks can be run by both the public and private sector.
The bank that we were introduced to when being introduced to credit creation is a
traditional commercial bank.
Within this, the scope of commercial banks, there are a number of different types
of bank, which are all slightly different.

Emile Woolf International

270

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 11: Monetary policy

Retail bank
Often used synonymously with commercial bank, this is used to distinguish from
investment banks, and deals with the deposits and loans from large businesses
and corporations.
A retail bank is often a branch of a commercial bank.
Definition: Retail bank
A bank targeted at the mass-market in which individual customers can purchase:
mortgages, checking accounts, personal loans, and other bank services.
Specialized bank
These are banks which service a specific sector in the economy. They will often
have specialized needs that might not be adequately met by other forms of
banks.
Definition: Specialized bank
A bank targeted to a specific section of the economy in which firms and customers
can have access to specialized forms of banking services.
The clearest example of this is agricultural banks. For example, the Agricultural
Development Bank of Pakistan (ADBP) provides long, medium and short term
loans to agriculturalists, and aids them with purchases of land and other business
inputs.
Cooperative bank/ building society/ credit union
These are usually a not-for-profit organisation where members pool their
resources and receive favourable credit terms. Membership is restricted to some
shared alliance (employees of the same company, residents in a certain
neighbourhood etc.).
There are a number of different variations on this business model, and depending
on the region, will be called any of the above.
Definition: Cooperative bank
This is a type of financial institution that provides banking and other financial
services to its members.
Investment bank
An investment bank works by assisting a range of institutions with raising capital
by underwriting their securities and other assets. They also advise on many
issues a business might face.
Definition: Investment bank
A financial intermediary that undertakes a number of financial services for clients.
The investment bank can also aid companies with acquiring funds, and facilitate
a number of transactions through utilising the financial markets.
An investment bank will not accept deposits; this is most often dealt with by a
banks commercial division.

Emile Woolf International

271

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

272

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

12
Credit

Contents
1 Credit

Emile Woolf International

273

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO4

Understand the nature of banking systems

LO4.1.1

Credit formation by banks: Explain the process of creation of credit money by

the banks

LO4.1.2

Credit formation by banks: Discuss the limitations on the creation of credit.

Emile Woolf International

274

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 12: Credit

CREDIT
Section overview

General introduction
Definition

Types of credit

How a bank makes money

Credit creation
Limitations of credit creation

1.1 General introduction

We now move away from the macroeconomic policies and instruments used by
governments, and towards the role and behaviour of financial intermediaries who
act in the economy.
These agents are known more commonly as banks, and the first issue that we
will assess in the makeup of the banking system is that of credit.

1.2 Definition
The key concept to understand in any discussion of the banking system is credit.
Definition: Credit
A contractual agreement whereby a borrower receives something of value in the
present, in exchange for payment in the future, generally with interest.
In modern society, almost all agents engage with some form of credit. Whilst this
could be a casual agreement between willing parties, a much more formal
process has emerged with the establishment of modern day banks.

1.3 Types of credit

There are different types of credit that exist within an economy. Here, we shall
assess the following three:
Trade credit
This exists between a customer and a seller, usually in the commercial sector. A
purchaser can order a good, receive the good, and then pay for it after a certain
period of time.
The credit terms will often mean that the amount has to be paid after 30, 60 or 90
days.
Bank credit
This type of credit exists when an individual or firm goes to a bank, receives an
amount of money upfront, and then pays back the amount over a period of time.
Bank credit can have varying terms of how much needs to be paid back, and by
what time.
Consumer credit
A consumer credit agreement often occurs between a retailer and a consumer. In
exchange for store credit (i.e. currency to spend at the establishment) a
consumer can pay the amount back over a certain period of time.

Emile Woolf International

275

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

One thing that is consistent over all of these different types of credit is that the
time period that the money is paid back over is positively correlated with total
amount that needs to be paid.
Thus, the longer it takes for someone to pay back their credit, the more money
they will have to pay back in total.
This brings in the concept of maturity.
Definition: Maturity
Period of time for which a financial instrument remains outstanding.
In this case, how much time is left before the credit amount must be repaid.

Advantages of credit
The credit money has the following advantages:
Spending & consumption:
The quantity and stock of money directly affects the spending and
consumption volume of the economy. When the amounts of credit moneys are
high this means people have less of perfectly liquid money, so they are able to
consume and spend less. On the other hand, if more people are holding their
wealth in perfectly liquid form, there will be tendency to spend it and this will
increase the consumption expenditure of economy.
Inflationary trends:
Quantity of credit money and their conversion directly affects trends of
economy. If during boom period, people convert their credit money in perfectly
liquid money, then this will increase the spending and will lead to inflation in
the economy.
Economic policies:
Credit money is also an important determinant of economic policies. If there
are inflationary trends in the economy, government increases the interest rate.
This directs people to convert their cash in credit money to gain interest. This
will reduce the cash holdings and will help to decrease inflation. On the other
hand, if government wants to generate rapid economic activity it reduces the
interest rate. This induces people to convert their bank money into cash and
enjoy current consumption.
Liquidity preference:
Credit money is also an important factor of liquidity preference theory of
Keynes. According to this theory the quantity of bank money in the economy
has an important bearing on the rate of interest and the equilibrium quantity of
money supply. The degree of willingness of the people to hold wealth in the
form of bank money and other interest earning assets affect the level of
interest rates prevailing in the economy.
Use as security:
Credit money is also used as security to obtain loans and credits from banks
and other financial institutions. Banks also grant loans against investment in
different deposit schemes. Bank money are generally shown under the current
asset in the balance sheet. Thus it also effects the current ratio of the
business.

Emile Woolf International

276

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 12: Credit

Inter bank transaction:

Credit money also serves a means of economic transaction between two or
more financial institutions. Credit money has made every the settlement of
Accounts easy of all the financial institutions.
Satisfaction and optimal use of resources:
Credit money is important as it helps in determining the standard of
satisfaction and optimal allocation of resources. The profitability, productivity
and efficiency are measured in money terms. These measures help in
determining the profitable volume of sales and usage of resources.
Working of banks & financial institutions:
Credit money is the basis for the functions and operations of banks and
financial institutions. It is also equally important for money lenders, brokerage
houses, acceptance houses and for all those who generate there livelihood
just because there is money in the world.
International trade:
Credit money has also greatly expanded the international trade. The
difference between costs of production among various parts of world can be
calculated as we have got money to value scarce as well as abundant
resources. This difference in costs leads to the gains of international trade.
Industrial revolution:
Credit money can be thought of as an important factor that brought about the
industrial revolution during the last century. It made possible the valuation of
different resources so that they can be used in the most profitable way. It also
helped in the valuation of certain professional services such as lawyers,
auditors etc. The feasibility reports can be prepared with reasonable certainty
because we can calculate present and future values of assets and expenses
in monetary terms. The profound research and development carried on in
todays world also owes great to the money.
Government:
Credit money is perhaps the basic need of governments besides lot of others.
Governments need credit money to perform all such functions as maintenance
of law and order, defence expenditure, provision of justice, etc. Governments
also need money to make huge transfer payments such as pensions, gratuity,
allowances etc.

Disadvantages
Following are the disadvantages of credit money.
The Inflation Problems
Credit creation process is the basic function of commercial banks. This might
increase money supply in the country which may cause inflation.
Creation of monopolies
Commercial banks generally advances loans to large scale enterprises,
industrialists and business due to their strong financial position. This may lead
to establish monopolies of large scale industrialists and enterprises.

Emile Woolf International

277

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Economic Instability
One of the main causes of business fluctuations and economic instability that
a loom and recession. Excess credit creation becomes a cause of inflation and
over investment which may result in recession.
Unproductive loans
Easily available credit money turns into unproductive loans which become
wasteful use of credit money.

1.4 How a bank makes money

Before looking specifically at how credit is formed, it is useful to understand the
basic operations of a bank.
A person who wishes to keep their money safe will deposit it with a bank, and
then be able to retrieve it any given time. To incentivise people to do so, a bank
will offer these people a rate of interest, which will mean the value of their savings
increases.
Within society, a number of agents also need access to credit, to fund purchases
of homes by taking a mortgage, but also business investment. For this, they go to
a bank. The bank will give them the required money that they need upfront, and
then the agent will repay, plus interest, over a length of time.
This is known as financial intermediation.
By having the rate of interest on lending higher than that offered to savers, the
bank is able to earn money through a net interest margin.
However, it is possible for banks to lend out more money than they have in
deposits. In doing so it is possible for them to make money from their operations.
Typical bank balance sheet
To explain this better, we shall work through an example of a balance sheet of a
bank.
Example:
ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Reserves
Loans

60 Checking accounts
1,000 Savings and time deposits

Investments and securities

400 Other liabilities

Other assets

500

Total

1,960 Total

360
1,000
600
1,960

The key items of interest here are the Reserves, and Checking accounts.
Checking accounts are payable on demand, and can therefore be withdrawn
immediately.
Reserves are mainly a legal requirement to ensure a buffer against any unexpected
withdrawals.
From this, we shall work out how a modern day operates its system of issuing
credit. First though, we shall consider the historical context from which they were
formed.

Emile Woolf International

278

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 12: Credit

Goldsmiths as banks
The first banks, of sorts, were goldsmiths. They would store gold for customers.
The customer could then produce a receipt and retrieve their gold, for a small fee.
It soon became apparent that the customer didnt need the exact piece of gold
that they had deposited. Goldsmiths would no longer tag each individual piece,
but instead would have them kept together, and when a receipt was presented,
they would issue gold to that amount.
This is how a goldsmith would differ from, say a depository warehouse. Leaving a
valuable item, such as a ring, would mean that upon receipt, the customer
expects to receive that identical ring back. Gold, on the other hand, could remain
anonymous.
Viewing goldsmiths as banks then, this is what a typical balance sheet would look
like:
Example:
ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Cash reserves

50,000 Demand deposits

50,000

Total

50,000 Total

50,000

This shows how the goldsmith bank held 100% of deposits. If ever someone
came with their receipt, the bank would issue them their gold.
An advanced goldsmith bank
A goldsmith may soon recognise that despite deposits being payable on demand,
it is very rare that all deposits will be asked for at the same moment.
On a particular day, some deposits will be added, some withdrawn, but on the
whole, it wont be necessary to have all of the gold stored in case it is all asked
for at once.
The goldsmith as a banker could try to increase the value of the gold deposits
held by purchasing assets provide an income, therefore earning interest on the
value of the gold.
Depositors were still OK, because when they periodically withdraw gold from the
bank, there are enough people not withdrawing to ensure that there will be
enough.
The goldsmith bank can now maximise profits, in doing so securing lower fees to
the depositors.
This has been made possible because the total amount of deposits exceeds the
amount of gold reserves.
Legal reserve requirements
With the logic that more profit can be earned by issuing credit beyond the
deposits of the bank, profit-maximising banks would likely issue credit up to the
point where they can fulfil the daily transactions of its customer deposits.
However, should, for some unexpected reason, customers attempt to withdraw
their money at the same time, this will mean that banks will not be able to pay
them. This is obviously extremely problematic for consumer welfare.
Therefore, there are legal requirements for how much money a bank must keep
in reserve, should this occur. This legal requirement curtails banks from freely

Emile Woolf International

279

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

issuing credit to the detriment of regular customers. It keeps banks safe and
liquid.
A new bank (Bank A) enters the market
We will now work through an example of how a bank operates through fractionalreserve banking, and what the implications are for the rest of the economy.
The bank begins with a deposit of Rs.100,000.
Example: Bank A
ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Cash reserves

100,000 Demand deposits

100,000

Total

100,000 Total

100,000

Bank A has a simple balance sheet at this moment, all of the deposit is held as
reserves, and can be called upon at any time.
Bank A has to keep 10% of its assets in reserve, as a legal requirement. This
therefore means that it has an additional Rs.90,000. As Bank A is a profitmaximising modern bank, it will look to use this sum to issue credit.
Therefore Bank A issues Rs.90,000 as loans to other people in the economy.
This means that the balance sheet now looks like so:
Example: Bank A
ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Cash reserves

10,000 Demand deposits

Loans and investments

90,000

Total

100,000 Total

100,000
100,000

Bank A, being a profit-maximiser, will only keep the legal minimum requirements
that it has to.
However, this is not the full story. This action of loaning out Rs.90,000 has
actually created money in the economy.
This is because the people who have received the Rs.90,000 will now either
deposit it in another bank, or use it to pay for goods and services, and that person
will deposit it in a bank.
Bank B is introduced
Aggregating all the deposits received by banks, we have a second-generation
bank, that we shall call Bank B.
Bank B will receive the Rs.90,000 and treat it a+s an asset. It does not care that
the money is itself issued from another bank, but what it does care about is using
the excess reserves in a profitable manner. Remember that the legal capital
requirement is still 10%.

Emile Woolf International

280

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 12: Credit

Its balance sheet therefore looks like so:

Example: Bank B
ASSETS

LIABILITIES

Cash reserves

9,000 Demand deposits

Loans and investments

81,000

Total

90,000 Total

90,000
90,000

Bank B also loans out nine tenths of the assets that it holds.
The Rs.81,000 that is loaned out by Bank B will then be dispersed in the same
way, and will result in Bank C (the aggregation of 3rd generation banks) having
Rs.81,000 in their assets.
It too will reserve 10% (i.e. Rs.8,100) and lend out 90% (i.e. Rs.72,900). The
chain therefore continues until the money is passed around many intermediary
banks.
Total new money in the system
Once the created money is transferred between all financial intermediaries, there
is equilibrium of how much will be created.
The equations will become the following relationship:
Example: Bank B
POSITION OF BANK
Bank A
Bank B
Bank C
Bank D
Bank E
Bank F
Bank G
Bank H
Bank I
Bank J
Sum of first 10
generations of banks
Sum of remaining
generations of banks
Total for banking
system as a whole

NEW
DEPOSITS

NEW LOANS AND

INVESTMENTS

NEW RESERVES

Rs.100,000
90,000
81,000
72,900
65,610
59,049
53,144
47,830
43,047
38,742

Rs.90,000
81,000
72,900
65,610
59,049
53,144
47,830
43,047
38,742
34,868

Rs.10,000
9,000
8,100
7,290
6,561
5,905
5,314
4,783
4,305
3,874

Rs.651,322

Rs.586,190

Rs.65,132

348,678

313,810

34,868

Rs.1,000,000

Rs.900,000

Rs.100,000

Through the long chain of banks issuing new loans, and other banks keeping them
as assets, the value of money that ends up being in the system is 10 times the
amount of new reserves.
The banks together are able to generate a multiple expansion of reserves.
Equilibrium is reached when each additional Rs.1 of reserve, supports Rs.10 of
demand deposits.

Emile Woolf International

281

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

At each generation, the banks have created money, in the sense that they have
issued loans, and their final bank deposits are 10 times their reserves.

1.5 Credit creation

Through this extended example, we have demonstrated not only how banks
make profit, but also how they create money in the wider economy.
A key determinant in how much is created is the reserve ratio that each bank had
to hold.
Definition: Reserve ratio (RR)
The portion of depositors funds that a bank must keep for immediate delivery to
its owner.
It is possible to calculate the total amount of credit that can be generated by a
bank using the following formula:
Definition: Money multiplier
The multiple of credit that can be created by an initial deposit
oney multiplier
In our example, the multiplier is
meaning for every Rs.100 that is
deposited with a bank, the final outcome for the economy is that Rs.1,000 has
been issued.
If the reserve ratio were to change to 20%, then the money multiplier becomes
. The higher the reserve ratio, the less money is created in the economy.
Money multiplier considerations
Though this relationship is fairly intuitive, under certain circumstances, it will not
perform exactly as predicted.
The reasons for this are:

Cash leakages: People holding cash outside of the banking system will
reduce how much is passed on to the next-generation bank. For example, if
someone has a loan for Rs.75,000, but keeps Rs.15,000 as a cash
emergency, then only Rs.60,000 will go to the next stage. This therefore
reduces the multiplier.

Excess reserves: Some banks will choose to hold additional reserves for
strategic reasons. The fact that they hold onto more of their reserves,
means that they pass on less to the next bank, and therefore the effect of
the multiplier will decrease.

Emile Woolf International

282

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 12: Credit

1.6 Limitations of credit creation

There are, however, a number of limitations as to how much credit can be
created.

Total amount of cash: Firstly, the amount of credit is dependent on the

initial size of the money supply. The larger this is, the more credit can be
created.

Size of reserve ratio: The lower the ratio requirements are, the more credit
can be created. In many countries, there is a minimum level (usually 20%)
that banks must adhere to, so that there isnt too much credit within the
economy.

Liquidity Preferences: How much cash people want to hold. If, say, there
is high inflation, then people may not wish to hold their money in banks
where the real value is set to diminish.

Central Bank policies: The central bank may utilise a number of

instruments to control how much credit is created by banks.

Availability of quality securities: Banks will not issue credit to everyone

they will only issue if they can receive a high value asset in return from the
borrower. If this does not exist, then credit will not be created as readily.

Emile Woolf International

283

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

284

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

13

Balance of payments and trade

Contents
1 Balance of payments
2 Determination of the exchange rate
3 Government policy to influence exchange rates
4 Devaluation

Emile Woolf International

285

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO3

Understand how the balance of payments of a country is worked out.

LO6.1.1

Balance of trade and payment: Discuss the concept of exchange rate, its
determination and governments policy to influence it.

LO6.1.2

Balance of trade and payment: Understand the nature of items that are
accounted for in the concept of balance of trade and payment

LO6.1.3

Balance of trade and payment: Understand the different parts of balance of

payment

Emile Woolf International

286

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

BALANCE OF PAYMENTS
Section overview

Introduction

The current account

The capital and financing account

Net errors and omissions

Balance of payments example

Balance of payments vs. Balance of trade

Balance of payments explanation

Current account deficit

Corrective measures to current account deficit

1.1 Introduction
From looking at the revenues that government generate through taxes, we now
turn our focus on the payments and trade of goods made between countries.
The balance of payments (BOP) measures the financial transactions made
between consumers, businesses and the government in one country with others.
In short, it is calculated by adding up the value of all the goods that are exported
(i.e. sold to other countries) and imported (i.e. bought from other countries).
It is made up by a combination, in a country, of:

the current account

the capital account

official financing account

1.2 The current account

The current account is made up of different components which aggregate to give
a final balance. We shall now look in more detail as to what parts make it up.
Trade in goods
Items that include the import and export of finished goods, semi-finished goods,
and component parts for assembly.
Trade in services
These services include tourism, financial services and consultancy.
Investment income
Overseas activity that leads to a flow of money back to the country. For example,
interest received from direct investment, the activities of subsidiaries, and
dividends earned from owning shares in foreign firms.
Transfers
Items moved between countries such as overseas aid.

Emile Woolf International

287

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

1.3 The capital and financing account

These accounts record the flow of capital and finances between the domestic
country and the rest of the world. These types of flows include:

Real foreign direct investment: a domestic firm setting up a factory in

another country, and earning money from that.

Portfolio investment: a domestic investor buying shares in a business that

is already established. Such investors have no control over these
companies.

Financial derivatives: financial instruments where the underlying value is

based on another asset.

Reserve assets: a Central Bank will use foreign financial assets to cover
deficits and imbalances.

1.4 Net errors and omissions

In theory, the two accounts should balance completely; however in practice, this
doesnt always happen. Therefore the net errors and omissions compensate for
the discrepancy between the two accounts.
If there is a deficit, it is balanced by:

Selling gold, or other financial reserves

Borrowing from other Central Banks

If there is a surplus, it is balanced by:

Buying gold, or other financial reserves

Paying off debts

1.5 Balance of payments (BoP) example

Each item of the BoP equation can either be a surplus, a deficit, or equal. The
sum of all of these items gives a final number for the balance of payments.
Below is an example of a BoP breakdown
Example:
BoP Item

Net balance Comment

(Rs. billion)

CURRENT ACCOUNT
(A) Balance of trade in goods

-24

A trade deficit

(B) Balance of trade in services

+15

A trade surplus

(C) Net investment income

-14

Net outflow of income due to

profits of international
corporations

(D) Net overseas transfers

+6

Net inflow of transfers

A+B+C+D = Current account

balance

-17

OVERALL, A CURRENT
ACCOUNT DEFICIT

+4

Positive net flow of FDI

CAPITAL ACCOUNT
Net balance of foreign direct
investment flows

Emile Woolf International

288

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

BoP Item

Net balance Comment

(Rs. billion)

Net balance of portfolio

investment flows

+5

Positive net flow into equity

markets

Net balance of short term

banking flows

-3

Net outflow of currency from

countrys banking system

Balancing item

+2

Reflecting errors in data

calculations

Changes to reserves of gold/

foreign currency

+9

Reserves have been reduced

by 9 to counter the deficit

OVERALL BALANCE OF
PAYMENTS

Here we see how a current account deficit has been balanced by a positive
financial account. In part, this has been helped by the selling of reserves, such as
gold and foreign currency. This is obviously not a sustainable practice.

1.6 Balance of payments vs. Balance of trade

We have seen so far that there is a difference in the types of good that are
included in the broad balance of payments equation.
To clarify, a large portion of the balance of payments calculation, is the measure
of balance of trade.

Balance of trade: is concerned with the trade of visible goods (i.e. material
goods)

Balance of payments: is more thorough as it includes not just visible

goods, but also invisible.

Definition: Visible goods

These can be recorded through customs duties and their value can be measured.
Visible goods will include anything tangible, including cars, wine and shoes.

Definition: Invisible goods

These goods are often intangible, and include things like financial services,
insurance and capital flows.
They are harder to comprehend, but still represent the flow of money in and out
of an economy.

1.7 Balance of payments explanation

The importance of the balance of payments is that it indicates whether a country
has enough savings, or other service transactions, to pay for the complete
consumption of their imports.
It is an indicator also of whether a country can produce enough output, to sustain
its growth.

Emile Woolf International

289

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Balance of payments deficit

If a country has a balance of payments deficit, this is probably owing to them
importing more goods and services than it exports. It will therefore need to
borrow from another country to pay for the imports.
This can be a useful strategy for fuelling economic growth; however it is not
sustainable in the long term.
In order to redress the imbalance, a country may have to sell off assets and other
natural resources, in order to pay for its consumption. This too cannot last
forever.
Balance of payments surplus
A country in this position is likely to export much of their production. Additionally,
the individuals and government within the country are likely to be high savers, in
order to provide enough capital to finance production, and lend to other countries.
This scenario works for short term economic growth; however for longer term
prosperity, individuals need to increase domestic consumption, by switching from
saving.
By creating domestic demand, the country will be less reliant on export-led
growth, and will be able to better sustain itself.
Terms of trade
This is defined as the ratio of export prices to import prices. It is the amount of
import goods an economy can purchase per unit of export goods.
The terms of trade are said to improve when export prices rise faster than import
prices and to worsen when import prices rise faster than export prices.
Improving terms of trade do not necessarily result in an increase in balance of
payment surplus (or a fall in the balance of payments deficit. This is because the
terms of trade refer to prices whereas the balance of payments takes both prices
and quantities into account. An improvement in the terms of trade caused by an
increase in the price of exports may bring about a proportionately greater fall in
the demand for exports leading to a worsening of the balance of payments
situation.
Opposite comments to those above could be made in respect of a worsening of
terms of trade.

1.8 Current account deficit

A much discussed economic situation that countries often find themselves in is a
current account deficit. Here we shall look in some detail at the scenario.
What is a current account deficit?
Running a deficit means that there is a net outflow of demand versus the income
that comes into a country. This can be thought of as a country not paying their
way.
The current account isnt required to balance, because the capital account can
run a surplus. As we have seen though, running a surplus is sometimes
dependent on selling reserve assets, and other unsustainable means.
Causes of a current account deficit
There can be many factors across the economy that mean a current account
deficit is likely to occur. For example:

Emile Woolf International

290

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

High income elasticity of demand for imports: with strong consumer

spending, the volume of imports will increase swiftly.

Long term decline in manufacturing potential: with a fall in the

productive potential of an economy, it is less likely that goods can be
produced and exported.

Changes in commodity prices: if a country imports a high portion of raw

material, if these prices swing drastically, then this will increase the current
account deficit.

1.9 Corrective measures to current account deficit

In response to the problems that are caused by a country persistently having a
current account deficit, there are a number of measures that a government can
take in order to correct this.
These can take the form of monetary and non-monetary measures.
Monetary measures

Exchange rate depreciation: This is where the rate of exchange of, say
Rs. for US$ increases. The concept of exchange rates is explained in
greater detail in the following section.

Example:
If the price of a car costs Rs.40,000, and the exchange rate between US$ and Rs.
was 1:4, then the car would cost $10,000 to somebody buying in the USA.
Every time a car is sold in US$, it increases exports, thus balancing the current
account deficit.
By depreciating the exchange rate to say 1:5, then the car would now be worth
$8,000.
This will increase demand for cars that Pakistan exports, as well as increasing the
price of any goods that it may import. Therefore correcting a current account
deficit.
See also sections 2-4 below for a more detailed explanation of monetary
measures.

Deflation: By bringing down the price level domestically, this can increase
the attractiveness of goods on the international market, thereby increasing
exports.

Exchange control: In an extreme version, a monetary authority may

command that exporters relinquish foreign exchange reserves to the central
bank. This has the effect of restricting the level of imports that are possible.

Non-monetary measures

Tariffs: These are duties placed upon imports. This directly increases the
price of imports, making them less attractive to the domestic market. This
also gives domestic suppliers more protection to increase the supply of
their own goods.

Emile Woolf International

291

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

Here we see that domestically, the domestic price (where domestic supply equals
domestic demand) is higher than the world price (Wp).
The level of imports is determined by the supply and demand for goods at
different price levels.
At Wp, Qd Qs must be imported.
With the addition of a tariff, the world price increases, and as such a smaller
amount is needed to be imported (Qd1 Qs1).
This therefore improves the current account deficit.

Quotas: A government may fix a permanent amount of a good that may be

imported into a country. Restricting the quantity decreases the level of
imports, thereby improving the current account deficit.

Export promotion: A government can help exporters sell their goods and
services on the international market through organising exhibitions and
trade fairs, as well as striking diplomatic deals.

Import substitution: A country can reduce the level of imports that it buys,
by becoming more self-reliant and producing these goods and services
domestically. This can be done through providing specialist training,
subsidies and tax assistance.

Emile Woolf International

292

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

DETERMINATION OF THE EXCHANGE RATE

Section overview

The foreign exchange market

Exchange rates and relative prices

High exchange rates

Diagram of foreign exchange market

Removal of disequilibrium

2.1 The foreign exchange market

Each country has its own unit of currency that is accepted by its consumers and
firms. For residents of Pakistan, this is the rupee. When people go to a store in
Pakistan the prices are denominated in rupees, and so the shopkeeper accepts
this type of currency.
Should someone have Rs.50, it is likely that he could exchange this for a loaf of
bread.
Imagine that this person is transported to the United Kingdom and goes to a store
and tries to purchase a loaf of bread with Rs.50.
The shopkeeper would probably say that he does not accept rupees and so he
cannot sell the traveller a loaf of bread.
This is because in the UK, rupees are not an accepted form of currency. In some
exceptional circumstances somebody may accept them, but in general they
cannot be used.
Nevertheless, lets imagine that somebody in Pakistan wants to go to the UK for
a holiday and all of the money that he has is in rupees. What is the traveller to
do?
He must exchange an amount of rupees for pounds () so that when he arrives
he will be able to spend money in the UK.
The quantity of pounds that the person would get for their rupees is known as the
exchange rate, and is the topic of this section.
Definition: Exchange rate
The exchange rate is the price of one currency expressed in terms of another
currency.
Our example thus far has been only on a very simple basis (i.e. buying a loaf of
bread using different currencies). There is much more complexity with the rate of
exchange between currencies.
In short, in order to exchange a quantity of rupees with a quantity of pounds, one
must interact with a Foreign Exchange Market. This brings together buyers of
rupees with sellers of rupees, and buyers of pounds with sellers of pounds (and
for all other currencies).
Therefore in order to take your wealth in one unit of currency and convert it into a
currency that can be used in a second, it is necessary to engage in the foreign
exchange market.

Emile Woolf International

293

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

This means that whenever a country wishes to trade with another, it must convert
part of its wealth into a currency that is acceptable in the other. Thus as more
international trade occurs, more money flows through the foreign exchange
market.
We will see how a different exchange rate will affect the Balance of Payments,
and what affect this will have on the countries involved.
Illustration: Foreign exchange market

Points to note:

The level of demand for PKR is a direct function of foreign demand for
Pakistani exports.

The level of supply of PKR is a direct function of Pakistani demand for

imports. The country will sell PKR balances in order to obtain the foreign
currency needed to buy them.

There is demand for some currencies as an international medium of

exchange.

2.2 Exchange rates and relative prices

An exchange rate can be viewed as a comparison of the relative prices in two
countries. The amount of one currency that is accepted for another inherently
means that it will affect the price of exports and imports.
The effect of this is best illustrated with an example.
Example:
Scenario 1: Strong Pakistani rupee (i.e. a high exchange rate from a Pakistani
perspective)
Suppose the exchange rate is Rs. 150 to 1.
(a) How much would a Rs. 350,000 export cost in the UK?
Answer: 350,000 / 150 = 2,333.3
(b) How much would a 4,500 import cost in Pakistan?
Answer: 4,500 x 150 = Rs. 675,000
Scenario 2: Weak Pakistani rupee (i.e. a low exchange rate from a Pakistani
perspective).
If the exchange rate moved to Rs. 175 to 1 the relative prices would change as
follows:
(a) How much would a Rs. 350,000 export cost in the UK?
Answer: 350,000 / 175 = 2,000
(b) How much would a 4,500 import cost in Pakistan?
Answer: 4,500 x 175 = Rs. 787,500

Emile Woolf International

294

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

2.3 High exchange rates

A high exchange rate (also described as a strong exchange rate) means that a
currency is worth more of the foreign currency compared to a time when it is
worth less of the same foreign currency. The opposite of high exchange rate is a
weak or low exchange rate.
In the previous example the first scenario reflected a high Pakistani exchange
rate (a strong rupee):

It only cost Rs.150 to buy 1;

Each Rs. was worth 1/150 = 0.0067

This compares to scenario 2 which reflected a low Pakistani exchange rate (a

weak rupee):

It cost Rs.175 to buy 1

Each Rs. was worth 1/175 = 0.0057)

The net impact is that higher exchange rates:

make imports cheaper so in the previous example the import only costs
Rs.675,000 with a strong rupee (scenario 1), whereas the same import cost
Rs.787,500 with a weak rupee (scenario 2)

make exports more expensive similarly in the previous example the

export would cost the UK consumer 2,333 facing a strong rupee (scenario
1), whereas the same export only costs the UK consumer 2,000 against a
weak rupee (scenario 2).

2.4 Diagram of foreign exchange market

Illustration:

Explanation of the demand curve for Pakistani rupees

As the exchange rate falls so the demand for Pakistani exports will extend
due to their greater competitiveness. Consequently the demand for the
rupees needed to pay for them will extend also.

Explanation of the supply curve for the currency

As the exchange rate falls so imports look less attractive. Consequently

Pakistani demand for exports will contract. As a consequence of needing
less foreign currency the supply of rupees to the exchange will contract
also.

Emile Woolf International

295

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

2.5 Removal of disequilibrium

Illustration:

Foreign currency surplus

A surplus Qs - Qd reflects a balance of payments deficit at rate Rs.

When the exchange rate falls:

demand for imports will contract (contraction in supply of rupees)

demand for exports will extend (extension in of demand for
rupees).

The process of a fall in the value of a currency will continue until a

balance of payments equilibrium is reached.

Foreign currency deficit

The shortage of Qd1 - Qs1 at rate Rsh reflects a balance of payments

surplus.

When the exchange rate rises:

demand for exports contracts (contraction in demand for rupees).

demand for imports extends (extension in supply of rupees).

Emile Woolf International

The process continues until equilibrium is reached.

296

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

GOVERNMENT POLICY TO INFLUENCE EXCHANGE RATES

Section overview

Government policy to influence exchange rates

Main policy instruments

Example: stopping the exchange rate from falling

Fixed & floating exchange rates

3.1 Government policy to influence exchange rates

The government may wish to influence exchange rates for a number of reasons:

To stabilise the currency against the pressures of short-term speculation.

To provide greater stability in order to encourage domestic firms to export

more.

To stimulate demand for exports or to reduce imports.

3.2 Main policy instruments

The domestic interest rate.

Raising the interest rate attracts speculative funds from abroad and
increases demand for rupees.

Intervention purchasing or selling of currency by a central bank.

A central bank offers to buy or sell domestic currency at a set price. This
means the rate will not fall or rise above this rate.

Structural adjustments to the behaviour of the economy.

Policy action to remove the sources of the deficits or surpluses which are
causing the rate to depreciate or appreciate.

3.3 Example: stopping the exchange rate from falling

Illustration:

Emile Woolf International

297

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Government wish the rate to be at Rt. Policy options are:

Increase the domestic interest rate and hence shift the demand curve for
rupees to D1.

Purchase the surplus rupees of Qs-Qd using foreign exchange reserves.

Deflate the economy to reduce the demand for imports. This will shift the supply
curve of rupees back to S1.

3.4 Fixed & floating exchange rates

Definition: Fixed rate
The rate is set at a fixed parity against one or more foreign currencies and the
government agrees to buy or sell at this rate to stop fluctuations.

Definition: Floating rate

The rate is set by the unhindered forces of demand and supply for the currency on
the foreign exchange markets.
Advantages of fixed exchange rates

Avoids damaging speculation against the currency.

Promotes free-trade as importers and exporters are released from

exchange rate risk.

Forces governments to follow responsible economic policies at home

because excess aggregate demand and inflation would make it very difficult
to support the currency in the long term.

Advantages of floating exchange rates

Avoids the need for government intervention in the foreign exchange

markets and the costly use of foreign exchange reserves.

May act automatically to correct balance of payments disequilibrium.

Frees the policy instruments of government to concentrate on internal

issues such as unemployment and inflation.

Emile Woolf International

298

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

DEVALUATION
Section overview

Devaluation

J curve (and inverse J-curve)

4.1 Devaluation
Devaluation describes a policy of deliberately weakening the domestic currency
against others; usually by reducing its parity value within a fixed rate system.
The objective is to reduce balance of payments deficits by:

making imports more expensive;

making exports cheaper.

The effectiveness of the policy depends on:

The price elasticity of demand for imports. If the demand is inelastic

then a rise in the price of imports will not significantly reduce the volume
demanded. It will however increase total expenditure on imports thus
deepening the deficit.

The price elasticity of demand for exports. If demand for exports is price
inelastic then a fall in their price will not significantly increase volume
demanded. It will however reduce total expenditure and thus deepen the
deficit.

Demand for imports may be price inelastic due to:

firmly entrenched preferences for overseas goods;

lack of flexibility of domestic firms to replace imports;

dependence on imported raw materials and food.

Demand for exports rendered inelastic by:

poor perceived quality of exports;

lack of flexibility of domestic firms to take advantage of export demand.

4.2 J-curve (and inverse J-curve)

The J-curve is an interesting continuation of one of the main combative strategies
to a current account deficit: exchange rate depreciation.
To recap, the logic behind depreciating the exchange rate is that exports will
become relatively cheaper, whereas imports will become relatively more
expensive. Hence, it will redress the imbalance in the balance of payments.
However, the J-curve shows how in the short run, the deficit may get worse
before improving.

Emile Woolf International

299

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Illustration:

This shows how, starting from Point A, the deficit increases before swinging up
and going into a surplus as time goes on.
Why is this the case?
Assuming that economy starts at Point A, the government decides to devalue the
currency.
The reason the deficit first gets bigger is to do with a time lag. Producers and
consumers will take time to adjust to the change in currencies. Producers, for
example, will have orders with firms in other countries at agreed prices, and will
not be able to respond to the price change.
Export revenues may therefore not rise immediately. However import revenues
may increase sharply due to high inelastic demand for foreign goods. This would
make the deficit greater.
After time, firms will be able to adjust to the favourable currency conditions, and
export revenues should be seen to rise.
It should be said though, that a devalued currency will lead to higher import
prices, and therefore have a contributory effect to inflation. As this is usually a
governments macroeconomic priority, many will be wary of undertaking a policy
that could so directly increase inflation.
The inverse J-curve
The opposite can also be true of countries where they are attempting to
rebalance a current account surplus.

Emile Woolf International

300

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 13: Balance of payments and trade

Illustration:

This shows how, starting from Point B, the surplus increases before swinging
down and going into a deficit as time goes on.
Certain economies may want to appreciate their currency so as to temper
demand, and make their exports relatively more expensive.
In this case, export revenues will not change, however the revenue paid for
foreign imports will fall. Consequently the current account surplus will increase in
the short run.

Emile Woolf International

301

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

302

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

CHAPTER

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

14

Financial markets
Contents
1 Financial markets

Emile Woolf International

303

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

INTRODUCTION
Learning outcomes
The overall objective of the syllabus is to enable candidates to equip themselves with the
fundamental concepts of economics and finance needed as foundation for higher studies of
finance.
LO5

Understand the basic function of financial markets.

LO5.1.1

Money market: Describe the main features and objectives of money markets.

LO5.2.1

Capital markets: Describe the main features and objectives of capital and
capital markets.

LO5.3.1

Derivative market: Describe the main features and objectives of derivatives

and derivative markets.

Emile Woolf International

304

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 14: Financial markets

FINANCIAL MARKETS
Section overview

Introduction

Money markets

Capital markets

Derivative markets

1.1 Introduction
Financial markets exist to bring together lenders (investors) with borrowers
(governments and companies).
It is often the case that the borrower is looking to raise money in order to
undertake some level of investment. An investment bank will often act as an
intermediary in the process.
The term financial markets encapsulates the trading of different financial
instruments, on various different terms, all in order to find a solution that works for
both parties.

1.2 Money markets

Money markets act as any other market would bringing together buyers and
sellers of a specific tradable good. Rather than being shoes, or books, the
instruments that are being sold are referred to as: short-term credit.
Definition: Short-term credit
A financial instrument that has a maturity date of, usually, less than 3 months.
These are issued by companies or governments who need to increase their
liquidity in the short term. Buyers of this are investors looking to make a return on
their money.
Definition: Money market
The financial market which is used to raise short-term credit.
Components of the money market
The money market is a subsection of the wider fixed income market. It is used by
large institutions to finance short term cash needs. Examples of these are
governments, mutual funds, and other organisations with high financial backing.
The sums of money that are used on the money market are of such a high
amount, that individual investors cannot usually access it. They must do so
through a mutual fund (see later section).
Instruments of the money market
There are numerous financial instruments that can be traded on money markets.
The most marketable instrument is a Treasury Bill (or T-bill) which, as we have
seen from the above section, has a number of qualities.

Emile Woolf International

305

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Other money market instruments are Certificate of Deposits (CDs). This is a time
deposit with a commercial bank, whereby after a fixed time, a certain level of
money will be returned to the holder. This has a slightly higher yield because the
default risk is higher with a bank, than with the U.S. government.
A further instrument that is traded on the money market is Commercial Paper
which is also debt issued by a corporation, with the promise to repay the holder a
certain amount by a certain date. This is an unsecured short-term loan issued by
the company, and is usually in denominations of $100,000, somewhat restricting
access to small investors.
An understanding of how the money market works can be gained through an
example.
Example:
A government is looking to raise cash to cover an upcoming financial cost.
It issues a short-term bond that matures in one-month. Once it sells that bond, it
receives the money immediately, and one month later, it fulfils the obligation.
The bond can be traded between other agents, almost always at a discounted
price, and the final owner will receive the value of that bond when it matures (i.e.
after a month).
The government then pays this amount and the owner receives their money.
The rate of interest on money markets is dictated, or at least based on, the base
rate of the central bank.

1.3 Capital markets

The main distinction between money and capital markets is the good that is
traded. Whereas in money markets it is short-term, in capital markets it is for
longer term investments. These are instruments that have a maturity length of
over a year.
Definition: Capital market
The financial market which is largely used to raise long-term finance and capital.
Components of the capital market
The capital markets are some of the most closely tracked financial indicators in
the economy. The stock market and bond markets are considered proxies for the
wider economy, and the participants who act in the markets are closely
scrutinised.
The main types of organisation that operate in the markets are as follows:

Corporations

Commercial banks

Stock exchanges

Investors

Nonbank institutions (insurance companies/ mortgage banks)

Corporations mainly use capital markets to fund long term projects that they wish
to undertake. They use a commercial bank to deal with the mechanics of taking
their offering to the market, which usually happens on a stock exchange. It is

Emile Woolf International

306

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 14: Financial markets

then investors who, using commercial banks again, will purchase the instruments
that are being sold.
Instruments of the capital market
On the capital markets, there are a number of different instruments that can be
bought or sold. These broadly fit into two categories: debt and equity. Debt is a
corporation issuing an agreement to repay a certain sum at a later date, and
equity is selling rights of ownership in the company.
There a number of the financial instruments listed above that are traded.
In terms of debt, these include, but are not exclusive to: sovereign bonds,
municipal bonds, debentures, corporate bonds.
Example: Sovereign bonds
A government is looking to fund a large, long-term infrastructure project and is
looking to raise funds through the capital markets.
It issues sovereign bonds, which are then purchased by investors.
This means that the government gets the funds that it requires upfront, and is able
to finance the project. Investors then are able to claim back their nominal amount
at the maturity date.
The bonds belong to the investor, and they can keep them, or trade them on the
secondary market.
On the equity side, these instruments are common stock, preference shares, or
derivatives. They are traded on a stock exchange.
Stock exchange (or stock market)
There are thousands of financial instruments that have been issued; a stock
exchange is where buyers and sellers interact.
Each corporation is listed on different exchanges, meaning that it will publish
the live prices that are being paid for the stocks.
Example: Stock exchange
Suppose an engineer in Islamabad is looking to spend some money on home
improvements. To do this, he will sell 100 shares that he owns in Corporation A.
In the early days of trading, he would have to try and find somebody willing to buy
them, which could prove problematic.
This led to the development of brokers people who act as a centre point for
buyers and sellers to come together.
The broker would therefore take the information that the engineer was looking to
sell his shares, and then contact other brokers, to try and find someone who is
looking to buy 100 shares.
Once a buyer is found, the brokers will contact the stock exchange where the
stocks are listed, and inform them that a deal has taken place. The brokers then
take a commission on the trade and all of the brokerages are informed of the
details of the deal.

Emile Woolf International

307

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Types of shares
There are two different types of shares that are traded on stock exchanges, and
they differ in their characteristics. The two are:

Common stock: An instrument issued by companies that can be obtained

via the primary or secondary market. Investment in the business means
part-ownership of the company, and also rights and privileges such as
voting power, and the ability to hold a position.
An investor in debt is entitled to interest payments, the equity holder may or
may not be paid dividend, depending on the companys policy.
There is a high risk factor involved, as the price of the stock can fluctuate
greatly. Holders of the instrument rank at the bottom of the scale if the
company were to go into liquidation.

Preference shares: An instrument issued by companies that rank higher

than common stock in terms of scale of preference. They possess the
same characteristics as equity in that its value is based upon the share
price fluctuating.
However it also acts similar to debt instrument, in that dividends are fixed,
and the holder does not hold any voting rights.

Example:
A large corporation is looking to fund a major factory investment project and is
looking to raise funds through the capital markets.
It issues shares, which are then purchased by investors.
In exchange for paying for part-ownership of the company, the investor may receive
dividends and other benefits for funding the project.
The shares belong to the investor, and are able to be traded on the stock market.
The rates of return are formed on a much more individual basis, and there is
more emphasis on the forces of supply and demand, rather than pegging to an
official rate of interest.
Mutual funds
This is an investment vehicle where many investors pool their resources together
to be invested in a variety of financial instruments that we have laid out above.
They are operated by professional money managers who have specialist
knowledge of the money, and capital markets.
The investment objectives of each mutual fund are explained in the investment
prospectus, and investors choose ones that best fits their profile.
The main advantage of a mutual fund is that it gives individual investors access
to the market. A mutual fund portfolio can be constructed to be diversified, and
across a range of securities. For an investor with a small amount of capital, this
would be near impossible to replicate.
However, by becoming a shareholder in a mutual fund, the investor can
participate in the gains or losses of the fund. Each share in a mutual fund can
often be sold or purchased at the Net Asset Value (NAV) of the fund.

Emile Woolf International

308

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Chapter 14: Financial markets

1.4 Derivative markets

The derivatives market is where a variety of derivative instruments are traded.
Definition: Derivatives
An instrument whose price is dependent on one or more underlying asset(s). It is
merely a contract between two parties. Changes in the underlying asset(s) can
cause great fluctuations in the price of the derivative.
Like money and capital markets, they are traded with investment banks usually
acting as the intermediaries between those looking to raise finance, and those
looking to invest.
There are two main ways that derivatives can be traded: over the counter (OTC)
and on an exchange.
OTC derivatives
The conditions for establishing and trading an OTC derivative are much less strict
than exchange traded derivatives (ETDs).
The issue and trade of each instrument is on an individual basis, meaning a
financial intermediary (usually investment bank) will make a market between
buyers and sellers.
This gives greater flexibility with regard to the terms of the deal.
However the level of risk is much higher as counter parties can be affected if the
trade loses a lot of money.
ETDs
A derivative must meet certain strict criteria to be traded on an exchange.
There are variables (maturity length, credit rating etc) that can be controlled to
allow a derivative to be traded on an exchange.
ETDs also reduce the risk involved with a transaction by ensuring that whenever
a party goes long (i.e. will see reward if the underlying price increases) there is
another party that is short.
The fact that these two positions are equalled off (net zero) means the overall
risk is reduced if the underlying price moves drastically. Performing the trade
through an official exchange also reduces the level of counterparty risk, as trades
are done through a clearing house.

Emile Woolf International

309

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Emile Woolf International

310

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Certificate in Accounting and Finance

Introduction to economics and finance

I
Index

a
Accelerator principle
Agent
Aggregate demand
Aggregate supply
Autonomous investment
Autonomous spending
Average fixed cost
Average propensity to consume
Average revenue
Average total cost
Average variable cost

c
212
5
171
167
191
185
113
189
129
117
114

Capital and financing account

288
Capital Consumption
166
Capital markets
306
Capital
9
Cardinal measures of utility
85
Central bank
261
Central planning body
15
Certificate of Deposits (CDs)
306
Ceteris paribus
30
Changes in the conditions of demand
33
Changes in the conditions of supply
40
Characteristics of a tax
256
Checking accounts (M1)
229
Choice
8
Circular flow of income
161
Cobweb Theory
81
Coincident economic indicators
250
Commercial bank
270
Commercial Paper
306
Common stock
308
Complement good
34, 69
Complements in production
44
Constant returns
121
Consumer credit
275
Consumer equilibrium
96
Consumer income
35
Consumer prices index (CPI)
234
Consumer value
32
Consumption function
183
Consumption
183

b
Balance of payments
Balance of trade
Bank credit
Bank
Barriers to entry
Bond
Budget line
Buffer stock scheme
Building society
Business cycle/s

Emile Woolf International

287, 290
289
275
270
137
225
96
79
271
216, 248

311

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Contractionary policy
Cooperative bank
Cost-push inflation
Costs of inflation
Credit creation
Credit money
Credit union
Credit
Cross price elasticity of demand
Current account deficit
Current account

252
271
236
236
282
223
271
275
68
290
287

e
Economic growth
15, 247
Economic problem (The)
3
Economic system
12
Economies of scale
125
Effective demand
173
Elastic demand
57
Elasticity of supply
210
Enterprise
9
Envelope relationship
126
Equilibrium between savings and
investment
203
Equilibrium market price
45
ETDs
309
Exchange rate depreciation
291
Exchange rate/s
264, 293
fixed
298
floating
298
Expansionary policy
252
Expected rate of return
194
Expenditure approach
164

d
Deflation
235, 291
Deflationary gap
179
Demand curve
31
Demand for money
224
Demand
28
Demand-pull inflation
238
Depression
250
Derivative markets
309
Derivatives
309
Determinants of the consumption
function
184
Determinants of the price elasticity of
supply
75
Determinants:
expectations of price changes or
shortages
35
level of consumer income
35
price of complements
34
price of substitutes
34
tastes and preferences
35
Devaluation
299
Diminishing marginal utility
88
Diminishing returns
121
Direct taxation
256
Discount-rate policy
264
Diseconomies of scale
125
Disequilibrium in output determination 204
Disposable personal income
159
Downturn
249
Dynamic supply and demand
76

f
Financial innovation
Financial intermediation
Financial markets
Firms
Fiscal Budgets
Fiscal policy
Fixed cost
Foreign currency deficit
Foreign currency surplus
Foreign traders
Full employment
Functions of money
Functions of taxation

g
Giffen good
Goldsmiths
Goods in competitive supply
Goods in joint supply

Emile Woolf International

228
278
305
6
254
252
112
296
296
6
171
221
255

312

36, 108
279
43
44

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Index

g
Goods
Government policy to influence
exchange rates
Government
Great Depression
Gross investment
Gross National Product

j
27

J-curve

297
6
200
213
158

k
Keynes Psychological Law
Keynesian aggregate supply curve
Keynesian analysis of consumption

h
High inflation
households
Hyperinflation

Emile Woolf International

184
170
185

235
6
235

Labour
9
Lagging economic indicators
251
Laissez faire
16
Land
9
Large time assets (M3)
229
Law of Demand
30
Law of diminishing marginal utility
88
Law of equi-marginal utility
98, 99
Law of substitution
99
Law of Supply
38
Law of variable proportion
122
Laws of costs (or Laws or returns)
120
Leading economic indicators
250
Limitations of the accelerator
215
Liquidity preference curve
227
Liquidity preference theory
226
Liquidity trap
226
Liquidity
219
Long Run Aggregate Supply (LRAS)
169
Long run costs
123
Long run marginal cost
127
Long run period
75
Long Run Phillips Curve
241
Long Run Total Cost (LRTC)
127
Long run
112
Low inflation
235

i
Ijara
Ijara-wa-Iqtina
Impact of inflation
Imperfect competition
Income approach
Income effect
Income elasticity of demand
Income tax
Increasing returns
Independent goods
Indifference curves
Indirect tax
Indirect taxation
Induced consumption
Induced investment
Inelastic demand
Inferior good
Inflation
Inflationary gap
Injections
Interest rate
Inverse J-curve
Investment bank
Investment
Invisible goods
Islamic economic system
Islamic financing

299

23
23
235
135
163
32, 36, 104
67
256
121
34
91
42
257
185
192
56, 57, 60
35, 67, 108
178, 233
177
161
219
299
271
191
289
19
23

m
Macroeconomics
Marginal cost

313

153
118

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

Marginal efficiency of capital (MEC)

Marginal propensity to consume
(MPC)
Marginal propensity to consume
Marginal propensity to import (MPM)
Marginal Propensity to Save (MPS)
Marginal propensity to save
Marginal rate of product
transformation
Marginal Rate of Substitution (MRS)
Marginal rate of tax on income
Marginal revenue
Market economies
Market price (The)
Market rate of interest
Maturity
Measurements of price elasticity of
demand
Microeconomics
Mixed economies
Momentary (or market) period
Monetary economics
Monetary Policy
Monetary union
Money market
Money multiplier
Money supply
Money
Monopolistic competition
Monopoly
Moral persuasion
Mudaraba
Multiplier (The)
Multiplier effect
Murabaha
Musharaka
Mutual funds

193

Nominal rate
Normal good

207
185
209
189
207

o
Objectives of monetary policy
Open-Market Operations
Opportunity cost
Ordinal measures of utility
OTC derivatives
Output gap

14
94
208
129
16
45
193
276

Emile Woolf International

266
263
10
86
309
177

55
27
17
75
221
262
261
305
282
231
219
146
136
264
23
206
206
23
23
308

Percentage method
Perfect competition
Perishable goods
Personal income
Planned economies
Point elasticity method
Precautionary
Pre-emptive purchasing
Preference shares
Price effect
Price elasticity of demand
Price elasticity of supply
Price mechanism (The)
Price stability
Price Theory
Product approach
Production Possibility Frontier
Productive inefficiency
Progressive taxes
Proportional taxes
Prosperity
Public debt

n
National debt
National income
factor cost
market price
Natural rate of unemployment
Needs
Net errors and omissions
Net National Product
Net present value

233
35, 67

60
132
49
159
15
62
225
35
308
106
53
71
45
76
29
162
13
139
255
255
249
254

253
154
160
160
243
27
288
158
193

Quantity theory of money

314

231

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Index

Supply conditions:
imposition of indirect taxes or
subsidies
price of substitutes in production
state of technology
Supply of money
Supply
Surplus

r
Rationality
Real rate
Recession
Recovery
Regressive taxes
Regulated market price
Remedies to inflation
Reservation price
Reserve ratio
Reserve requirements
Retail bank

8, 85
233
250
250
255
45
239
37
282
263, 279
271

t
Tariffs
Taxation
Technical inefficiency
Total cost
Total demand for money
Total expenditure method
Total revenue
Trade credit
Transactional money (M0)
Transactional
Transivity
Treasury Bill

s
Savings deposits (M2)
229
Savings functions
201
Savings
184
Scarcity
8
Sharia law
23
Shift in demand
47
Shift in supply
41, 48
Short Run Aggregate Supply (SRAS) 167
Short run period
75
Short Run Phillips Curve
242
Short run
111
Shortage
46
Short-term credit
305
Shutdown condition
134
Sovereign bonds
307
Specialized bank
271
Speculative
225
Stability of consumption function
190
State of technology
44
Stock exchange
307
Stock levels
37
Stock
29
Subnormal Profits
134
Subsidy
42
Substitute good
70
Substitute goods
34
Substitutes in production
43
Substitution effect
32, 103
Supernormal Profits
133
Supply conditions:
costs of resources used
41

Emile Woolf International

42
43
44
229
28
46

291
255
138
115
227
57
129
275
229
225
93
305

u
Unemployment
Unitary demand
Utility

240
58
85

v
Variable cost
Velocity of circulation of money
Very long run
Visible goods
Voluntary unemployment

114
231
112
289
241

w
Wage-price spiral
Wants
Withdrawals

315

238
27
161

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Introduction to economics and finance

x
X-inefficiency

Emile Woolf International

z
139

Zakat

316

20

The Institute of Chartered Accountants of Pakistan

Head Oce-Karachi:

Chartered Accountants Avenue, Clifton, Karachi-75600

Phone: (92-21) 99251636-39, UAN: 111-000-422, Fax: (92-21) 99251626, e-mail: [email protected]

Regional Oce-Lahore: 155-156, West Wood Colony, Thokar Niaz Baig, Raiwind Road, Lahore
Phone: (92-42) 37515910-12, UAN: 111-000-422, e-mail: [email protected]
Islamabad Oce:

Sector G-10/4, Mauve Area, Islamabad

UAN: 111-000-422, Fax: (92-51) 9106095, e-mail: [email protected]

Faisalabad Oce:

36-Z, Commerical Center, Near Mujahid, Hospital Madina Town, Faisalabad

Phone: (92-41) 8531028, Fax: (92-41) 8503227, e-mail: [email protected]

Multan Oce:

3rd Floor, Parklane Tower, Ocers Colony, Near Eid Gaah Chowk, Khanewal Road, Multan.
Phone: (92-61) 6510511-6510611, Fax: (92-61) 6510411, e-mail: [email protected]

Peshawar Oce:

House No. 30, Old Jamrud Road, University Town, Peshawar

Phone: (92-91) 5851648, Fax: (92-91) 5851649, e-mail: [email protected]

Gujranwala Oce:

2nd Floor, Gujranwala Business Center, Opp. Chamber of Commerce, Main G.T. Road, Gujranwala.
Phone: (92-55) 3252710, e-mail: [email protected]

Sukkur Oce:

Admin Block Sukkur IBA, Airport Road, Sukkur

Phone: (92-71) 5806109, e-mail: [email protected]

Quetta Oce:

Civic Business Center, Hali Road, Quetta Cantt

Phone: (92-81) 2865533, e-mail: [email protected]

Mirpur AJK Oce:

Basic Health Unit (BHU) Building Sector D, New City Mirpur, Azad Jammu and Kashmir
e-mail: [email protected]

2015

INTRODUCTION TO
ECONOMICS AND FINANCE
STUDY TEXT